Home

sdh_operating manual

1. 500 number of consecutive zeros for code 15 Switchable input voltage ranges JTTBEI IGM rn dB attenuation referred to nominal level 15 to 26 dB attenuation referred to nominal level peak input 5 V 5 7 2 2 1 5 8 a Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Bit rate Mbit s Line code Reflection coefficient 2 048 HDB3 gt 18 dB 2 50 kHz to 3 MHz 1 544 B8ZS AMI 1 3035 02 requires option 3035 90 33 2 3035 01 requires option 3035 90 34 Table 5 5 Input signal specifications LINE AUXILIARY 12 electrical Tolerance to jitter As per Tab S 4 Page S 7 LOS Loss of Signal status display LED is on if the signal input is active but no signal is present Clock recovery The appropriate bit clock is derived from the input signal and the offset from the nominal clock rate is measured Onset display In PPM uunc dagen xe si ERR eR a 3 digit Display TeSOIBTDET p be era aan OUR in 1 ppm No offset measurement is possible for Through Mode and TX clock from The recovered clock can be used for synchronizing the TX bit rate see Sec 1 2 2 Page S 4 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version
2. VI 23 6 Overhead VI 27 7 VI 32 8 Pointer VI 35 9 2 VI 38 10 Performance Analysis VI 40 Application Guide 1 INITOGUCUON ee euere teehee A 1 2 In Service monitoring A 5 3 Automatic Trouble Scan function 7 4 Automatic 5 1 1 A 10 5 Automatic 1 1 A 12 6 APS switching time measurement A 14 7 Bit error rate test A 17 8 Performance analysis to G 821 G 826 G 828 G 829 M2100 22 9 lt 1 5 1 1 1 25 10 Editing and analyzing the section path overhead A 29 11 DCC ECC bit error 1 A 34 12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter A 37 13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter A 40 14 Jitter Transfer Function 43 15 Phase Hit
3. LOS ONE a na rer input bit rate frequency offset gt 150 ppm 6 1 2 Check Mapping A check is made for the mapping structure using the Signal Label and the pointer bytes to differentiate between AU 4 and AU 3 The check is always made in channel 1 With STM 16 OC 48 signals check is made for an AU 4 structure only in ITU T mode or for AU 3 structure only ANSI mode 12 5 4 Virtual Concatenation is not recognized by the autoconfiguration function Allowed for defects Table 5 15 Defects allowed for during auto configuration If UNEQuipped is detected the mapping previously selected or a default mapping will be set Auto configuration recognizes C 11 via TU 12 mapping as C 12 mapping Specifications 5 27 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 1 3 Check Payload The check only takes account of the test patterns recommended in the relevant standards 6 1 3 1 signals Checks for unframed or framed payload signals on all hierarchy levels Allowed for defects LOF OOF AIS 6 1 3 2 signals Checks for ATM signals Allowed for defects LOF OOF AIS LCD LOF PLCP AIC IDLE DS3 5 28 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 6 1 4 Structure and results STM 64 opt unequipped HO
4. G 13 Instrument G 14 Data DACKUD cascos xz s enc RERO INERENTI NN EEG M ROSE G 14 7 1 20 with Windows 3 11 G 14 7 2 ANT 20 Windows95 and 20 G 15 DominoCOM 20 G 16 8 1 Remote operation of the DominoCOM ANT 20 G 16 8 2 Local operation of the DominoCOM ANT 20 G 17 8 3 DominoCOM ANT 20 accessories 3 17 LEII Mainframe SDH Version Notes ANT 20 ANT 20E 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Getting Started 1 Safety instructions This instrument was shipped in perfect condition To ensure that this condition is maintained and that operation is safe please follow the instructions in this section carefully 11 Correct usage This instrument may only be used under the conditions and for the purpose for which it was constructed Further information on this is given in the sections Specifications and Introduction of this operating manual Use outside the specified conditions may be dangerous and may also damage the instrument Sec 1 4 Page G 2 In particular the instrument must not be connected to measurement circuits for which it is not designed 1 2 AC voltage Before switching the instrument on make sure that the instrument operating voltage corr
5. 22 2 2 22 2 BN 3035 90 74 1 2 cence nee BN 3035 90 75 DS1 1 5 6 2 2 2 22222 2 2 2 BN 3035 90 76 VC 3 STM 1 AU 3 AU 4 sss ee BN 3035 90 77 1 For SONET versions BN 3035 42 3035 22 and BN 3038 12 option BN 3035 90 33 is required 2 For SDH versions BN 3035 41 BN 3035 21 and BN 3038 11 option BN 3035 90 34 is required 9 7 4 Remote control V 24 remote BN 3035 91 01 GPIB remote control eee RR BN 3035 92 10 LabWindows CVI BN 3038 95 99 Specifications 5 49 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 9 7 5 Remote operation Remote operation BN 3035 95 30 Remote operation via LAN BN 3035 95 31 9 7 6 Test automation CATS Test Sequencer and test case BN 3035 95 90 9 7 7 Calibration Calibration BN 3035 94 01 9 7 8 Accessories Included with instrument Trackball not included with Touchscreen Version Filter pads AC line cord 2 cables Operating manual Optional accessories Carry bag ANT 20 BN 3035 92 02 Tran
6. A 47 20 20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Wander Generator A 50 Wander Analysis to 2 5 Gbit s A 53 Maximum Tolerable Wander MTW A 58 Consecutive Identical Digit Test 052793 ADDSDODCX x Dx Edw RE EORR A 61 Setting the ATM signal structure A 63 ATM bit error rate test A 66 latency test for switches 71 latency test with background load Background 75 Sensor test loss of cell delineation LCD A 78 Measuring the CLR with a variable cell rate VBR traffic A 81 Standards Abbreviations 1 2 3 1 Alarm 9 SA 12 Technical Background 1 Multiplexing structures TB 1 2 Pointer action generation TB 2 3 Performance Analysis 6 Maintenance 1 Cleaning the instrument M 1 UA ecg epee cre eee na ae ae
7. TB 29 End to end performance objectives EEPO for 2101 6 2000 29 BIS P O 51 und 52 Threshold definition and computing for 2101 1 4 1997 TB 30 BIS P O 1 und 2 Threshold definition and computing for M 2101 6 2000 TB 31 SES 0 TB 34 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Technical Background 1 Multiplexing structures 11 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU T G 707 20777 x4 kbit s x4 smajt J veas jM Je 00 x4 C4 139 264 x1 c Bug vcs xf STH 0 cH Pointer processing 2 ve2 2 Multiplexing Aami xj Alignin Mapping TU 12 n C 12 C 12 vc 11 C 11 le Fig 1 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU T G 707 1 2 SONET Multiplexing Structure ANSI T1 105 1995 kbi s j Pointer processing Multiplexing Aligning Mapping Fig 2 Multiplexing Structure ANSI T1 105 1995 Technical Background TB 1 Mainframe Version an 2 Pointer action generation Vis Pointer Generator and Pointer Analyzer Physical layer instruments 2 1 Periodic pointers 2 1 1 Identical polarity INC or DEC T4 EEUU Fig 5 pointers with identical polarity 2 1 2 Different polarity INC DEC Fig 4 Perodic single mu
8. 5 22 5 2 Evaluation to ITU T G 821 5 22 5 3 Evaluation to ITU T 826 5 23 5 4 Evaluation to 0 828 5 23 5 5 Evaluation to ITU T 829 5 24 5 6 Evaluation to ITU T 2100 5 25 5 7 Evaluation to 2101 S 26 6 Automatic 5 27 6 1 Auto 5 27 6 1 1 Check 5 27 6 1 2 Check 0 5 27 6 1 3 Check 5 28 6 131 5 28 6 1 3 2 ATM signals 5 28 6 1 4 Structure and 5 S 29 6 2 Automatic Scan S 30 6 3 Automatic Search 9 31 6 4 Automatic Trouble Scan function 5 32 6 5 Automatic Signal Delay measurement 5 34 7 Other inputs and outputs 5 36 7 1 DCC 06 2 5 36 7 2 TRIGGOEBI25 s au x 5 37 1 9 REF CLOCK IN pii S 37 7 4 5 38 20 20 Mainframe Version hn
9. 1 AC power fails before the first set of backup data is generated On restoration of AC power the measurement is not resumed A power failure within the first 15 seconds of a measurement means that no backup data has been generated The measurement must be restarted manually A No Power alarm will not be displayed 2 AC power fails before the first set of backup data is generated The power failure lasts much longer than in the previous case On restoration of AC power the measurement is not resumed A power failure within the first 15 seconds of a measurement means that no backup data has been generated A restore start is therefore not possible the measurement must be restarted manually The duration of the power failure in this case is almost until the normal end of the measurement A No Power alarm will not be displayed Operating Fundamentals 45 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 AC power fails after the first set of backup data has been generated On restoration of AC power the last set of backup data is loaded The data is restored and the measurement resumed The time from the generation of the last set of backup data until the restore start of the measurement is indicated as a No Power alarm and is taken into account in the restored measurement values The original stop time is retrieved from the last backup data and the measurement restarted so that it ends at the stop time
10. G 6 Power SUDDIV ee of reds G 8 Protective 12 Carrying handle G 13 Instrument G 14 Data lt a 14 DominoCOM 20 16 Operating Fundamentals O O OC FP WO ND Control elements 1 Basic 8 Switching on the 20 20 8 20 13 Creating saving and loading applications O 21 MGCASUMING a 27 c O 33 How to use the O 34 Printing and exporting results O 37 ANT 20 ANT 20E behavior in the event of an power 44 BEER Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Virtual instruments 1 OVEIVIEW IS Rd ESTEE E E 1 2 VI 3 3 Insertion VI 12 4 Anomaly Defect Analyzer 14 5 Overhead
11. SA 12 Mainframe SDH Version Notes ANT 20 ANT 20E 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Standards Abbreviations 1 Recommendations Standards 1 1 ITU T recommendations G 706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check CRC procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in recommendation G 704 G 707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy SDH replaces G 707 G 708 and G 709 version of 03 93 G 742 Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kbit s and using positive justification G 751 Digital multiplex equipments operating at third order bit rate of 34368 kbit s and fourth order bit rate of 189264 bit s and using positive justification G 755 Digital multiplex equipment operating at 139264 kbit s and multiplexing three tributaries at 44736 kbit s G 772 Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems G 774 04 SDH management of sub network connection protection from the network element view G 774 05 SDH management of the connection supervision functionality HCS LCS for the network element view G 774 06 SDH unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view G 774 07 SDH G 774 implementors guide G 774 08 SDH management of radio relay systems network element view G 775 Loss of signal LOS and alarm indication signal AIS detection and clearance criteria G 780 Vocabulary of terms for SDH networks and equipment
12. OREO 0 to 782 waved na ren 0 to 764 0 427 DOING ee ee es 0 to 139 T R DOM Ye e e dod aea etch x walle waa ee ra 0 to 103 TB 4 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 6 Pointer sequences parameter Ti 14 0 25 MS 10600 S 2 to 4800000 frames 12 13 025m510 2 to 80000 frames 15050 6006 0 to 4800000 frames 1 to 2000 Technical Background TB 5 EN Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 Performance Analysis VI Performance Analysis Physical layer instrument 3 1 ANSI BELL evaluation Definitions from GR 253 and T1 231 are used for this performance analysis 3 1 1 ANSI BELL results The following results are determined and displayed Error type Explanation Errored Seconds Seconds containing at least one error EFS Error Free Sum of all error free seconds since the start of the measurement Seconds Severely Errored Severely errored seconds see Sec 3 1 3 Page TB 7 Seconds SEFS Severely Errored Seconds containing OOF LOF LOS in the Section Analysis Frame Seconds UAS Unavailable UAS is issued after 10 consecutive SES Seconds The 10 SES are counted towards the UAS tota
13. TB 13 ITU T G 826 evaluation TB 14 3 926 T6SUIS i ics x ee dc a eso X need TB 14 G 826 parameter 5 TB 15 G 826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated TB 16 G 826 G 828 M 2101 blocklengths TB 17 G 826 ISM G 828 M 2101 RSOH MSOH LP TB 17 G 826 OOS G 828 TSE G 829 TSE 2100 5 2101 5 TB 18 ITU T G 828 evaluation TB 19 G 828 TB 19 G 828 parameter settings 20 ITU T 9 829 evaluation 21 2 929 TOSHlI S 21 9 829 Multiplex section blocks per second TB 21 G 829 parameter 5 5 TB 22 ITU T M 2100 evaluation TB 23 2100 results TB 23 M 2100 parameter 5 TB 24 End to end error reference performance objectives MT c 25 BIS P O 51 2 Threshold definition and S Su sven nun esse en TB 25 ITU T M 2101 evaluation TB 26 near 26 M 2101 parameter 5 TB 27 End to end performance objectives EEPO for M 2101 1 4 1997
14. a Accepted PATH ALLOCATION 18 50000 Attention Check TIM PLM PATH UAS D Defect Evaluation please Fig A 37 Performance Analysis window The toolbar includes one button for each of the various measurement options The ANSI button is for performance analysis following the definitions in GR 253 and T1 231 A 23 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Before starting the measurement the path allocation Allocation the SES threshold and the UAS threshold can be set under the Settings menu item Analysis The analysis provides separate results for the NEAR END and the FAR END Put simply this means that errors occurring directly in the path are analyzed as well as errors occurring in the return path which are indicated by a REI message This allows both directions to be monitored without actually connecting to both The Verdict box gives direct indication as to whether the communications path meets the requirements of the Recommendation or not For detailed descriptions of the performance analysis see part 7 Technical Background A 24 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 9 Pointer stress test 9 1 Test setup and description 2048 kHz STM N EJ E EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ CJ EJ EJ Fig A 38 Pointer stress test setup Interfaces e electrical unbalanced Rx 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Tx 1
15. 3035 90 83 0 172 Jitter Meter 622 Mbit s requires BN 3035 90 82 BN 3035 90 84 O 172 Wander Generator up to 622 Mbit s requires BN 3035 90 81 for up to 155 Mbit s and 90 83 for 622 Mbit s BN 3035 90 85 O 172 Wander Analysator up to 622 Mbit s requires BN 3035 90 82 for up to 155 Mbit s and 90 84 for 622 Mbit s BN 3035 90 86 O 172 Wander Generator 2488 Mbit s requires ANT 20E and BN 3035 90 81 BN 3035 90 88 BN 3035 90 87 O 172 Jitter Generator Analysator 2488 Mbit s requires ANT 20E BN 3035 90 88 172 Wander Analysator 2488 Mbit s requires 20 and BN 3035 90 88 BN 3035 90 89 172 MTIE TDEV Analysis requires BN 3035 90 86 for up to 622 Mbit s and 3035 90 89 for 2488 5 BN 3035 95 21 ATM functions ATM module Includes ATM mapping 5 1 5 5 3 BN 3035 90 70 ATM Broadband 3035 90 80 Additional ATM Mappings requires ATM Module 3035 90 70 or BN 3035 90 80 STS 1 51 Mbit s ciis RR ee BN 3035 90 71 E4 140 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 BN 3035 90 72 093 45 6 2 BN 3035 90 73 34
16. 4 BN 3035 90 01 34 Mbit s in STM 1 4 BN 3035 90 02 C 4 140 Mbit s in 1 BN 3035 90 03 for ANSI tributaries C 11 1 5 Mbit s in STM 1 AU 3 AU 4 11 10 12 BN 3035 90 04 45 Mbit s STM 1 4 BN 3035 90 05 C 2 6 Mbit s unframed STM 1 4 BN 3035 90 06 Extended Overhead Analysis BN 3035 90 15 amp 1 3035 90 20 functions MUX DEMUX chain 64 140 3035 90 30 DEMUX chain 64 140 3035 90 31 M13 MUX DEMUX BN 3035 90 32 Bit error rate tests 2 8 34 140 Mbit s included in SDH version 3035 01 BN 3035 90 33 Specifications S 47 a Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Optical interfaces Optical STM 1 1 3 1310 BN 3035 90 43 Optical STM 1 1 3 1550 BN 3035 90 44 Optical STM 1 1 3 1310 1550nm BN 3035 90 45 Optical STM 1 4 1 3 12
17. US ASCII External keyboard connector 03 The PC configuration must be matched to the type of external keyboard used sue Cae sa daaa oon ee IBM AT PS 2 Soy ces s s ii teed a la a ee 6 pole Mini DIN socket Mouse connector 01 AE EEE od hes we TEE ETE EET PS 2 mouse interface E me ee eee ea T d 6 pole Mini DIN socket Parallel interface 05 IEEE 1284 25 2 submin D socket Serial interface 06 MENACE se ee 4 Grae er V 24 RS 232 SOCKEL ae QR Pet ease 9 way 2 row submin D socket Battery jo es ah ene ar gn aw an wd as Lithium LION MERCED gt 5 years The battery serves as the buffer for the PC clock s supply voltage and for saving the CMOS setup S 41 Mainframe Version AN LAE 9 General specifications 9 1 Power supply Nominal voltage automatic range switching 100 to 127 V and 200 to 240 V Operating 90 to 140 V and 193 to 264 V AC INETFEQUENEY aw dO ek OCA ego e ane 50 or 60 Hz 5 Pow
18. VI 28 6 3 Window 1 VI 28 6 4 Dialog 5 VI 29 6 5 Dialog Byte Capture Option 3035 90 15 VI 30 Pointer VI 32 7 1 Main window Pointer VI 32 7 2 Generating pointer 5 VI 33 Pointer VI 35 8 1 Main window Pointer VI 35 8 2 Main window Pointer Analyzer for Virtual Concatenation 35 8 3 Window Cursor 1 36 8 4 Window Cursor for Virtual Concatenation VI 37 8 5 Menu VI 37 VI 38 9 1 Main window PDH Generator Analyzer VI 38 9 2 TX parameters VI 38 9 3 RA PAMO EEEE E VI 39 9 4 DOO 424652 eee ovata REEE EE VI 39 Performance VI 40 10 1 Main window Performance Analysis general VI 40 10 2 Performance Analysis ANSI BELL VI 41 10 3 Performance Analysis ITU T G 821 1 43 10 4 Performance Analysis ITU T 0 826 1 44 10 5 Performance Analysis ITU T G 828
19. A 63 20 1 Test setup and description A 63 20 2 Application lt A 63 ATM bit error rate test ATM BERT A 66 21 1 Test setup and description A 66 21 2 Switch configuration A 66 21 3 Application selection on the 20 A 66 21 4 Measurement A 67 latency test for switches 71 22 1 Test setup and description A 71 22 2 Switch configuration A 71 22 3 Application selection on the 20 71 22 4 Measurement 72 SEE Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 23 latency test with background load Background Generator 75 23 1 Test setup and description A 75 23 2 Switch configuration 75 23 3 Application selection on the 20 A 75 23 4 76 24 Sensor test loss of cell delineation LCD A 78 24 1 Test setup and description A 78 24 2 Switch configuration A 78 24 3 Application selection on the 20 A
20. 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 3 Installation 2 3 1 Hardware installation PCMCIA card modem Insert the PCMCIA card modem into a free PCMCIA socket just like you insert a disk into a floppy drive You do not need to power down the ANT 20 when you insert or remove the card External modem or null modem cable Connect the modem or null modem cable to the V 24 interface connector of the ANT 20 serial port COM 1 of the built in PC AT 2 3 2 Software installation under Windows 3 11 To install and configure the software on a DominoCOM ANT 20 in the same way as on an ANT 20 connect an external monitor keyboard and mouse to the built in PC AT If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 30 together with your ANT 20 the CardWare and ReachOut software packages are already installed on the ANT 20 in the directories CACARDWARE and C REACHOUT and the ReachOut program icon is shown in the Windows Program Manager The ReachOut security options are pre configured as follows The ReachOut Password List contains an entry with the User Name ANT 20 and the accompanying password ANT 20 The option Passwords Required is set to No For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user s guide If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 30 separately install the software packages as follows Installing the PCMCIA System software only required if you use a P
21. VI 45 10 6 Performance Analysis ITU T G 829 VI 47 10 7 Performance Analysis ITU T 2100 VI 49 10 8 Performance Analysis ITU T 2101 1 51 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Virtual instruments 1 Overview To allow the instrument to be operated simply and logically despite the large number of functions a user interface was developed for the ANT 20 family of instruments that makes use of virtual instruments Vis These Vis are designed so that each VI is assigned to a clearly defined task By selecting specific Vis customized applications or tools can be generated which are tailor made for each particular measurement task The following is an overview of all Vis that are available Mainframe virtual instruments Virtual instrument Function More information r Application Manager Manager and management of measurement Sec 1 1 PageV 2 _ 1 1 Page VI 2 applications Signal Structure Configures the physical layer Sec 2 Page VI 3 Anomaly Defect Generates anomalies and defects for the Sec 3 Page VI 12 Insertion physical layer including the Transmission Convergence Sublayer Anomaly Defect Analyzes anomalies defects for the Sec 4 Page VI 14 Analyzer physical layer including the Transmission Convergence Sublayer Overhead Generator Edit physical frame ov
22. 5 A 23 8 3 Measurement A 23 Pointer stress A 25 9 1 Test setup and description A 25 9 2 Application 5 A 25 9 3 Measurement A 26 Editing and analyzing the section path overhead A 29 10 1 Test setup and description A 29 10 2 Application 5 A 29 10 3 Measurement A 30 DCC ECC 1 5 1 A 34 11 1 Test setup and description A 34 11 2 Application 5 A 34 11 3 Measurement A 35 Maximum Tolerable Jitter A 37 12 1 Test setup and description A 37 12 2 Application 5 A 37 12 3 Measurement A 38 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter A 40 13 1 Test setup and description A 40 13 2 Application A 40 13 3 Measurement A 41 Jitter Transfer Function A 43 14 1 Test setup and descriptio
23. BNC Input Input 75 Q Permitted pulse amplitude HCMOS level peak input 6 V Output Reference 2 048 2 derived form internal reference or from external reference clock 25 TSE Test Sequence RZ pulses TX frame trigger SDH and SONET 50 RZ pulses TXA pattern ET RZ pulses not for 140 Mbit s unframed framed with digital word eue erc E 75 Q Pulse amplitude HCMOS level Max permitted peak applied voltage 6 V 7 3 REF CLOCK 25 Reference clock input SDH version 3035 01 DOCK BNC IMPedance on x RR a SE eie 75 Q Max permitted peak input 6 V Specifications S 37 Line code Amplitude Coupling Max permitted offset pulse shape 2 048 Mbits HDB3 2 34 V 10 FETT 000 10 ppm 2 048 MHz clock 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp 10 ppm 1 544 Mbit s B8ZS 2 34 V 10 10 ppm 1 544 MHZ clock 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp 10 pp
24. Level Input Unbalanced 14 Code Sensitivity ITU T Laser Equalizer zi Wavelength Ref Level Scrambler Descrambler Fig A 75 Interface dialog 2 Select the clock source corresponding to the clock frequency at input 25 on the TX side from the Clock Source list box Select the Wander command from the TX menu in the 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window 4 Setthe TX amplitude and frequency according to the tolerance masks of the appropriate standard 5 Select the On command from the TX menu 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help Fea 00000 jus Range Filter SET LP 5 0 MHz 7 1 1 1kHz Current Yalues Yalues Jitter peak idi Jitter peak Jitter RMS ul Fig 76 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window with wander generator activated Application Guide A 51 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 In the Application Manager select the Settings command from the Measurement menu The Measurement Settings dialog opens Start Mode Manual C Timer Start Time MM DD YY hh mm ss Gate Time Interm Time Days Hours Minutes Minutes C Seconds Seconds OK Cancel
25. mm Scrollbars Appl Filter Comment _________ a Comment for application for searching using the Application Filter Search Wi Filter criterion selection Fig O 24 The Open Application dialog window Press function key F5 MEASUREMENT START to start a measurement using the pre selected measurement parameters Tip Handling of applications is simplified by selecting filter criteria Saved applications are differentiated by the following features Date time saved TX signal structure RX signal structure Comment Using the buttons in the Application Filter field you can select a signal structure separate for the generator and receiver Only those applications having this signal structure will then be displayed Enter a comment in the Comment field to search for applications with corresponding comments The W amp G button lists only those pre defined applications with names beginning with W amp G 26 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 rt Mainframe SDH Version 6 Measuring This section basically describes how to e set the measurement duration fora manually started measurement for an automatically started measurement set the measurement parameters e g insert an anomaly start the measurement stop the measurement display the results e g using the Anomaly Defect Analyzer Other TX parameters are normally
26. Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 6 Laser safety A Caution G 4 The following options for the ANT 20 are fitted with laser output devices BN 3035 90 40 through 3035 90 59 BN 3035 91 40 BN 3035 91 41 e BN 3035 91 53 through BN 3035 91 59 Optical radiation with wavelengths in the range 1300 to 1600 nm is present at sockets 18 47 and 103 Maintenance and repair work on the laser sources should only be carried out by qualified service operatives familiar with the risks involved The laser source is active ifthe yellow LED next to the connector is on Invisible laser radiation Laser light can cause irreparable damage to the eyes particularly to the retina Never look directly into the generator outputs 18 47 and 103 or the connector end surfaces of the connected cables free ends if the laser sources are activated Never use a microscope to check the generator outputs if the laser sources are activated Do not activate the laser sources until all measurement connections have been made The output power at socket 18 of the STM 4 OC 12 module is within the limits for a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT The output power at socket 47 or 103 of the STM 16 OC 48 module or STM 64 OC 192 is also within the limits fora CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1 1993 during normal operation Under fault conditions the output power level may exceed these limits and the output is then a CLASS
27. i Error Source TSE Error Threshold 10 Settling Time Sec kHz Ul Result 0 0500 0 5000 6 5000 65 0000 1300 000 Fig A 61 Fast MTJ measurements window Analysis The table see Fig A 61 contains combinations of jitter frequencies and jitter amplitudes or default values specified by the user Starting with the smallest frequency they are set when the measurement is started After the delay set with Settling Time a check is made to determine if there are any alarms or errors in the input signal According to the result each setting is classified as OK or Failed e The measurement stops automatically when the last measurement point has been completed or by clicking on Stop A 42 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 14 Jitter Transfer Function JTF G 958 G 823 0 172 14 1 Test setup and description Application Guide TX 2 1 Calibration D UT measurement 2 Measurement with DUT RX Fig A 62 Jitter transfer function measurements setup Interfaces e electrical balanced 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 e optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Tx 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 Tx 47 Jitter transfer function measurements are of particular importance when dealing with regenerative repeaters Checks are carried out to demonstrate that the j
28. Built in operation and control computer PC 5 39 General 5 42 9 1 POWCr SUDDIV und samen ode bees EROR Here oy teca 5 42 9 2 Climatic and mechanical ambient conditions 5 42 9 2 1 Climatic and mechanical S 43 9 3 EC conformance declaration CE mark 5 43 9 3 1 interference suppression 5 43 9 3 2 interference 5 44 9 4 Noise emission S 45 9 5 5 45 9 6 5 0 5 45 9 7 Ordering 5 46 9 7 1 Mainframe 20 5 46 9 7 2 Mainframe 20 5 46 9 7 3 Re Tu EN 5 47 9 7 4 Remote Sr Rdoe xxx ar ecd 5 49 9 7 5 Remote operation 5 50 9 7 6 Test 5 50 9 7 7 5 50 9 7 8 55 5 50 9 7 9 Retrofitting Of options 5 50 Mainframe SDH Version Notes ANT 20 ANT 20E 20
29. If you often use the Instant Access Buttons or you work with other applications remove the shortcut for starting the ANT 20 program from the Startup group The ANT 20 CATS or ANT 20 NEXT programs cannot be run simultaneously If one of these programs has been started you cannot start another of these applications using the Instant Access Buttons you remove the ANT 20 program shortcut from the Startup group long term measurements will not be resumed if they are interrupted by an AC power failure Copy the ANT 20 icon back into the Startup group or use an uninterruptible power supply if you want to make long term measurements Removing the Instant Access Buttons application 1 Press the Shift key 2 Click on one of the Instant Access Buttons at the same time A context menu opens 3 Click on Exit The Instant Access Buttons are removed Press the Alt keys simultaneously when the Instant Access Buttons are activated The Instant Access Buttons are removed Editing the Instant Access Buttons Each of the Instant Access Buttons can be customized to your requirements You can change the labelling or link a button to a different application More information about how to do this is found in the README file for the Instant Access Buttons open by double clicking on the README icon 12 Operating Fundamentals
30. analyze a channel more detail select the channel and then click on the Details button The following window opens LOS LOF OOF MS AIS AIS L MS RDEIRDIEL AU LOP LOP P AU AIS AIS P HP UNEQ UNEQ P HP RDBI RDI P PDI P LOM TU LOP LOP TU AISJAIS LP UNEQ UNEQ LP RDIRDI V AIS LOF PDI C C C C C C C IE D DEIT Fig A 15 Display of alarms that occurred The alarms that occurred in the channel during the measurement are indicated by red dots Application Guide A 9 ur Mainframe SDH Version eee 4 Automatic Scan function 4 1 A 10 Test setup and description Dur ds n Fig A 16 Automatic Scan function setup In contrast to the Trouble Scan function in this function the generator and receiver channels are switched and tested simultaneously The synchronization of the selected pattern is tested in all channels in addition to the presence of any alarms The channels are then indicated in a table as being OK or not OK Interfaces e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 Tx 18 Schematic diagram Channels Channels Fig A 17 Automatic Scan mode Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 4 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in
31. interference immunity Tip Reduced functionality self recovering During the presence of interference the signal received by the instrument can be affected to such an extent that an error is detected This may for example be a code error and depending on the time of occurrence may be a bit FAS or parity error Error bursts may lead to alarms Such errors and alarms only occur when interference is present To keep the effects of interference as small as possible the system must be correctly constructed using the prescribed cables with particular attention being paid to adequate screening When using standard PC accessories make sure that these meet the requirements of the EMC regulations CE mark Immunity to electrostatic discharge to IEC 1000 4 2 or IEC 801 2 Reduced functionality self recovering up to 4 kV direct contact discharge or up to 8 kV air path discharge Immunity to radiated interference to IEC 1000 4 3 or IEC 801 3 xe AU rs ee Berne aac be ane up to 3 V m the frequency 27 MHz to 1000 MHz at 1890 MHz Rapid transient interference immunity to IEC 1000 4 4 or IEC 801 4 on signal circuits Reduced functionality up to 500 V on AC line circuits Reduced functionality up to 1kV S 44 Specific
32. optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 Tx 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 47 1550 48 1310 optical 10 Gbit s 113 Tx 103 This measurement is used to monitor a certain channel for defects and error messages that occur or to test the reaction of the DUT to artificially induced defects and error messages 7 2 Application settings Application Guide Vis required e Signal Structure e Anomaly Defect Analyzer e Anomaly Defect Insertion The signal structure has been set and the 20 is connected to the DUT Tip Make sure that you select the corresponding interface when you set the signal structure 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 28 2 Now click first on the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer button and then on the Anomaly and Defect Insertion button in the Application Manager This activates both these applications To monitor a signal only the Anomaly Defect Analyzer is needed Fig A 28 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 7 3 Measurement Example Measurement of the reaction of a DUT to the insertion of a B2 error at a rate of 1E 6 Error insertion Anomaly Defect Insertion LL i X Insertion View Help E or Te ro n 2 A
33. 1199 5501 95 159 Joued JAAR 159 NVO 1939 Buiyoums 1991109 JO 1S9 sJexejdniniw NLY IN IV The wide range of applications Fig 1 1 Introduction 2 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E The ANT 20 can always provide the answer to the wide range of measurement tasks on modern network components as the functions can be combined to match your current requirements just like adding building blocks Functions can be added at any time Color TFT display Touchscreen Mapping ATM functions STM 0 STS 1 ATM Module VT1 5 SPE DS1 with STM 1 STS 3c mapping VT6 SPE DS2 STS 1 SPE DS3 VT2 SPE E1 STM 1 12 2 Mbit s C 2 6 3 Mbit s C 3 34 Mbit s C 4 140 Mbit s C 11 1 5 Mbit s C 3 45 Mbit s STM 0 2 Mbit s 0 1 5 Mbit s STM 0 45 34 Mbit s Additional ATM mapping E4 140 Mbit s G 804 E3 34 Mbit s G 804 1 2 Mbit s G 804 STM 1 VC 3 Drop amp Insert DS1 1 5 Mbit s G 804 with Through Mode and Block amp Replace Mode DS3 45 Mbit s G 804 Extended Overhead Analysis STS 1 with APS Time Measurement and SOH TOH POH Byte Capture OC 12c STM 4c ATM Broadband Analyzer Generator BERT ATM Testing Virtual Concatenation OC 48c STM 16c BERT Optical interfaces Jitter and Wander to O 172 STM 1 1 3 1310 nm O 172 Jitter Wander Generator up to 155 Mbit s STM 1 OC 1 3 1550 nm O 172 Jitter Wander Generator 622 Mb
34. 3035 98 21 20 20 DominoCom 20 Advanced Network Tester SDH Version BN 3035 41 BN 3035 21 BN 3035 11 Software Version 7 20 Operating Manual WAVETEK WANDEL GOLTERMANN est Solutions Communications Te Please direct all enquiries to your local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann sales company The addresses are given at the end of this handbook Copyrights This product or parts of it are based upon Recommendations and or Standards of the Standardization Sector of the International Telecommunication Union ITU T and or of the European Telecommunications Standards Institute ETSI These Recommendations and Standards are subject to copyrights of these organizations Without written permission of the ITU T and or ETSI it is not permitted to copy ITU T Recommendations or ETSI standards or parts thereof and or make them available to third parties Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Eningen GmbH amp Co M hleweg 5 72800 Eningen u A 2000 Author MDD TD Translator John Nutley Order no BN 3035 98 21 Edition 16 00 07 V 7 20 Previous edition 15 00 04 V 7 1 Subject to change without notice Our normal guarantee and delivery terms apply Printed in Germany Test Sequencer for 20 Demo CVI Application Test Sequences Dear customer your ANT 20 now comes with a pre installed demo version of our ANT 20 test sequencer tool which belongs to the CATS CVI Applic
35. 5 3 5 8 5 2 2E 3 to 1E 8 am m 1 Mantissa 1 to 9 only 1 for TSE exponent 1 to 10 whole numbers Table S 11 Available anomalies and trigger modes The insertion of errors anomalies and alarms defects is mutually exclusive The first action selected is active The second action is rejected 4 1 2 A Alarm generation defects Test sensor function Test sensor thresholds AIS 140 AIS 34 yes AIS 8 AIS 2 LOF 140 LOF 34 LOF 8 LOF 2 RDI 140 RDI 34 yes RDI 8 RDI 2 Table S 12 Available defects The insertion of alarms defects and errors anomalies is mutually exclusive The first action selected is active The second action is rejected Specifications S 17 Mainframe Version AN ZU EEE 4 2 Error measurement and alarm detection RX 4 2 1 Error measurement anomalies Evaluation All errors anomalies are counted simultaneously and stored MES atk 6 etme tae 110 99 seconds or 1 to 99 minutes or 1 to 99 hours or 1 to 99 days Intermediate 1 to 99 seconds or 1 to 99 minutes Display of anomalies via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when the anomaly is present HISTORY LED yellow is on ifthe anomaly occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval FAS 140 FAS 34 FAS 8 FAS 2 140 FAS 34 FAS 8 FAS 2 FAS CRC ew SS
36. 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 4 ANT 20 windows 4 1 Overview 4 1 1 The 20 Application Title gt Application Manager window The 20 lt Application Title gt window is the control panel for the ANT 20 It performs the following important tasks Management of e Measurement applications e Virtual instruments VI associated with the measurements e Results recorded by the measurements Other functions Starting a measurement Stopping a measurement Entering the duration of a measurement etc Overview of the ANT20 lt Application Title gt window e Loading an application see Sec 5 4 Page O 25 e Creating an application see Sec 5 1 Page O 21 e Saving an application see Sec 5 3 Page O 25 e Measuring with the ANT 20 ANT 20E see Sec 6 Page O 27 e Calling up on line help see Sec 7 Page 33 Information on using the windows is found in Sec 8 Page O 34 The remaining sections cover the following topics e Printing out and exporting results see Sec 9 Page O 37 e ANT 20 ANT 20E reaction to a c power failure see Sec 10 Page O 44 Operating Fundamentals 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 1 2 Virtual instruments Various virtual instruments are combined to form a measurement application Note Up to eight virtual instruments can be loaded simultaneously A warning message 1 displayed when no further virtual instruments can be loaded Each virt
37. 20 Mainframe SDH Version Specifications The numbers in square brackets correspond to the numbers printed on the instrument Calibrated specifications for the SDH Version ANT 20 3035 01 or ANT 20E 3035 21 are marked Calibrated specifications for the SONET Version ANT 20 3035 02 or ANT 20E 3035 22 are marked Specifications S 1 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 Generator section 11 Digital signal outputs 1 1 1 LINE signal output 15 electrical Saddle d unbalanced coaxial SOCKEL UNI 9 Versacon 750 Max applied peak 5 V 155 520 CMI 0 5 V 0 05 4598 100 kHz to 240 MHz STM 0O 51 840 HDB3 OV S 0 1V gt 18dB 50 kHz to 52 MHz 878 1 1 8325 C NEN High 0 909 V Eu 736 DSX3 High sim 450 feet 728A cable DS Low High 13 8 dB DS1 1 5442 875 2 37 V 0 237 AMI 139 264 0 5 V 0 05 V gt 15 100 kHz to 240 MHz 134 368 HDB3 Bow O 01 gt 18 dB e kHz to 52 MHz 8 448 HDB3 2 37 0 2 V 2 048 HDB3 1 3035 02 requires option 3035 90 33 2 3035 01 requires option 3035 90 34 depends ANT 20 versions and options 4 from H series onwards Table S 1 LINE output 15 sign
38. Application Manager normal size BU Anomaly Defect Analyzer S fel View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help Eo 81414 mpi um HE p Anomaly Defect Insertion C User C Anomalies Defects User 00 10 20 30 40 50 00 Date 24 02 97 Time 18 16 34 Timebase sec BT Astar E Signal Structure 20 Untitled E Anomaly Defect 2 Anomaly Defect Insertic 8 1226 Task bar VI Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI Signal Structure reduced to icon buttons Fig 33 Screen display of virtual instruments O 34 Operating Fundamentals LEN ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version 8 2 controls When you select a menu command or an icon a dialog window may appear in the foreground for you to make further settings If required a dialog window can be open at the same time as a display window for example if you want to display results during a measurement and change the parameters on line The commonly used dialog window controls are described below using the User Filter VI Anomaly Defect Analyzer dialog as an example m Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help ERO 9012020 m C User Option buttons Dialog specific action buttons Unset all Standard action buttons Confirm entry Cancel Cancel ent
39. Fig A 77 Measurement Settings dialog 7 Enter the gate time required When setting the gate time remember that the period time can be very long depending on the wander frequency that you selected Select the gate time such that it corresponds to at 1 least one wander modulation period 2 mod 8 Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 or by clicking the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager Analysis The Anomaly Defect Analyzer window indicates the wander frequency or wander amplitude above which errors or alarms occur E Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Print Help MI L Dr I Display Anomalies All View Filter All User C Defects C Current A 52 No Event Date Starttime Stop time Count Fig A 78 0 START 1 2 3 4105 5 6 TSE TSE 8 TSE 9 TSE 10 TSE 11 TSE 12 13 STOP 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 24 02 97 18 13 10 0 18 13 14 0 18 13 16 0 18 13 17 0 18 13 21 6 18 13 27 0 18 13 30 0 18 13 31 0 18 13 32 0 18 13 33 0 18 13 34 0 18 13 39 0 18 13 43 0 18 13 49 4 18 13 15 0 18 13 17 0 18 13 18 0 18 13 25 0 18 13 28 0 18 13 31 0 18 13 32 0 18 13 33 0 18 13 34 0 18 13 35 0 18 13 40 0 18 13 44 0 Anomaly Defect Analyzer window
40. Instruments available Instruments groups 7 1 Physical Layer 2 Standard 3 Advanced Instruments used 1 1 1 1 1 Fig 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer 0 Signal Structure Overhead Analyzer Add gt gt 1 Anomaly Defect Analyzer Overhead Generator 1 Anomaly Defect Insertion PDH Generator Analyzer Performance Analysis lt lt Remove O 19 Check boxes for selecting deselecting instrument groups Operating Fundamentals LEN ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version This reduces the scope of the list for a given application to make it easier to locate the Vis you want to select When all options are fitted the following instrument groups are available Group 1 Physical Layer Vis for the physical layer standard Group 2 ATM Standard VIs for the ATM Module option 3035 90 70 Group ATM Advanced VIs for the Broadband Analyzer Generator option BN 3035 90 80 For applications that only involve the physical layer the Group 2 and 3 instruments can be removed 5 2 Entering the signal structure The Signal Structure virtual instrument has a special position among the 20 VIs Before you start to make the settings for your application in the various VIs the structure of the signal to which the ANT 20 is to be connected must be entered sets the interface conditions for the physical layer 1 Inthe Appli
41. Si E2 OO 0 00 00 00 00 joo S1 JEL Z1 HE MR OO 00 00 00 Fig A 52 The Overhead Generator and Overhead Analyzer windows 6 Activate the Anomaly and Defect Insertion and Anomaly and Defect Analyzer VI windows Starting the measurement Application Manager VI Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 Click on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager Analysis You can see if errors occur by means of the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer These are displayed in the line labelled TSE OH You can insert TSEs using the Anomaly and Defect Insertion VI and then observe whether these errors are reflected in the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer see below A 35 Mainframe SDH Version Anomaly Defect Insertion ie ES Insertion View Help E Anomaly C FAS 45 C CP BITS P BITS C FAS 2 E BIT CRC4 C CODE C FAS 140 C 140 REI 140 5 34 34 REI 45 C FAS 1 5 C CREG ANT 20 ANT 20E PII E3 Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help KKKA Defects d Anomalies Defects User REI 34 5 8 a C Anomalies Defects All Insertion continuous C single bursts 13 32 30 30 40 l 00 10 20 Date 05 09 97 Ti
42. Table SA 1 Overview of important ITU T recommendations G 773 Protocol suites for Q interfaces for management of transmission systems Standards Abbreviations SA 1 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E G 783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy SDH equipment functional blocks G 783 April 97 replaces G 781 G 782 and G 783 version of 01 94 G 784 Synchronous digital hierarchy SDH management G 803 Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy SDH G 804 ATM cell mapping into plesiochronous digital hierarchy PDH G 810 Definitions and terminology for synchronisation networks G 811 Timing requirements at the output of primary reference clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of international digital links G 812 Timing requirements at the output of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of international digital links G 813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks SEC G 821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating below the primary rate and forming a part of an ISDN G 823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit s hierarchy G 824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbit s hierarchy G 825 The control of jitter and wander in digital networks based on the SDH G 826 Error performance parameters and objectives for interna
43. display window To change the structure select the Signal Structure sub menu from the Edit menu The following window will be displayed Edit Signal Structure Settings Happing Hode Asyne i Framin PCM30 CRC i 053 Framin C Parity 051 Framin 051 5 ANSI Test Pattern PRBS15 Fig A 6 Signal Structure dialog window Setting the signal structure manually The setting is made column by column from left to right 1 First select in the Edit column whether you want to edit the Tx or the Rx side Then select the standard that is to apply ITU T or ANSI 2 If you click on Clear the Tx or Rx side depending on your previous choice will be cleared 3 Now set the signal structure that you require start with SDH or PDH The TX gt RX gt buttons automatically set the receiver or generator to the same settings as their counterpart The generator and receiver now have the same settings 4 Click on the OK button The configuration you selected will be set only after you have clicked on the OK button Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Setting the signal structure automatically using the autoconfiguration function This function lets you configure the ANT 20 to standard input signals automatically The electrical and optical interfaces are checked for the presence of standard PDH and STM N signals and the payload contents in each case in
44. single 1 cells Ar 2 cells Fig A 101 Anomaly and Defect Analyzer window 1 Inthe View menu select the items Anomalies and Click the appropriate icons on the toolbar Mark the item in the field Select the item continuous in the Insertion field set a Rate of 1E 6 in the selection field In the insertion menu select the item Confirm by clicking the ON button on the toolbar 6 Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 Click on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager amp Analysis You can observe the effect of the inserted error in the window of the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer There is a choice of four different windows to display the result Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Anomaly Defect nalyzer View Settings Filter Print Help Elan e 85 9 Total Results View Filter C User Fig A 102 Table display Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help A T D Anomalies Defects User C Anomalies Defects 18 28 00 00 10 20 30 40 50 Date 04 09 97 Time 18 28 34 Timebase sec BIT Fig A 103 Histogram display Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Print Help 1414141 Display Anomalies All
45. window opens 3 Double click on the New Printer icon 4 Install the printer driver 38 Operating Fundamentals rt ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version 9 2 The Print menu Application Manager The Print menu of the Application Manager allows you to collectively print out the available measurement results from the opened virtual instruments Print all Print Headers Fig 36 Print menu in the 20 Application Title gt window 9 2 1 Printing results 1 Select the Print all command in the Print menu The printer dialog for the default printer opens 2 Make any settings that are necessary 3 Start the printout 9 2 1 1 Print Headers dialog The Print Headers dialog is used to select information that is to be printed out together with the results The dialog window contains entry fields for Company logo stored as a bitmap or DIB file in a directory e Signal structure as a graph if the Signal Structure VI is loaded as text if the Signal Structure is not loaded e Printout header with data identifying the measurement Test instrument inventory number Customer name Test object description Tester s name Date Comment text information about the measurement The company logo is printed out at a fixed size with its original aspect ratio preserved on all pages of the printout The other items are printed out o
46. INCS DECS SUH DIFF Deviation Fig VI 29 Size of selected time interval 08725797 18 05 09 Second 2 Pointer value at cursor position Number of pointer increments in time interval Number of pointer decrements in time interval Pointer sum in time interval Pointer difference in time interval mo Mean deviation in ppm Cursor window Virtual instruments Pointer Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version alp 8 4 Window Cursor for Virtual Concatenation Only with option BN 3035 90 92 Channel 1 Date 25 03 98 14 51 05 Resolution Second Pointer 0 INCS 0 DECS 0 SUH 0 DIFF 0 Deviation 0 00 ppm Delta Pointer Hef Channel 1 Display mode selection Time us Delta Pointer values E NE 8 Time in microseconds Channel 2 9 9 ue Channel 3 ar Maximum minimum deviation of Channel 4 9 9 VC 4 pointers 2 through 4 relative to VC 4 pointer 1 Fig VI 30 Cursor window for Virtual Concatenation 85 Menu Print The Print menu is used to print out the results or to export them for processing using other programs Print Print out results Windows printer Printer Setup Set parameters for the default printer e g paper format etc Export Save the current results in a file for export on floppy or hard disk Print Delta Pointer Activates or deactivates pri
47. Interference to EN 50 082 1 interference suppression Interference suppression This instrument meets the requirements of EN 50 081 1 and hence limit value class B of EN 55 022 identical with CISPR 22 1985 modif DIN VDE 0878 part 3 and FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J Class A The instrument conforms to the safety aims of European regulation 89 336 EWG of 03 05 89 in respect of interference suppression A special permit for operation is not required The instrument has been tested such that the requirements in respect of interference suppression for this instrument will also be met if it is operated in a system This is conditional upon the correct construction of the system and the use of the specified connecting cables with particular attention being paid to adequate screening 5 43 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E If the device under test connected to this instrument is in itself capable of generating interfering radiation e g when the screening to the device under test is not continuous the user must ensure that any interference generated remains within the prescribed limits Suitable screening precautions may be additionally required Interference suppression corresponds to EN 55022 CISPR 22 class B Intrinsic magnetic scatter field at AC line frequency and a distance of 30 3 A m 9 3 2
48. Program Manager double click the MS DOS Prompt icon Execute C ping ip address where ip address is the IP address of the controlling PC If no connection can be established the C WINDOWS hosts file may have incorrect or missing entries or the address for the Default Gateway in Microsoft TCP IP 32 3 11b Setup may be incorrect or missing RO 9 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Modifying the system files config sys and autoexec bat In contrast to the DominoCOM ANT 20 the ANT 20 can be operated using different startup configurations that can be selected by keystrokes during startup This may be useful for example when an ANT 20 with installed network is also to be used without a network connection and without an SCM Ethernet LAN card You can modify the files config sys and autoexec bat to control the startup procedure An example is given below The lines to be added are shown in bold type Before modifying the C config sys and C autoexec bat files make copies of the original versions You cannot use the A CONFIG config sys and A CONFIG autoexec bat files on the ANT 20 TCP IP Interface installation disk to replace them but you can use parts of the files to edit the original files by using the copy and paste functions e Modifying C config sys menu menuitem org Standard Mode menuitem tcp CardWare and TCP IP Stack menudefault tcp 10 menucolor 14 1 cardware PCMCIA D
49. 3 051 and 053 signals Available with ANT 20 version 3035 02 or with ANT 20 version 3035 01 and option 3035 90 34 Test signals for bit error measurements Signal structure for all bit rates unframed test pattern e framed test pattern except DS2 Test pattern Digital WONG stan bsew edna secs ab length 16 bits Pseudo random bit sequences PRBS 11 PRBS 11 invers PRBS 15 PRBS 15 invers PRBS 20 PRBS 23 PRBS 23 invers QRSS 20 QRSS 20 with max 14 zeros Frames D Se ee hws bane 13 frame C Parity Pp unframed only D TERR D4 SF ESF ANSI T1 107 Specifications 5 9 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 1 Error insertion and alarm generation TX 3 1 1 Error insertion anomalies Error insertion anomalies bit errors in test pattern TSE code errors single errors only I8 TITIO DETROIT oingle or Rate Tip When Rate triggering is selected a bit error rate is inserted mm m P Parity DS3 2E 3 to 1E 8 CP Parity DS3 2E 3 to 1E 8 5 BPV 1E 2 to 1E 8 FEBE DS3 REI 45 2E 3 to 1E 8 1 Mantissa 1 to 9 only 1 for TSE exponent 1 to 8 whole numbers Table S 6 Available anomalies and trigger modes The insertion of errors anomalies and alarms defects is mutually exclusive The first action selected
50. 5 12 3 2 1 Error measurement 5 12 3 2 2 Alarm detection defects 5 13 3 3 amp Insert Through 5 14 dus FUMCHONS RECIPE 5 14 Clock 5 15 3 3 3 Anomaly insertion 5 15 3 3 4 Defect generation 5 15 3 3 5 5 15 4 11 4 lt 5 16 4 1 Error insertion and alarm generation 5 17 4 1 1 Error insertion anomalies S 17 4 1 2 Alarm generation S 17 an Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 2 Error measurement and alarm detection RX S 18 4 2 1 Error measurement S 18 4 2 2 Alarm detection defects S 19 4 3 Drop amp lnsert Through S 20 4 3 1 5 20 4 3 2 Clock 5 21 4 3 3 Anomaly 5 21 4 3 4 Defect 5 21 4 3 5 Measurements 5 21 5 Measurement modes 5 22 5 1 Evaluation to ANSI BELL
51. 8 and 9 of the first row of the 5 are filled with an all zeros or all ones signal The JO byte i e byte S 1 7 1 is not changed since it contains the path trace information The maximum number of overhead bits that can contain the all ones or all zeros signal depends on the signal structure Signal structure Maximum number of zero or one bits STM 4 OC 12 88 11 bytes STM 16 0C 48 376 47 bytes STM 64 OC 192 1528 191 bytes Table G 2 Maximum lengths of all zeros or all ones sequences To assist you in setting these CID overhead patterns a number of example applications are supplied along with the ANT 20 Software The applications are found on the ITU T or ANSI Application Disk A 61 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E There is an application for each of the above signal structures which sets an all ones signal with a length of 72 bits There is also an application which sets the maximum number of ones indicated in the above table for each of the signal structures The applications have the following names W amp G STM 4 VC4 16c 72 bit CID W amp G 12 1SPE 72 bit CID W amp G STM 4 VC4 16c 88 bit CID W amp G 12 1SPE 88 bit CID W amp G STM 16 VC4 16c 72 bit CID W amp G OC 48 3c 72 bit CID W amp G STM 16 4 16c 376 bit CID W amp G 48 376 bit CID W amp G STM 64 VCA 16c 72 bit CID W amp G OC 192 3cSPE 72 bit CID W amp G STM 64 VC4 16c 1528 bit CID W amp G OC 192 3cSPE 1528 bi
52. Click on Settings in the Interface menu in the Signal Structure VI 2 Select Ext Clock 2M E1 25 from the Clock Source box and click OK to confirm Interface TX Bit Rate 155 520 0 000 ppm Ext Data 2 1 25 Ext Clock 2 1 25 Bx 12 14 16 17 43 44 113 Ext Clock 1 5 MHz 25 Ext Data 1 5M D51 25 Bit Hate Offset Clock Source Output Code Level Input Code Sensitivity Laser oft Equalizer Wavelength 1310 nm Ref Level Scrambler On Descrambler Cancel 155 520 Unbalanced 14 ITU T D Fig A 40 The Interface window Selecting the sequence The Pointer Generator allows simultaneous generation of test sequences to G 783 for the AU and TU pointers Both pointers be tested simultaneously and independently of each other A 26 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe Version Pointer Generator gt lt Action View Unit Help AU Pointer C NEW C Single C INC iF Cont ALL 2 T C DEC 4800000 C INC DEC Cancel INC DEC C 8773 Inc C 43 44 Inc E C 87 3 Dec 43 44 Dec Add INC DEC C 85 4 Dec PTS Fig A 41 Pointer Generator window Click the AU button in the toolbar 2 Select 86 4 Inc from the AU Pointer bo
53. Getting Started 20 20 Getting Started Mainframe SDH Version C MOS Setup for Pentium processor Date Time Date 2777 enter current date Time 22 enter current time Hard Disk Block Fast Auto Type Mode 32 Bit PIO Master USRI Slave None First press Auto All Drives Then set the missing flags Floppy Disk Drive A Drive B Test Floppy Disk 1 44 MB None Boot Features A Boot Sequence Halt Errors Display Graphic Logo Num Lock on System Option Cache External and CPU Error Mode None DRAM Speed 60 ns Shadow Y System Bios Cachable ISA Video Shadow ISA Video Cachable Peripheral Serial Port A Auto Serial Port B Auto Parallel Port Auto Primary IDE Auto Floppy Disk Auto Normal PS 2 Mouse Enabled All other settings can be selected to suit your requirements 53 Mainframe Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 Protective cover The next figure shows how the cover of the ANT 20 can be used Position 3 NN Position 2 7 7 Fig G 5 Uses of the ANT 20 protective cover There are slots on the horizontal edge of the top side and on the lower horizontal edge of the front panel for locating the locking clips A of the cover To make sure that the cover is
54. Mainframe Version Setting Start condition MS RDI RDI L Occurrence of MS RDI or RDI L MS AIS AIS L Occurrence of MS AIS or AIS L N1 N2 TCM N1 Z6 TCM Starts recording TCM frames when the TCM FAS word has occurred Tandem Connection Monitoring Requirement The N1 N2 or N1 Z6 byte is activated for Tandem Connection Monitoring Table VI 5 Source list box continued Virtual instruments Overhead Analyzer 31 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 7 Pointer Generator 7 1 Main window Pointer Generator The Pointer Generator VI is used to generate individual pointer actions and pointer sequences according to the ITU T ANSI and Bellcore standards Direct setting of pointer value Menu bar and toolbar Zi Pointer Generator ICE gt lt Action View Conca Unit Help Pen AU Pointer NEW VALUE Single Spacing of pointers bursts generated C INC DEC 8773 Inc 43 44 Inc C 85 4 Inc C 8773 Dec C 43 44 Dec C 85 4 Dec Insert double pointers Blank out pointers Setting H1 byte bit 5 and bit 6 only Number of increments decrements and spacing T1 T2 Standard pointer sequences Pointer continuously or single increment decrement Fig VI 25 Elements of the Pointer Generator main window Menu command Icon button Function Action Trigger AU or TU pointer action View Select AU or TU pointer layer Concat Delta Point
55. PC Operating system ANT 20 series A through 2 MS DOS 6 22 Windows 3 11 ANT 20 series X 20 Windows95 The relevant copyright conditions must be observed CPU The CPU is constantly being updated The current CPU and hard disk characteristics are displayed after switching on the instrument during the boot up screen display e IM UL ED 486 DX 2 50 or better dest a edipi tea Ae nee 486 DX 4 100 or better 3 3 V technology Memory ANT 20 series A through W ORAM T 8 MB PS 2 module expandable 10 max 32 Mbyte oe ep hee oh eevee en a ea dee ee re at least 340 Mbyte Memory ANT 20 series X ANT 20E DRAN oc 16 MB PS 2 module expandable be yaraga n wed eee max 64 Mbyte 3552 ST at least 540 Mbyte Floppy drive ee ee ea ehe 3 5 1 44 Mbyte Specifications 5 39 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E PCMCIA interface 02 Controller conforms PCMCIA 2 1 PCMCIA I 11 111 cards Drive PCMCIA I 11 car
56. PS2 interface N PCMCIA interfaces A and B External keyboard connector PS2 interface External display monitor connector VGA interface External printer connector Parallel Centronics interface Serial interface V 24 interface 07 Monochrome monitor contrast control ANT 20 only fos Floppy disk drive moo Insert Tributary input mo Drop Tributary output Insert Tributary balanced input or balanced electrical input Drop Tributary balanced output or balanced electrical output Electrical input coded 1 5 to 156 Mbit s Table O 2 Control elements on the connector panel Operating Fundamentals 5 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E DONC ONE 15 Electrical output coded 1 5 to 156 Mbit s meo Electrical input STM 1 STM 4 622 Mbit s 17 Optical input OC 1 3 12 STM 1 STM 4 1310 1550 nm Optical output OC 1 3 12 STM 1 STM 4 1310 1550 nm Input output for DCC ECC signals V 11 interface guo Clock output unjittered TX clock Reference clock input 2048 kbit s 1544 kbit s ea Trigger output fo Optical power splitter Input Optical power splitter 10 output Optical power splitter 90 output Laser class label Manufacturer s name CE label ANT 20 serial number line switch AC line connector Fuse LASER LED indicator is lit when laser generator is on ERGH LOS Loss of signal LED indicators Empty slot for further options LTI Loss of timing
57. RA RA RR IM D mh Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 17 Wander Analysis to 2 5 Gbit s G 811 G 812 G 813 G 823 G 824 G 825 0 172 17 1 Test setup and description Clock STM N SEC Wander Ref Clock RX EJ EJ EJ EJ E31 EJ 958 EJ EJ EJ Be um ums um um um um DUT Fig A 79 Wander measurements setup Interfaces electrical balanced Rx 12 electrical unbalanced Rx 14 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 wander ref clock in 35 to 622 Mbit s 54 2 5 Gbit s Every SDH network element can make use of an internal clock SEC SDH Equipment Clock This clock source is synchronized by means of an SSU Synchronization Supply Unit via a 2 048 MHz clock line To check the quality of the internal clock source the clock stability of the reference source SSU is compared with that of the transmitted data signal The difference is referred to as wander The ANT 20 can be used to perform measurements on all interfaces of the instrument Application Guide A 53 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 17 2 Application setting Vis required e Signal Structure O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should at least include the following instruments see Fig A 80 Click on the button to open the
58. S1 and S2 are displayed on the results page The BISO value is computed as follows Path section B3 LPBIP 2 8 and regenerator section B1 BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES S2 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES BISO SEP Allocation x EEPO SEP x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP S2 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP VC 1 VC 2 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 2000 x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE VC 3 VC 4 VC 4 XC BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 8000 x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE Table 36 BISO formulae for the path section LPBIP 2 8 and regenerator section B1 Technical Background TB 31 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Multiplex section B2SUM BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES S2 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES
59. Setting pointers see Fig 25 1 Select the NEW VALUE option 2 Enter pointer value in entry field right 3 Press AU ON button if pointer actions have to be executed in the Administrative Unit Press TU ON button if pointer actions have to be executed in the Tributary Unit 4 Press NFD ON button to run pointer action Pointer range to ITU T G 783 AU 4 AU 3 pointer 010782 TU 3 pointer 0 to 764 TU 2 pointer 0 to 427 TU 12 pointer 0 to 139 TU 11 pointer 0 to 103 Selecting parameters T1 T4 0 25 ms to 600 s or 2 to 4800000 frames multiframes T2 T3 0 25 ms to 10 s or 2 to 80000 frames multiframes 5 ms to 600 s or 0 to 4 800000 frames multiframes n 1 to 2000 Virtual instruments Pointer Generator VI 33 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E V1 34 Delta Pointer Offset Only with option BN 3035 90 92 and Virtual Concatenation signal structure Pointer actions are possible for all channels for the TX settings STM4 or OC12 and CONCAT mapping in the Signal Structure VI Clicking on this icon or selecting the Delta Pointer Offset command in the Concatenation menu opens the Delta Pointer Offset dialog This dialog remains open until you select the Delta Pointer Offset command again Delta Pointer Offset Pointer of channel 1 is used as reference Pointer offset Channel 2 v Channel 3 v
60. Specifications S 3 5 4 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Synchronization to external signals Derived from RX clock The TX bit rate is derived from the RX clock The jitter of the incoming signal is suppressed TX side offset 0 500 ppm Minimum setting step width 2 0 eee 0 001 ppm 1 ppb Limit frequency above which jitter is suppressed approx 100 Hz Max permissible receive clock receive signal offset TX bit rate gt 51 84 Mbit s 10 ppm TX bit rate lt 51 84 Mbit S 50 ppm No TX offset is possible for DROP amp INSERT operation Option 3035 90 20 Derived from reference clock The TX bit rate is derived from reference clock 2 048 data signal 2 048 Mbit s reference clock DS1 1 544 MHz data signal 1 544 Mbit s The jitter in the incoming signal is suppressed see Sec 7 3 Page S 37 Settable offset referred to 1 544 MHz 2 048 2 500 ppm Minimum setting step 0 001 ppm 1 ppb Limit frequency above which jitter is suppressed approx 1 Hz Max permissible reference signal 10 ppm Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2
61. With monochrome display English language version Mainframe ANT 20E Advanced Network Tester ANT 20E SDH VerstOD RE Qr ew eee Gnd oe a eed BN 3035 21 One STM 1 mapping is included in the price select the mapping option you require With TFT display English and German language version Advanced Network Tester ANT 20E SONET version tees dew ee SEG BN 3035 22 One STS 1 mapping is included in the price select the mapping option you require With TFT display English language version Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 9 7 3 Options Touchscreen Touchscreen Version is supplied without trackball BN 3035 93 11 CPU RAM expansion to 32 BN 3035 93 15 SONET mappings STS 1 mappings for ANSI tributaries VT1 5 SPE STM O 1 5 Mbit s 8 5 1 BN 3035 90 10 VT6 SPE 6 Mbit s unframed STS 1 BN 3035 90 11 STS 1 SPE 45 Mbit s in STS 1 BN 3035 90 12 STS 1 mappings for ETSI tributaries VT2 SPE STM 0 2 Mbit s in 5 5 1 BN 3035 90 13 DS1 and DS3 interface Bit error rate tests 1 5 45 Mbit s included SONET version 3035 02 BN 3035 90 34 STM 1 mappings for ETSI tributaries C 12 2 Mbit s in STM 1
62. button the Cursor window opens This shows the actual pointer value and the increment or decrement of the pointer per unit time The corresponding clock deviation is indicated under the heading Deviation Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 Editing and analyzing the section path overhead 10 1 Test setup and description Aelii as c i Fig A 43 Setup for editing and analyzing the section path overhead Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced Rx 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Tx 18 optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 47 1550 nm Tx 48 1310 nm Access for manipulation of the individual bits in the SOH and POH is very important for conformance testing and fault clearance The ANT 20 allows you to immediately see the reaction to a manipulation since the windows for OH generation and analysis are displayed together on the screen This allows you to check APS information in the K1 and K2 bytes for example It is also possible to perform BERTs on the embedded communication channels 10 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure e Overhead Generator e Overhead Analyzer 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 44 2 Click on the Overhead Generator a
63. dialog will be closed Setting the VPI VCI parameters The ATM Signal Structure window is activated 1 Select ATM Channel from the Channel menu Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbar The ATM Channel dialog opens ATH Channel Ea Edit Ces Dec Rx gt T View UNI View As UNI C NHI CI VCI Filter 0 Fig A 96 Channel dialog ATM Signal Structure 2 Enter the VPI VCI parameters of the test connection for the generator and receiver 3 Confirm your entries by clicking on the OK button 4 The ATM Channel dialog will be closed The desired ATM signal structure appears in the diaplay area of the Signal Structure ATM Signal Structure Edit Channel Scrambling Traffic Load Fil Help ee 8 on 2 VPI 0 32 VPI 0 Load 100 gt 32 Fig A 97 layer signal structure Signal Structure Click on the icon in the Signal Structure VI to activate ATM traffic and the selected test cells are transmitted If this channel is not active empty cells will be transmitted e The default setting of the ATM Generator is Traffic tyoe CBR constant bit rate 100 load A 65 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 21 ATM bit error rate test ATM BERT Only BN 3
64. except B2SUM The recommendation does not define all the values for the Section Layer These undefined values have been selected as follows Measurement point Threshold value STM O B2 SES 9 600 BIP 1 MS REI SES 9 600 5 STM 1 B2 SES 28 800 BIP 1 MS REI SES 28 800 5 STM 4 B2 SES 192 000 BIP 1 MS REI SES 192 000 STM 16 B2 SES 921 600 BIP 1 MS REI SES 921 600 STM 64 B2 SES 3 686 400 BIP 1 MS REI SES 612 000 Table 39 SES thresholds TB 34 Technical Background Maintenance 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Contents Maintenance 1 Cleaning the instrument M 1 2 SOS 1 3 Exchanging Versacon 2 4 1 1 lt 3 5 Replacing the air filter pad M 4 5 1 20 4 5 2 6 Perr Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Maintenance 1 Cleaning the instrument 2 Tools Maintenance First disconnect the ANT 20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits Simply turning the instrument off using the AC power switch is not sufficiently safe To clean the housing of the ANT 20 use warm
65. for querying the assignments for the SCM Ethernet LAN card You need the assigned Base and Interrupt Request IRQ for configuring the MS TCP IP 32 software Usually Base will be 300h and IRQ 5 Modify the hosts file The hosts file in directory TCP32WFW of the ANT 20 TCP IP Interface installation disk is merely an example It must be modified to adapt to your network The hosts file must contain the IP addresses of all network nodes with which you want to communicate including the IP address of the ANT 20 itself and the IP address of the gateway if any between the ANT 20 and the controlling PC The first entry in the file is the mapping for localhost and must be left unchanged see sample hosts file hosts sam in the same directory Ask your network administrator for the required entries for the hosts file to adapt to your network Installing the MS TCP IP 32 software Start or return to Windows Insert the ANT 20 TCP IP Interface installation disk into drive A In the Network group in the Program Manager double click the Network Setup icon Choose Networks and select Install Microsoft Windows Network Confirm with OK Choose Drivers and subsequently choose Adapter Select NE2000 Compatible from the list Confirm with OK 6 Set Interrupt to the value which was assigned to the SCM Ethernet LAN card Interrupt is usually 5 Confirm with OK 7 Set Ba
66. n x 64 kbit s Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 D1 to D3 and D4 to D12 Since M 2100 evaluation requires evaluation of bit errors facilities for evaluating block errors are disabled Display of defects using LED indicators also in the Anomaly Defect Analyzer Summary display window CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval 5 25 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 5 7 Evaluation to ITU T M 2101 ES EFS SES UAS BBE and SEP are evaluated Pass Unknown Fail assessment based on the threshold values S1 and S2 for ES SES BBE and SEP The threshold values are calculated internally as per M 2101 and displayed in the results window Settings for S1 and S2 Path 0 1 to 100 BISO Bringing into Service Objectives multiplication factor 0 1 to 100 The M 2101 evaluation can be performed on the following events B1 250 MS REI B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE Evaluation of the near end and the far end is simultaneous as soon as the signal structure set allows a far end measurement Far end evaluations can only be made if REI is available Bit errors can be evaluated for e unframed patterns e framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes 1 E2 F1 F2 F2L
67. the ends of the handle extension lock into the lower slots in the handle sides Getting Started G 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 Instrument checklist The following items are supplied with the ANT 20 ANT 20E ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe Protective cover Options will be built in to the Mainframe according to your order instructions Trackball instruments equipped with touchscreen are supplied without trackball AC line power cord Bag containing two spare fuses and tools allen key and mounting key e Windows and MS DOS operating systems and handbooks ANT 20 or Windows 95 operating system and handbook ANT 20E e Operating manual e Calibration certificate or optional calibration report 7 Data backup 71 ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 The ANT 20 software together with the MS DOS and Windows operating systems are pre installed on the hard disk drive of the ANT 20 The instrument is ready to use immediately The following directories are stored on the hard disk drive of the ANT 20 c wfw sup setup exe Windows 3 XX setup program c ant20 sup disk1 setup exe ANT 20 setup program Vom disk2 diskn Table G 3 Directories on the hard disk drive of the 20 To back up the ANT 20 data copy each one of the directories c ant20 sup disk1 through c ant20 sup disk on to a separate floppy disk Tip Itis a good idea to make a backup of all the data on the hard disk drive using a suitabl
68. 00 00 00 00 Di D11 Diz 00 00 00 00 ee E2 m 1 00 00 100 00 100 00 00 Editor window Location of selected byte in row column channel Fig VI 16 Elements of the Overhead Generator main window Virtual instruments Overhead Generator VI 23 JT Mainframe SDH Version ix Menu Edit Type Descriptor Edit Type 5 2 Basic procedure Icon button ANT 20 ANT 20E Function Default Set overhead bytes to default values Byte Enter static value Trace Identifier Enter JO J1 J2 bytes ASCII string Sequence Select standard H4 sequence 4 48 off Test Pattern Fill byte with test pattern Test Pattern Group Fill byte group with test pattern External Byte Insert externally generated signal from socket 21 in selected byte External Byte Group Insert externally generated signal from socket 21 in selected byte group Bytes for APS ring and linear synchronization and path label Selection of the background POH Opens the TCM Sequence dialog for editing the TCM sequence 1 Click the SOH TOH byte in the main window which has to be edited 2 Select desired function in the toolbar 3 Press Edit button Depending on the byte type selected one of the following windows will open Edit Overhead Byte Trace Identifier Editor when JO J1 J2 or TR selected H4 sequence editor for C 11 C 12 C2 mapping VT1 5 VT2 VT6 mapping
69. 1 Requires option 3035 90 30 3035 90 31 Table 5 13 LED display of available anomalies S 18 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 4 2 2 Alarm detection defects Evaluation All alarms defects which occur are evaluated simultaneously where possible and stored Storage takes place only within a started measurement interval Time resolution of defects 100 ms Display of defects via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval e LOF 140 LOF 34 LOF 8 LOF 2 LOF LCD RDI 140 RDI 34 RDI 8 RDI 2 RDI AIS YELLOW Table S 14 LED display of available defects Specifications S 19 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 3 Drop amp lnsert Through Mode Option BN 3035 90 20 4 3 1 Functions This Option provides the following functions for all PDH multiplex options fitted to the ANT 20 Drop amp Insert This function is only available in conjunction with the following options e MUX DEMUX M13 MUX DEMUX BN 3035 90 30 to BN 3035 90 32 or e SIM 1 mappings BN 3035 90 01 to BN 3035 90 05 STS 1 mappings BN 3035 90 10 to BN 3035 90 13 or e Optical interfaces BN 3035 90 40 to BN 3035 90 48 BN 3035 90 50 and BN 3035 90 51 The characteristics and specifications for the D
70. 1310 BN 3035 90 46 Optical STM 1 4 1 3 12 1550 BN 3035 90 47 Optical STM 1 4 OC 1 3 12 1310 and 1550 BN 3035 90 48 STM 16 OC 48 1550 3035 90 53 STM 16 OC 48 1310 3035 90 54 STM 16 OC 48 1310 1550 3035 90 59 STM 64 OC 192 1550 3035 91 40 STM 64 OC 192 1550 nm Generator 3035 91 41 5 64 192 1550 nm Analyzer 3035 91 42 Optical power splitter 90 10 BN 3035 90 49 Optical Attenuator plug in SCPC uM BN 3035 90 61 OC 12c STM 4c Options OC 12c STM 4c Bit Error Tester requires Optical Module BN 3035 90 46 90 47 90 48 BN 3035 90 90 OC 12c STM 4c ATM Testing requires Optical Module BN 3035 90 46 90 47 or 90 48 and ATM Modul BN 3035 90 70 BN 3035 90 91 OC 12c STM 4c Virtual Concatenation requires Optical Module BN 3035 90 90 oder 90 91 the optiones BN 3035 90 38 91 53 91 54 91 59 are alternatives BN 3035 90 92 Optical STM 16 OC 48 15 nm Select a wavelength betwee
71. 18 Enlarged display The Anomalies One option button provides an enlarged display of a single result The single result to be displayed Total or Intermediate Result is selected from the list box The Anomalies option button switches the display back to View Num mode All other icons and menus in the enlarged display correspond to the View Num display Anomaly Defect Analyzer Oe gt lt View Settings Filter Print Help TSE Total Intermediate TSE COUNT 13 1 54E 07 Fig VI 12 Single result in enlarged display Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer 20 20 4 44 Display mode View Summary Mainframe SDH Version In View Summary display mode anomalies and defects are shown as summary during the course of the measurement E Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Eiter Help Anomaly Defect Summary View Filter User History 2 Anomalies Defects Performance Analysis 2101 Uncertain Display filter Overall evaluation of Anomalies and defects LEDs indicating events Anomalies Defects selected performance analysis Verdict of the performance Analyse BIT BLOCK evaluation indication Fig VI 13 Elements of the View Summary window Menu command Icon button Function View Graph Table Num Switch display modes Summary Alle Settings Select various det
72. 20 20 connector panel 1 3 06 6 66 90 9 50 70 0 Sh d 80 2 0 mM 43 1531 03 9 09 JILIN V 153 OSONVAGV 83153211 HOM L3N QIINYAOY QQ7 JLIN V e 1 Er 20 connector panel Fig O 3 O 3 Operating Fundamentals m Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 4 DominoCOM ANT 20 connector panel E 9 E N_ 3 leo EHe i E E Ir AN t T a _ Lele D lt SZ oE El E Lu og 5 EE _ amp 5 amp Z HO 7 lt 2 gt T i 3 i Y 8 2 8 5 I lt gt 5 50 g je 5 o Fig 4 DominoCOM 20 connector panel 4 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 1 5 Description of control elements and connectors 1 5 1 Front panel control elements see Fig O 1 Page O 1 and Fig O 5 Page O 7 am eeu 20 20 display monitor Table 1 Front panel control elements 1 5 2 Control elements and connectors on the connector panel Fig O 2 Page O 2 ANT 20 Fig O 3 Page O 3 ANT 20E and Fig O 4 Page O 4 DominoCOM ANT 20 Position Designation O Mouse connector
73. 3035 90 40 to BN 3035 90 48 BN 3035 90 50 and BN 3035 90 51 The characteristics and specifications for the Drop amp Insert function are given in the descriptions for the various options Through Mode The received signal is looped through the ANT 20 and re transmitted by the generator The ANT 20 operates in Through Mode as a signal monitor without affecting the signal Fig S 2 Through Mode Generator and receiver coupled The ANT 20 provides access to the tributary channels within the MUX DEMUX chain when used in conjunction with the PDH MUX DEMUX and M13 MUX DEMUX options BN 3035 90 30 to BN 3035 90 32 This also applies if the PDH signal is transmitted in a container The looped through signal can also be jittered using the Jitter Generator options Jitter Generator up to 155 or 622 Mbit s BN 3035 90 60 to 61 This function is available for all bit rates fitted to the instrument 5 14 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 Jitter DS1 DS1 Fig S 3 Through Mode Adding jitter to the looped through signal Clock generator Through Mode In Through Mode clock generation is always derived from the receive signal clock No offset is possible in this operating mode see Sec 1 2 2 Page 5 4 Anomaly insertion Through Mode Anomaly BPV B1 B2 and REI L Defect generation Throug
74. 5 Removing the housing covers Remove the housing covers of the ANT 20E see Fig M 6 Replace the filter pad Replace the housing covers Replace and tighten the nine hex socket screws Q9 On 09 M 6 Maintenance Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Filter pad Replacing the ANT 20E filter pad Fig M 6 M 7 Maintenance Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes M 8 Maintenance Remote Operation 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Pi Contents Remote operation 1 1 2 Remote Operation Modems RO 2 2 1 eui en na er u ar ee ger RO 2 2 2 Items included in delivery RO 2 2 3 5 3 2 3 1 Hardware installation 3 2 3 2 Software installation under Windows 3 11 RO 3 2 3 3 Software installation under Windows95 RO 4 3 Remote Operation via Ethernet IEEE 802 3 RO 6 3 1 Qui REP RO 6 3 2 Items included in delivery RO 6 3 3 Install 3 00 EHE 0 xard RO 6 3 3 1 Hardware installation RO 6 383 2 Software installation under Windows 3 11 RO 7 3 3 3 Software installation under Windows95 RO 11 LEII Mainfr
75. 52 Pointer Analyzer Pointer Zoom Diagram Cursor Print Help L Current Current TU Alarms Value Jnc Dec 14 50 30 14 51 00 T max Delta Select diagram display Pointer increments decrements 14 51 30 max Delta 25 03 98 25 03 98 VI 28 Pointer Analyzer main window for Virtual Concatenation The option buttons and the Diagram menu for selecting the diagram display and the Print Delta Pointer command are only active for virtual concatenation Virtual instruments Pointer Analyzer VI 35 gt Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 8 3 Window VI 36 Menu command Icon button Function Pointer Selects the pointer layer Zoom In Out Increase decrease time axis resolution Diagram Select the diagram display for Virtual Concatenation only Cursor First Last cl Cl Set the cursor to the start end of the record Cursor Prev Next Page 4 gt Move back forwards by half a display width Cursor Prev Next Value 4 gt Move back forwards by one pointer address Cursor Position Numerical display of pointer value at cursor position Print Print and export results Help On line help Cursor The results for the actual position of the cursor are displayed in the Cursor window It also shows the pointer increments and decrements and the equivalent clock deviation in ppm Date Time Resolution Pointer
76. 79 24 4 79 25 Measuring the CLR with a variable rate VBR traffic 81 25 1 Test setup and description A 81 25 2 Switch configuration A 81 25 9 Application selection on the 20 A 81 25 4 82 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Application Guide 1 Introduction This manual is intended to simplify use of the ANT 20 Starting with the basic settings the procedure for a successful measurement is explained step by step for each of the various measurement applications of the ANT 20 The basic settings are repeated for each subsequent application described 11 The Application Manager Application Guide Once you have switched the instrument and the Windows environment is displayed the Application Manager appears in reduced format 1 a Fig A 1 Application Manager in reduced format Minibar 1 Click on the button The full Application Manager window opens Ble Measurement dialog 8 20 Untitled Application instruments Measurement Configure Print Help Gje SIENE Apoo virtual instruments e g Signal Structure Add amp Remove dialog Toggle Minibar Normal format Fig A 2 Application Manager in normal format Virtual instruments The A
77. ANT 20 ANT 20E 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Introduction 1 The ANT 20 ANT 20E concept ANT 20 There is an ever increasing demand for flexible and versatile measurement solutions for installing maintaining and troubleshooting modern networks to allow testing of various network elements Such measurement concepts must also be economic due to the highly competitive situation which affects manufacturers installers and private and public network operators alike simple solutions for individual measurement tasks used to be sufficient These days well planned measurement concepts which can keep pace with the rapid pace of network and system development are needed The measurement equipment must be able to handle both the classical measurements for the plesiochronous hierarchy as well as being able to analyze the SDH and SONET mappings for STM 1 STS 1 In the same way measurement equipment must be able to solve complex measurement problems for systems operating at high bit rates such as STM 4 OC 12 and STM 16 OC 48 ATM test functions and performance quality analysis on ATM links are further features of the ANT 20 which ensure its suitability for future applications It can handle ATM frame structures on PDH and SDH interfaces at up to 155 Mbit s ANT 20 Advanced Network Tester is thus a future oriented solution to measurement tasks SDH and SONET networks covering a previously unimaginable range part
78. Application Title gt window are described first This will teach you the operating concept of the ANT 20 and tell you how to call up the virtual instruments VI required for a particular application and how to use them for future tasks In part 4 of this manual you will find detailed information about the windows and dialogs of the individual virtual instruments This information is also found in the on line help for the particular VI to provide instant assistance for measurement tasks In part 5 you will find some selected measurement examples which will help you to understand the basic operating sequences for the ANT 20 and how you can approach each measurement effectively Starting programs with the Instant Access Buttons Note When you switch on the ANT 20 Windows starts by default and the ANT 20 software will be loaded see Fig O 6 Other programs are installed on the ANT 20 These programs can be started with the Instant Access Buttons or using icons shortcuts Proceed as follows 1 Click on Exit in the Application menu of the ANT 20 Application Title gt Application Manager window The ANT 20 program terminates Note Programs that do not utilize the ANT 20E hardware such as Notepad Acrobat Reader or other Windows applications can be run at the same time as the ANT 20 program 2 Double click on the icon on the desktop ANT 20 Instant Access The Instant Access B
79. Cursor First Last cl Cl Moves cursor position to start end of table Cursor Prev Next 4 Moves cursor position up down a page Cursor 4 gt Moves cursor position up down by one line Filter Display selected results only user filter Print Print and export results Display filter If a large number of events that cannot all be displayed at once occur during the measurement interval long term measurement the scrollbar can be used to move the results that are not visible into the display window The option buttons display filter are used to select the results list The results for anomalies and defects can be shown separately or in a combined list in order of occurrence The Current option displays all current defects Current can only be selected during a running measurement Other selection criteria are provided in the User Filter dialog Print Export The Print menu is used to print out the measurement results or to export them for further processing using other programs Print Print out results Print Headers Definition of additional information to the measurement results g description of DUT comments etc Printer Setup Select printer paper format etc Export Save the current results in a file for export on floppy or hard disk Export Setup Set the list and decimal separators and the time format for the export file Default settings Semicolon period dot and hh
80. D1 through D3 and D4 through 012 in the SOH POH of SDH signals As the M 2101 evaluation measures block errors bit error evaluation cannot be activated Exception B2SUM BIP 1 blocks are used for this These are only accessible in the instrument via a bit error measurement For this reason block error evaluation Is not available for a M 2101 evaluation on B2SUM Display of defects via LEDs also in the Anomaly Defect Analyzer Summary display window CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval S 26 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 6 Automatic measurements 6 1 Auto configuration The auto configuration function sets the ANT 20 receiver automatically The routine searches for the presence of standard SDH SONET PDH or ATM signals at the electrical inputs for the input level ranges ITU T High or PMP Low or at the optical inputs The instrument version and options fitted are taken into account The main emphasis is placed on detecting the signal structure Detailed matching to the signal contents can be carried out manually if desired The sequence is divided into three parts e Check Interface e Check Mapping e Check Payload 6 1 1 Check Interface Matching to the physical parameters bit rate code Allowed for
81. EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x no of blocks per sec x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE BISO SEP Allocation x EEPO SEP x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP S2 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP 1 Number of blocks per second see G 826 G 828 M 2101 block lengths Table TB 38 BISO formulae for measurements on patterns TSE The measurement results are compared with the threshold values 1 and S2 as follows when determining the section status Verdict Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP gt S2 or EFS Path status rejected Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP between S1 and S2 Path status uncertain Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP lt 1 Path status accepted Meas value UAS may also be taken into account cf switch UAS limit see Tab TB 30 Technical Background TB 33 EN Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 7 2 5 SES thresholds The SES thresholds are defined in the following tables of the Recommendation M 2101 06 200 e Table B 1 M 2101 LO Path Layer e Table B 2 M 2101 HO Path Layer Table B 3 M 2101 Section Layer A SES threshold of 30 of all evaluated blocks per second is used for all measurement points
82. ES 52 Limit ES BISO ES 2x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 sqrt BISO SES S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES Table 34 BISO formulae for the multiplex section B2SUM Measurements on patterns TSE BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 sqrt BISO ES S2 Limit ES BISO ES 2x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES Table TB 35 BISO formulae for measurements on patterns TSE The measurement results are compared with the threshold values 1 and S2 as follows when determining the section status Verdict Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP gt S2 or EFS Path status rejected Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP between S1 and S2 Path status uncertain Measured value of ES SES BBE SEP x 51 Path status accepted Meas value UAS may also be taken into account cf switch UAS limit see Tab TB 30 TB 30 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 7 2 4 BIS P O S1 und S2 Threshold definition and computing for M 2101 6 2000 The BISO value is internally computed for ES SES BBE and SEP The threshold values 1 and S2 are also determined from BISO The values calculated for BISO
83. Fig A 116 1 Mark the first sequence to be inserted e g sequ_1 2 Click on the Add gt gt button The sequence is added to the Transmit List 3 Insert the other sequences by repeating 1 and 2 4 Activate the background traffic by clicking the ON button on the toolbar You will then be asked to store the settings In response enter a name e g traffic1 Start measurement Application Manager Press function key 5 Click on the green traffic signal icon Background Generator Traffic Transmit Database Help m Sequence List Control Transmit List Insert gt gt lt lt Sequence Control New Modify Copy Delete Fig 116 Background Generator window Analysis Activate the window of the ATM Traffic Analyzer The measurement results are analyzed in the same way as the results of the previous reference measurement ATM latency test for ATM switches Select the item Export in the Print menu to store the measurement results in CSV format for further processing with EXCEL 77 53 IL Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 24 Sensor test loss of cell delineation LCD Only BN 3035 90 70 24 1 Test setup and description ATM switch EI E E EJ E3 EJ EJ 0000 Cell sync alarm consecutive _ consecutive corr
84. Frame or DS1 CRC 6 0 1 Path Analysis FE CRC6 es r amp FE CRC 21 AISor OOF orLOF gt 1 AIS FE gt 1 AIS or OOForLOF OOF or LOF Table TB 12 DS1 Path Analysis FE CRC6 TB 10 Technical Background 3 1 3 8 TSE Bit Performance Monitoring Table TB 13 Bit Performance Monitoring Technical Background TB 11 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 2 ITU T G 821 evaluation ITU T G 821 evaluation corresponds to Recommendation G 821 Issue 07 95 Degraded minutes DM are also evaluated The multiplex factor used in older versions of Recommendation G 821 Annex D can be applied if required 3 2 1 G 821 results The following results are determined and displayed Errored Seconds Errored seconds as a numerical count and as an error rate Error Free Seconds Determined as error count and error rate SES Severely Errored Determined as error count and error rate Seconds Degraded Minutes Number and ratio of degraded minutes UAS Unavailable Number and ratio of unavailable seconds Seconds VERDICT Accepted Rejected Overall assessment of path accepted rejected The ES and SES error ratios are compared with the appropriate target values PATH Path allocation setting ALLOCATION Table 14 G 821 evaluation results TB 12 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 2 2 G 821 parameter settings If G 821 evaluation is selected the following
85. M 3 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 5 Replacing the air filter pad Air for cooling the ANT 20 is sucked in mainly through the left hand half of the instrument housing An air filter pad behind the left hand side panel cleans this air flow The air filter should be cleaned at regular intervals The frequency of cleaning will depend on the use and operating conditions of the instrument If the filter is not cleaned or if the instrument is operated without the filter the dust and dirt deposited may damage the instrument 5 1 ANT 20 To replace the air filter proceed as follows 1 First disconnect the ANT 20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits 2 Remove the five hex socket screws shown in the figure below Fig M 3 Removing the ANT 20 from its housing 3 Pull the ANT 20 upwards out of the housing 4 Replace the filter pad see Fig M 4 5 Slide the ANT 20 back into the housing 6 Do up the five hex socket screws again 4 Maintenance 20 20 Maintenance 1 Mainframe SDH Version Filter 4 Replacing the 20 filter pad M 5 E Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 5 2 20 To replace the air filter proceed as follows 1 First disconnect the ANT 20E from the AC line and all measurement circuits 2 Remove the nine hex socket screws shown in the figure below Fig M
86. N1 or N2 Z6 is marked Interpreter interpretation of APS sync and path label Settings ST Select expected values for trace identifier path label and H1 byte Virtual instruments Overhead Analyzer VI 27 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 2 Menu Type 6 3 Window 28 The menu is used to set the various evaluation modes for the individual bytes J1 J2 Byte and Sequence evaluation D1 to D4 Byte Test Pattern Byte and Test Pattern Group D5 to D12 Ext Byte and Ext Group E1 E2 F1 F2 Test Pattern Byte and Ext Byte K1 K2 Ext Group K3 K4 Ext Byte N1 N2 Z6 TCM evaluation Basic procedure 1 Select the byte of interest in the overhead matrix The field color changes from gray to white 2 Select the evaluation mode from the Type menu or using the corresponding icon buttons Interpreter The Interpreter window is used to display the actual content of the various bytes in plain text You can also select whether the evaluation is to be performed according to Ring APS G 841 or Linear APS G 783 Interpreter 12345678 Interpretation G 841 Bridge Code 1000 Request NA Dest Node Ident 0000 Lo K2 Source Node Ident 0000 Long Short o Short Path Code APS command bytes 5 Channel 000zzzx Protocol not defined LPK3APS Chamel 4 5 Ch
87. Performance Analyzer is loaded and an evaluation has been selected the results of this evaluation will also be displayed Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Filter Print Help Anomaly Defect Summary View Filter All C User History Anomalies Defects Performance Analysis 2101 Uncertain EN BLOCK Bild A 33 Summary display A 20 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Stopping the measurement Application Manager Stop the measurement by pressing function key F6 Click on the red traffic signal icon in the Minibar Application Manager Application Guide A 21 ur Mainframe SDH Version eee 8 Performance analysis to G 821 G 826 G 828 G 829 M 2100 M 2101 8 1 Test setup and description 1 In service monitoring Near End Far End A to B B1 B2 RDI REI B3 E E E EJ E E EJ 0088 Fig A 34 In service monitoring setup Interfaces see Sec 2 Page 5 2 Out of service measurement ME DU gt hc n os d al Fig A 35 Out of service measurement setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced Rx 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Tx 18 optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 Tx 47 1550 nm Tx 48 1310 nm e optical 10 Gbit s 113 Tx 103 These measurements are performed in order to determine
88. ReachOut and configuring the ReachOut Viewer as required you can start remote access to the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide 14 Remote operation Specifications 10 20 20 Contents Mainframe SDH Version hn Specifications 1 Generator 5 2 1 1 Digital signal S 2 1 1 1 LINE signal output 15 5 2 1 1 2 LINE AUXILIARY signal output 13 electrical 5 3 1 2 Clock generation and bit 5 3 1 2 1 Internal clock 5 3 1 2 2 synchronization to external signals 5 4 2 Receiver S 5 2 1 Digital signal 5 5 2 1 1 LINE signal input 14 5 5 2 2 LINE AUXILIARY signal input 12 electrical 5 7 2 2 1 Clock 5 8 9 1 53 lt 5 9 3 1 Error insertion and alarm generation S 10 3 1 1 Error insertion anomalies 5 10 3 1 2 Alarm generation S 11 32 Error measurement and alarm detection RX
89. SES EFS SEFS and UAS measured for various hierarchy levels Analysis is performed on the following levels e SONET Section B1 line B2SUM REI L STS path B3 REI P VT path BIP V REI V DS3 Line BPV path FE Parity FEBE DS2 Line BPV 081 Line path FE CRC6 Bit TSE Note Analysis is only possible on the selected hierarchy level The 20 20 analyzes the near end and far end where these are present The far end analysis will be interrupted if near end defects occur which make far end analysis impossible PERF Performance Analysis Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help 154 EFS 0 85 SES 4 Us 7 44 8 4 44 VI 34 Performance Analysis window showing ANSI BELL analysis Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 41 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E VI 42 Dependence of defects on different levels Some lower level defects depend on higher order defects The GR 253 T1 105 standard specifies which defects at a lower level are triggered by higher level alarms For example AIS L generates AIS P etc This is taken into account for the analysis e g an AIS L alarm generates Path SES as well as Path SES etc Note As the ANSI BELL analysis uses bit error evaluation you cannot switch to block error evaluation Further in
90. Status 0000 HP Path Label 2 00000010 TUG structure LP Path Label C27v5 xxxx 10x Asynchronous El Default Cancel Fig A 46 Descriptor window Bytes K1 K2 and K3 K4 contain control commands for the APS system automatic protection switching The byte name is shown in the left hand column The byte is shown in binary code in the center column Plain text selection boxes are found on the right hand side You can set the various commands from the ITU T standard here without having to edit individual bits Application Guide A 31 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Analyzing the overhead bytes ai Overhead Analyzer gt lt Type Interpreter Settings Help d Ru Byte 1 1 1 Bin 11110110 son afr Al 1 1 2 2 2 IO 28 28 28 01 dca ae un H3 NIS BZ B2 B2 Ke 29 4F 59 00 Fig A 47 Overhead Analyzer window The Overhead Analyzer window is very similar to the Overhead Generator in its layout The same byte matrix is used byte fields also correspond to those of the Overhead Generator The toolbar contains two different buttons IPR This button opens the Interpreter window This provides an overview of the contents of the bytes the 51 byte and bytes C2 V5 The bit patterns for each are int
91. Transfer Delay display mode The peak to peak CDV can be derived from the histogram The peak to peak CDV corresponds to the 2 point cell delay variation to ITU T 1 356 The following results are provided by the CDV evaluation mode the minimum cell delay the maximum cell delay the mean cell delay the 2 point cell delay variation 2 point CDV Cell Delay Results COY 2 point CD pp 1 76 ps Cell Transfer Delay Results Hin 3 36 ps Max 5 12 ps Mean 4 03 ps Events 2 0EHI07 1 1 2EH07 3 QEHI06 4 0EHI06 0 0 3217 Peak to peak CDV Fig 112 Delay Results display window on the Traffic Analyzer and definition of the peak to peak CDV A 74 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 23 ATM latency test with background load ATM Background Generator Only BN 3035 90 70 23 1 Test setup and description ATM switch under test Total load 1 2 Gbit s 149 Mbit s with 10 CBR streams running in fiber Fig A 113 Setup for the ATM latency test ATM switch with background load This test is performed to determine the extent to which the cell transit time through an ATM switch goes up when the switch loading Is increased by connection requests The result from the ATM Latency Test for ATM switch measurement is used as the reference To perform this measurement you must first set up the sw
92. Ul or 20 UI the range is pre set for STM 16 OC 48 in the RX Range box 3 Enter an appropriate delay time for the various measurements in the Settling Time field so that the measurement starts after the DUT has settled 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer fel E3 TH Mode View Settings Frint Help HL n tJ er 2 Range 11 6 7 Settling Time 10 10 Sec 0 1000 1 0000 10 0000 36 0000 100 0000 Fig 64 O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window for JTF measurements A 44 Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version Dialog JTF Settings JTF Settings Scan Frequency Amplitude Tolerance Mask 0 0100 0 0100 0 5 0 1000 36 0000 0 5 1 0000 100 0000 8 4 10 0000 36 0000 100 0000 Default Default Fixed Amplitude ul Adaptation C Use previous Calibration BHS Integration Period 1 Sec OF Cancel Fig A 65 Dialog JTF Settings The measurement frequencies for the JTF measurement and the specifications for the tolerance mask are found here 1 Select JTF in the Settings menu Click on the SET icon The JTF Settings dialog opens 2 If required select individual scan frequencies and amplitudes as well as altered tolerance mask values 3 If you want the measurement to be performed using a constant amplitude for all scan frequencies ch
93. after storage and transport Storage and transport can subject the instrument to severe stresses Refer to the safety instructions Sec 1 Page G 1 and all of the instructions for packing and unpacking transport Sec 2 Page G 6 Recovery time Condensation may form on an instrument which has been stored or transported at a low temperature when it is brought into a warm environment To prevent any damage wait until all signs of condensation on the instrument surfaces have disappeared before switching the instrument on The instrument is only ready for use when it has reached the guaranteed operating temperature range of 5 to 45 C The latter also applies if the instrument has been stored at a higher temperature 2 5 Ventilation Make sure that the ventilation slots are not obscured during operation The instrument must not be operated above the permitted maximum ambient temperature of 45 C Adequate ventilation must be provided Getting Started G 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 Power supply 3 1 AC line operation line frequency The ANT 20 is operated from AC line power supplies having a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz Fuse The following type and value of fuse must be used AC line voltage range Fuse type 20 100 to 240 V T3 15 A 20 100 to 240 V T5 0A Table G 2 Fuses Two spare fuses are supplied separately 3 2 Lithium batteries The ANT 20 contains lithium batteries for
94. again 2 Ifthe search is successful click the OK button If the search result is again uncertain click the Cancel button The previous signal structure settings will be reinstated which was selected before beginning Autoconfiguration Search criteria The signal structure is determined according to the following search criteria Matching to the physical parameters bit rate line code Defects taken into account LOS Further criterion Input bit rate frequency offset lt 150 ppm Virtual instruments Signal Structure 20 20 Check Mapping Check Payload Mainframe SDH Version Searches for the mapping structure using the signal label and pointer bytes distinction between AU 4 AU 3 The search is always made in channel 1 Ifthe signal is STM 16 OC 48 the search is made for an AU 4 structure only in ITU T mode or for an AU 3 structure only ANSI mode Table VI 2 Defects taken into account in autoconfiguration If an UNEQuipped signal is detected the previously selected mapping setting will be reinstated or a default mapping will be set Autoconfiguration recognizes C 11 via TU 12 mapping as C 12 mapping The search only takes account of the test patterns recommended in the standards PDH signals Search for unframed or framed payload signals on all hierarchy levels Defects taken into account LOF OOF AIS signals Search for ATM signals Defects taken
95. analysis window are used to select the values that you want to display You can limit the number of measurement points to be displayed by entering a range in the Analysis range text boxes You can select different tolerance masks from the Masks list box These can be used to give you a quick impression of whether the measured values meet the tolerance requirements or not The displayed graph can be printed out Print button and exported Export menu Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version MTIE analysis Analysis Export Options mtieTbh csv from AF 15 23 52 to 12 E37 07 23 81 1000 0 A MTIE values MTIE TDEV ns 10 0 TDEV values Observation interval 1 1 d 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 Analysis range 5 5989 47913 Masks ETSI PRC Netw lF ETS 30046231 Failed TDEY IZ rec 0 172 Analysis _ erm 4 connect points MTE Ni TDEV Sample rate 300 s Passed Failed fulfilled or not fulfilled Fig 84 MTIE and TDEV analysis Application Guide A 57 1 Mainframe SDH Version 18 Maximum Tolerable Wander MTW ANT 20 ANT 20E The Maximum Tolerable Wander MTW function is used to perform automatic measurements of wander tolerance conforming to ITU T G 823 G 824 G 825 and 0 172 and ETSI EN302084 18 1 Test setup and description synchronization Source Ref Cloc
96. and SONET signals using corresponding buttons arranged in columns Additional instrument modes are also provided Edit Signal Structure TX E dit ITU T ANSI Laws Fig VI 2 m m The dialog includes the following buttons Edit ITU T ANSI TX gt RX RX gt TX Clear Mode Normal Through Select Tx or Rx signal structure to be edited Settings Mapping Mode Asyne i Framin PCM30 CRC i 053 Framin C Parity zl D51 Framin DS1 ESF ANSI Test Pattern PRBS15 Select signal structure to ITU T SDH Select signal structure to ANSI SONET Copy Tx signal structure settings to Rx Copy signal structure settings to Tx Clear Tx or Rx signal structure settings Displaying and setting the signal structure using ITU T Tx side as an example Normal mode Tx and Rx signal structures are independent Example Through mode The Rx signal is looped through to the generator and transmitted Tx and Rx clocks are identical Example Basic procedure 1 Set Rx signal structure 2 Click the Tx button 3 Click the Through button Virtual instruments Signal Structure 20 20 Replace ADM Test Interface Electric Optical Mapping CONCAT Bulk ATM 55 Virtual instruments Signal
97. buffering the data storage memory Replacement of expired flat batteries can be carried out by your local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center The batteries need not be removed from the instrument if it is to be scrapped G 8 Getting Started 20 20 Ks 5 Mainframe SDH Version 3 3 Switching on Switching on The ANT 20 is switched on using the AC power switch located on top of the instrument switch position I When you switch on the MS DOS and Windows 3 11 Windows95 for ANT 20E operating systems will start MS DOS MS Excel Windows Windows 3 11 and Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation The ANT 20 software will then start automatically The display will then look something like the next figure is ANT20 Untitled Application Instruments Measurement Configure Print Help of Anomaly Defect Analyzer E4 View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help Es Em ED gA B C User Anomalies Defects C User m 10 20 30 40 50 00 Date 24 02 97 Time 18 16 34 Timebase sec IBIT MStart Signal Structure 20 Untitled EE Anomaly Defect An 2 Anomaly Defect Insertic 12 26 Fig G 4 ANT 20 screen after switching on 3 3 1 Solving problems Getting Started The following situations may lead to a loss of the CMOS setup data e Switching off the in
98. channel 1 1 Connect the ANT 20 to the device under test DUT 2 Select the Autoconfiguration sub menu from the Auto menu 3 Click on the Start button The input signal contents are checked The result is displayed 4 Confirming the result sets the receiver to the corresponding signal structure Setting the channels 1 Select the Channel dialog from the Channel menu You can now make settings in the active number windows 2 Click on TX gt RX or RX gt TX to set the counterpart to the same settings 3 Confirm by clicking OK Setting the interface Select the Settings dialog from the Interface menu The window displayed is split into Tx and Rx sides This window allows you to configure the interface A 4 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 In Service monitoring Application Guide This section describes how you can use your ANT 20 to monitor systems that are in service This type of monitoring is required for various measurements that are described later on 1 Monitoring from a protected monitoring point PMP of the DUT or a special test cable DU I DUT PMP 20 dB 20 EJ E EJ EI EJ E31 E E HEAR EA Fig A 7 Monitoring from a protected monitoring point PMP Interfaces electrical unbalanced Rx 14 e electrical balanced 12 2 Monitoring by looping the si
99. defects inserted from the Anomaly Defect Insertion window The following example describes how to insert a TSE Test Sequence Error with an error rate of 10 To insert e g an anomaly 1 Activate the Anomaly Defect Insertion window 2 Select Anomalies from the View menu or Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar Activate the TSE Test Sequence Error Bit Error option button in the Anomaly field Activate the continuous option button in the Insertion field Select an anomaly rate of 1E 6 from the Rate list box Click the ON button in the toolbar or Press function key F7 INSERTION ANOMALY TX ANOMALY appears in the status box in the Application Manager toolbar Theresults of the measurement in progress are displayed in the windows of the appropriate VIs in this case the Anomaly Defect Analyzer window SEE z Anomaly Defect Insertion Insertion View Help C B3 LP REI Toolbar Insertion continuous Anomaly rate bursts static Fig 0 26 The Anomaly Defect Insertion window Tip More information about the Anomaly Defect Insertion VI is found in Part 4 Section 3 or in the on line help for the window 28 Operating Fundamentals LEN ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version 6 2 Starting and stopping the measurement The m
100. ee ee M 1 3 Exchanging Versacon inserts M 2 4 Replacing 1 3 5 Replacing the air filter M 4 BEER Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Remote operation 1 Introduction PT RO 1 2 Remote Operation via Modems RO 2 3 Remote Operation via Ethernet IEEE 802 3 RO 6 Specifications 1 Generator 5 2 2 Receiver 56 5 5 3 DS1 and 053 5 9 4 11 4 lt 5 16 5 Measurement 5 22 6 Automatic S 27 7 Other inputs and outputs 5 36 8 Built in operation and control computer PC 5 39 9 1 lt lt 5 42 Index Introduction 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version f Contents Introduction 1 The 20 ANT 20E 1 1 2 20 Supremely easy to 1 4 2 1 Ideal for mobile 4 LEII Mainframe SDH Version Notes
101. ensures future viability Modern operating system Other Windows95 compatible software can be used Matches the normal work environment Easy access to PCMCIA interface without additional software Introduction 1 20 20 c gt o gt The PC concept and standard color display screen of the 20 make for superior ease of use without the need to learn new operating procedures BHuiyoums yed 1991109 JO 199 uoneanDijuoo yed jo 1 91 13NOS sno9ueynwis 5 Buas 159 SdY TOTZWWVOOTZIN ezg DZS D 28 0 928 0 L NLI sisAjeue pue uome nuuls 18 Ul0d 10 79 9 L V IW1S 61 8 1 6 515 JO uoissiusueJ 1991109 JO ISO 419 5 05 c6L 8V cL L 2O 1319 NOV Way jo Aejap euis sisAjeue pue s sAjeue ooueuJ JO UIOd 10 194 5108095 1591 E JO YOBUD 9 uoneziuoJuou S uyed sis eue pue T 1981109 JO 1591 S 29uuo 55012 se ende SJOSUOS JO 1591 1994100 10J 1S9 xn doiq ppy OP L W 29 9 L P L NLS HdS IN c 52115015 10119 pue
102. errors TSE G 829 evaluation on bit errors TSE can be performed on the following signals e Unframed patterns without bit rate limitation e Framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 through and D4 through D12 in the SOH POH of SDH signals Performance Analysis x Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help EA EA c 24 1121 7 se 8121 ES 000004 0 000009 EFS 28 i0000000 x 28 1000000 Ss 000004 0 0 00000 BBE JU 90000 9 0 000005 000004 9 0 000005 Far Help press F1 Fig VI 38 Performance Analysis window showing an ITU T G 829 analysis Virtual instruments Performance Analysis VI 47 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Note The special block error evaluation using BIP 1 blocks means that the instrument is run in bit error evaluation mode It is therefore not possible to switch to block error evaluation This does not apply to the TSE meas point for which real block errors are evaluated You cannot therefore switch to bit error evaluation when making a G 829 evaluation on TSEs Further information see part 7 Technical Background 48 Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 7 Performance Analysis ITU T M 2100 e o Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform a M 2100 analysis in the Performance Analysis window M 21
103. input signal is monitored for the presence of alarms or errors e Depending on the result each setting will be indicated as or Failed e The measurement stops automatically when the last measurement point has been tested It can also be stopped at any time by clicking on Stop A 60 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 19 Consecutive Identical Digit CID Test to G 783 Appendix X 19 1 Test setup and description Application Guide 4 Fig A 90 Test setup for consecutive identical digit tests Interfaces e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 Tx 47 1550 Tx 48 1310 nm e optical 10 Gbit s 113 Tx 103 SDH network elements must operate without errors even when long sequences occur in which the bit state remains the same all zeros or all ones sequences The Recommendations G 958 and G 783 stipulate that a network element must be able to cope with a bit sequence of zeros or ones of a length of at least 72 bits 9 bytes without errors The tolerance of a network element to all zeros or all ones sequences is known as consecutive identical digit CID immunity A method for testing the CID immunity of network elements is suggested in Appendix X of the 1999 revision of ITU T Recommendation G 783 The bytes in columns 7
104. into account LOF OOF AIS LCD LOF PLCP AIC IDLE DS3 If no pattern synchronization is reached Defect LSS the test pattern evaluation will be switched off Pattern Real Traffic 2 6 Dialog Delay Measurement DE LAY The Delay Measurement is used to measure the signal delay times between the Tx and Rx sides using characteristic patterns included in the pseudo random sequences The delay measurement is an automatic measurement made by repeating single measurements continuously It can be made using practically all the available ANT 20 signal structures Exceptions ATM signal structures Measurements in the overhead Through mode ADM test Contiguous concatenation Virtual concatenation Virtual instruments Signal Structure VI 9 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 7 10 measurement range and measurement time depend on the pattern bit rate and the pattern selected The maximum possible measured value is determined by the length of the pseudo random sequence This maximum is calculated and displayed it can be influenced by selecting a shorter or a longer test pattern Delay Measurement Ea Measurement Range Shot Trong Value 519 ms running 0 09 ms part Erint Fig VI 6 Delay Measurement dialog Dialog APS Time Measurement Option 3035 90 15 HFS The APS Time Measurement dialog is used for measuring the switching times of a
105. is active The second action is rejected S 10 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 1 2 Alarm generation defects Test sensor Test sensor threshold function AIS DS1 AIS DS3 On Off IDLE DS3 FEAC DS3 LOF DS1 On Off 2 4 2 5 2 6 LOF DS3 On Off 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 15 3 16 3 17 YELLOW DS1 On Off YELLOW DS3 RDI 1 see Tab 5 8 Table S 7 Available defects The insertion of errors anomalies and alarms defects is mutually exclusive The first action selected is active The second action is rejected __ fanaa Fri oa med ems and am Fion over second ES mend ems __ adam Fitin over second EIS mend feme iaaa oin every mutane verea _ 151 and bit in every multiframe inverted Table S 8 DS1 DS3 alarm generation Specifications S 11 Mainframe Version AN ZU EEE 3 2 Error measurement and alarm detection RX 3 2 1 Error measurement anomalies Evaluation All errors anomalies counted simultaneously and stored Gale MES ee ae 110 99 seconds or 1 to 99 minutes or 1 to 99 hours or 1 to 99 days Intermediate 1 to 99 seconds or 1 to 99 minutes Display of anomalies via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when the anomaly is present HISTORY LED yellow is on ifthe anomaly occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval
106. language and lock the keyboard to prevent inadvertent operation if required The LED Display command extends the functions of the LED display on the front panel The AU LOP LOP P LED can be used to indicate the message AU NDF in addition to the AU LOP LOP P messages The TU LOP LOP V LED can be used in the same way to indicate the message TU NDF in addition to the TU LOP LOP V messages The Keyboard Lock command disables entries using the keyboard touchscreen or trackball to prevent unintentional operation Entry is enabled again when you press the ESC key The 20 Application Title gt Minibar window must be active for this also see Sec 4 2 1 4 Page O 16 The Delete result warning item is used to activate a warning message that will appear if you perform an operating step that will result in deletion of results 4 2 2 5 The Print menu Print all Print Headers Fig O 14 The Print menu of the ANT20 Application Title gt window The Print menu of the Application Manager allows you to collectively print out the available measurement results from the opened virtual instruments 4 2 2 6 The Help menu Using Help Contents Show Error Window Abaut Fig O 15 The Help menu of the ANT20 Application Title gt window This menu opens the on line help for the Application Manager window and also opens the error
107. m C Anomalies Defects User 10 20 30 40 50 Date 240297 Time 18 16 34 Timebase sec Eu Fig O 31 Example result display in Anomaly Defect Analyzer window View Graph Setting the filter The User Filter command in the Filter menu opens the User Filter window You can make filter settings in this window so that only certain anomalies or defects are displayed The filter operates when the User option button in the current display mode is activated Filter settings can only be changed when the instrument status is STOPPED Positioning the cursor View Graph Table The command in the Cursor menu moves the cursor to a specified time section of the results list The Cursor menu also contains other commands that are used to position the cursor Printing out the results View Table Num The Print command in the Print menu 1 used to print out the results when a printer is connected to socket 05 or 06 see Sec 9 3 1 Page 40 Exporting results View Table Num The Export command in the Print menu is used to export results in a CSV formatted file This file can be processed with any word processor or spreadsheet program also see Sec 9 3 2 Page O 41 Operating Fundamentals O 31 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Setting the display resolution View Graph The commands in the Zoom menu are used to set the disp
108. mm ss respectively Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version ra 4 3 Display mode View Num In View Num display mode all anomalies are listed in a table of Total Results Count and Ratio and Intermediate Results Count and Ratio Total Results is the number of events that occurred during the entire measurement interval Intermediate Results is the number of events occurring within a defined time period Interm Time Both these time periods are set in the Application Manager Measurement Settings E Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Filter Print Help Switch to enlarged display Anomalies All t One View Filter All t User Display filter Total Results Intermediate Results 0 8 10 06 0 0 0 1 54 0 Results mea H H H H Sea BIT BLOCK evaluation indication Fig VI 11 Elements of the View Num window Menu command Icon button Function View Graph Table Num Switch display modes Summary Settings Select various detection and measurement modes Filter Display selected results only user filter Print Print and export results Help On line help Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 17 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 3 1
109. of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should at least include the following instruments see Fig A 69 2 Click on the JIT button to open the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window Fig A 69 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Application Guide 47 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 15 3 Measurement Settings 1 In the Mode menu select the PP PH command Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar The 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window opens 110 112 Jitter Generator Analyzer Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help EEE oe TK Amp NIE Ru NI Rx Range 1 7 Filter SET LP 1 3 MHz Current Values Values Jitter peak peak 008 Ulpp Jitter peak 0 004 Ulp Jitter peak 0 004 Ulp Positive Count Negative Count Phase Hit Fig 70 O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window when the auto function is turned off 2 In the Settings menu click on the General command Click on the corresponding button in the tool bar The Jitter General Settings window opens 0 172 Jitter General Settings TR Ax Amplitude BMS Integration Period Step 0 100 ut Sec Hit Threshold Fig A 71 Jitter General Settings dialog box 3 Enter the threshold values you want under Hit Threshold using the list fields 4 Confirm with OK 5 Start the me
110. of important ETSI standards Standards Abbreviations SA 5 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 5 Forum recommendations Approved Items as of May 1997 Below is a listing of all specifications completed and approved by the ATM Forum since its inception in 1991 These documents may be found on the ftp server in several different formats The document numbers listed here link to the pdf version of the document where available Technical Working Approved Specifications Specification Approved Group Date 2 0 Addendum 2 1 Data Exchange Interface version 1 0 af dxi 0014 000 Aug 1993 Interface ILMI Integrated ILMI 4 0 af ilmi 0065 000 Sep 1996 Layer Mgmt Interface LAN Emulation LAN Emulation over ATM 1 0 af lane 0021 000 Jan 1995 LAN Emulation Client Management af lane 0038 000 Sep 1995 Specification LANE 1 0 Addendum af lane 0050 000 Dec 1995 LANE Servers Management Spec v1 0 af lane 0057 000 Mar 1996 Network Customer Network Management CNM for Management ATM Public Network Service Circuit Emulation Service Interworking af nm 0072 000 Jan 1997 Requirements Logical and CMIP MIB M4 Network View CMIP MIB Spec v1 0 af nm 0073 000 Jan 1997 M4 Network View Requirements amp Logical af nm 0074 000 Jan 1997 MIB Addendum Physical Layer Issued as part of UNI 3 1 af uni 0010 002 44 736 DS3 Mbps Physical Layer 100 Mbps Multimode Fi
111. on measurements see Sec 4 2 Page 5 18 Specifications S 21 a Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 5 Measurement modes 5 1 Evaluation to ANSI BELL Evaluations can be performed on the following levels alternatives e SONET Section line STS path VT path e 053 Line path e 051 Line path e Bit Near End and Far End analyses are performed simultaneously if available ES SES EFS SEFS and UAS are evaluated The SES and UAS threshold settings correspond to GR 253 Performance Monitoring and 71 231 5 2 Evaluation to ITU T G 821 ES EFS SES and UAS are evaluated DM degraded minutes are also evaluated The multiplex factor used in older versions of Recommendation G 821 Annex D can be applied if required G 821 evaluation can be performed on the following events FAS bit errors FAS 2 FAS 8 FAS 34 FAS 140 CRC errors E bit errors Bit errors TSE Test Sequence Error The following signals can be measured when performing G 821 evaluation of bit errors TSE e unframed patterns e nx 64 kbit s e framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes 1 E2 F1 F2 Di to D3 and D4 to 012 Pass fail assessment in conjunction with path allocation of between 0 1 and 100 The SES threshold can be set as required Since G 821 evaluation requires evaluation of bit errors facilities for evaluating block errors are disabled Display of defects via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when th
112. or below this value Offsets RX Display of tributary channel offset The deviation from the nominal bit rate is shown for each tributary in pom Asterisks are displayed in the boxes if display or measurement is not possible e g because of an alarm being present or because of the signal structure setting 9 4 Dialog Idle The Idle dialog is used to set the D and NFAS bits for the idle channels Idle Channels 34 MBit s Frame Bits 11 to 12 D Input of D and N bits bits 11 and 12 8 MBit s Frame Bits 11 to 12 D N Input of D and N bits bits 11 and 12 2 MBit s NFAS Bits Input of NFAS bits Fig VI 32 Idle Channels dialog Virtual instruments PDH Generator Analyzer VI 39 PERF Mainframe SDH Version 10 Performance Analysis 10 1 Main window Performance Analysis general Menu bar and toolbar PERF Performance Analysis gt lt Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help amp G Wrens ore 22 148081455 ser 1812 G 626 HP POH NEAR END HP B3 END EB 1 84 382 646 Ta 382 5 2 5 Result display Fig VI 33 Performance Analysis window Menu Command Icon button Function Analysis OFF ar Switch off analysis Analysis ANSI ANSI analysis Analysis G 821 G 821 analysis Analysis G 826 ISM G 826 In service measurement Analysis G 826 O
113. parameters are used e Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation PDH 140 Mb FAS140 bit error PDH 34 Mb FAS34 bit error PDH 8 Mb FASS bit error PDH 2 Mb CRC4 CRC4 word error PDH 2 Mb EBIT EBIT error PDH 2 Mb FAS FAS2 bit error TSE bit error Dialog window for input of the following parameters Allocation Entry of path allocation in percent 96 Setting range 0 196 to 10096 Step width 0 1 Default 10096 The actual limit values for ESR and SESR are calculated internally ESR limit value 8 x Allocation SESR limit value 0 1 0 1 x Allocation SES Threshold Threshold for SES count Setting range 1E 2 to 1E 5 Setting values 1E 2 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 Default 1E 3 DM Threshold Threshold for DM count Setting range 1E 4 to 1E 7 Setting values 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 Default 1E 6 MUX Factor Multiplex factor input Off Evaluation to the latest G 821 recommendation On Evaluation to older G 821 recommendation Multiplex factor N 2 measurement bit rate 64 kbit s Default Off 1 Allocation indicates the percentage of the End to End target values for ESR Errored Seconds Ratio and SESR Severely Errored Seconds Ratio which must be met for the measured path to be acceptable VERDICT Accepted The End to End target values are based on the Hypothetical Reference Configuration HRX of length 27 500 km The following End to En
114. per s 3 4 1 G 828 results The following results are determined and displayed Ess Errored Errored seconds as count as an error rate Error Free Seconds Error free seconds as a count as an error rate Severely Errored Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds BBE Background Block Number and ratio of background block errors Error SEP Severely Errored Number and ratio of severely errored periods Period number of SES between 3 and 9 UAS Unavailable Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds VERDICT Accepted Uncertain Rejected Overall assessment of the path quality PATH Path allocation setting ALLOCATION PATH UAS For Far End measurements the Unavailable Seconds UAS are determined for the complete path Path UAS They are determined from the Near End and Far End results using a logical OR function Table TB 21 G 828 evaluation results Technical Background TB 19 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 4 2 G 828 parameter settings If G 828 evaluation is selected the following parameters are used e Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation RSOH 1 B1 block errors MSOH B2SUM Common evaluation of B2 and MS REI block errors HP B3 Common evaluation of B3 and HP REI block errors LP BIP2 8 Common evaluation of BIP2 8 and LP REI block errors TOM TC Diff block
115. properly fitted 1 Place the guide edge B of the cover against the appropriate edge of the instrument 2 Hook the clips A into the corresponding slots in the instrument 3 Press the clips towards the cover until they lock into place Tip The ANT 20E can only be tilted as shown in position 3 G 12 Getting Started 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 Carrying handle The carrying handle of the ANT 20 can be extended Two positions are possible The figure below shows how to set these positions The 20 1 fitted with an adjustable carry strap instead of the carry handle N E Handle side Ends of handle extention sprung 1 Handle position 1 Grip Handle extention 3 Handle position 2 Fig G 6 Changing the handle length Notes on diagrams 1 to 4 1 Handle position 1 The ends of the handle extension are locked in the lower slots of the handle sides This is the shortest length of the handle 2 extend the handle Press the ends of the handle extension A into the slots on both handle sides simultaneously and slide upwards B 3 Pull the grip up until the ends of the handle extension lock into the upper slots in the handle sides C This is the longest length of the handle handle position 2 4 To shorten the handle Press the ends of the handle extension into the slots D on both handle sides simultaneously and slide down E Push the grip down F in diagram 3 until
116. the Comment entry box Click on OK to confirm your entries and to come back to the Print dialog Enter the print quality and the number of copies if required Click on OK to start the print process The result record will be output to the default printer The contents of the active results window are printed out along with the additional information The printout may take up several pages depending on the number of results that have been obtained ot Oe ig The Print dialog The Print dialog is used to trigger the printout The following options can be pre selected e Selection and input of additional informations via sub dialogs e Selection of printer paper format via sub dialog e Setting the print quality e Setting number of copies Print Printer Printer HP DeskJet 500 Sta rt printo ut Headers Cancel selected Company Logo Opening sub dialogs additional Header Ho Additional informations information Signal Structure Setup Selection of alternative printers Comment Print Quality 300 dpi Copies Collate Copies Fig O 39 The Print dialog Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 9 3 1 2 The Print Headers dialog See also Fig O 37 Page O 39 The Print Headers dialog is used to select information that is to be printed out together with the results The dialog wind
117. the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 18 EFI SIE 82 a Fig A 18 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 4 3 Measurement Application Guide 1 Click on Scan in the Auto menu in the Signal Structure window A window showing a matrix of all the channels opens 2 Click on the Start button The measurement starts Each channel is tested and the measurement stops automatically Scanning Tributaries Cancel Fig A 19 Scanning Tributaries window e Errored channels are marked with ared cross see channel 04 in example Mainframe SDH Version au Jan 5 Automatic Search function 9 1 Test setup and description v DUT Fig A 20 Search function setup Interfaces e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 Tx 18 This function provides a rapid and simple way of finding channel shifts synchronous DXCs and ADMs The 20 receiver searches all channels for a pre selected test signal When the signal is found the channel is marked in the table with a green check Depending on the configuration of the DUT the test pattern may be present in more than one channel The ANT 20 transmit channels are not switched simultaneously Schematic diagram Channels Channels 1 2 Search 3 Mode 4 5 200000
118. the C WINDOWS hosts file may have incorrect or missing entries or e the Gateway tab in the TCP IP Properties window of the Network setup may have incorrect or missing entries Installing the ReachOut software 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Insert the ReachOut for Windows amp DOS installation disk 1 into drive A Click the Windows95 Start button choose and type the following command into the dialog box A Ninstall 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation Select connection type Internet using Windows Sockets For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide If you are installing ReachOut on a DominoCOM ANT 20 answer the on screen question Would you like ReachOut Host to be started automatically when you start Windows with Yes All configuration parameters can be changed after installation by configuring ReachOut 5 After complete installation exit Windows95 remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the ANT 20 After this installation procedure on the ANT 20 the Host in terms of ReachOut you can start the ReachOut Host and configure it as required To prevent a Viewer from accidentally tying up the Host it is recommended setting the Host configuration parameter Inactivity Timeout to a non zero value in Preferences Host Options menu After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC the Viewer in terms of
119. the quality of a transmission path The measurements are based on the corresponding Recommendations A 22 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version The G 826 analysis is separated into ISM in service measurement and OOS out of service measurement OOS is mainly used for aligning newly set up communications equipment Unframed test signals are measured and block errors TSE are evaluated ISM as the name implies allows measurement while the system is operational Framed signals in the primary system level or above are evaluated 8 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure e Performance Analysis 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 36 2 Click on the Performance Analysis button to activate the VI Fig A 36 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 8 3 Measurement Application Guide Example Performance measurement to G 826 Settings The G 826 ISM analysis window is shown here as an example for the various measurement options available Select the option you require by clicking on the appropriate button in the toolbar PERF Performance Analysis Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help 7 END LP HEI 172 Rejected 0 00000 0 00000 1 0 00000
120. window oelect a new value for the byte 4 Click on OK to confirm your choice The new value will now be shown in the corresponding byte field 30 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Editing the trace identifier JO J1 J2 1 Select a J byte from the matrix and click on the button in the toolbar The Trace Identifier Editor opens and an ASCII keyboard is displayed The default value is shown in the Trace box 2 Edit the Tl and click on OK to confirm The same value should be found in the trace identifier for the Overhead Analyzer If this is not the case and you start a measurement a TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm will result You can return to the stored default value at any time by simply clicking on the Default button Editing bytes 2 1 C2 and V5 1 Select Edit Descriptor in the Descriptor menu Click on the button in the Overhead Generator VI toolbar The following window opens Descriptor Hing 5 12345678 K1 Bridge Code 0000 Mo Hequest NH Manual Switch Span 5 5 Manual Switch Ring 5 Wait To Restore WIA Exerciser Span EXER 5 Dest Node Ident 1000 K2 source Node Exerciser Ring EXER R Long Short Reverse Request Span RH 5 Status K3 APS Channel 000 LP E3 APS Channel K4 5 Channel 000 Enhanced RDI 51 Sync
121. window The About option displays a window showing the instrument version software version and a list of the options fitted to the mainframe Operating Fundamentals O 19 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 2 3 Title bar Close ANT 20 program Control menu box Maximize Title Minimize 8 20 STM 1 Error Test Application Instruments Measurement Configure Print Help 00m 27s ef 1 busy _ Fig O 16 Title bar Control menu box The control menu box is located in the upper left corner of a window The control menu itself varies from one application to another and contains commands for handling the application windows Tip The main VI windows of the ANT 20 cannot be closed by double clicking on the control menu box A double click on the control menu box reduces the window to an icon exception ANT20 lt Application Title gt window Title The title shows the name of the application that is loaded e g STM 1 Error Test If you create a new application the title will initially show Untitled Minimize button Click on the Minimize button to reduce the Application Manager to its reduced size The Minimize button reduces all other virtual instruments to icons Maximize button The Maximize button has no function in the main VI windows It is grayed out in Windows 95 It does not exist in Windows 3 11 Close ANT 20 program button Clic
122. window showing an ITU T M 2100 analysis Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 1 49 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E M 2100 analysis of bit errors TSE M 2100 analysis of test Sequence errors can be performed on the following signals Unframed pattern without bit rate limitations N x 64 kbit s Framed patterns and bulk signals Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 to D3 and D4 to D12 in the SOH POH of SDH signals Note As the M 2100 analysis uses bit error evaluation you cannot switch to block error evaluation Further information see part 7 Technical Background 1 50 Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 8 Performance Analysis ITU T M 2101 d M 2101 evaluation takes the issue of Recommendation M 2101 dated 6 2000 as well as the version M 2101 1 of April 1997 into account You can switch between the two versions via a list box in the Settings menu The main differences between the Recommendation M 2101 4 1997 and the Recommendation M 2101 6 2000 concern additional measurement values as well as differences in the error performance objectives BBE Background Block Error e SEP Severely Errored Period e Performance measurement bytes in preparation for ANT 20 SEP evaluation is optional in the new Recommendation M 2101 6 2000 The Settings menu therefore includes a separate switch for including or excluding SEP from the asses
123. 00 24xBIP 1 STM 4 801 Bits 768 000 96xBIP 1 STM 16 801 Bits 3 072 000 384xBIP 1 STM 64 801 Bits 1536 12 288 000 1536xBIP 1 Table TB 24 G 829 evaluation Multiplex section blocks per second Technical Background TB 21 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 5 3 9 829 parameter settings If G 828 evaluation is selected the following parameters are used Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation Dialog window for input of the following parameters SES Threshold Threshold for SES count Setting range 1 to 2 147 483 647 Step width 1 Default value as per G 829 depends on signal structure 1 This threshold indicates the number of EB Errored Blocks required before a one second period is evaluated as SES Severely Errored Second Table TB 25 G 829 parameter settings TB 22 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 6 ITU T M 2100 evaluation ITU T M 2100 evaluation conforms to Recommendation M 2100 07 95 The M 2100 evaluation can be performed on the following events Bit errors TSE FAS bit errors FAS1 5 FAS2 FAS8 FAS34 FAS45 and FAS140 CRC errors CRC 4 and CRC 6 EBIT errors PBIT errors 3 6 1 M 2100 results The following results are determined and displayed Errored Seconds Errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Error Free Seconds Error free seconds as a count and as a
124. 00 analysis can be performed on the following events Bit errors TSE FAS bit errors FAS1 5 FAS2 FAS8 FAS34 FAS45 and FAS140 CRC errors 4 and CRC 6 EBIT errors PBIT errors Selecting the test point The measuring point evaluation shall be performed at is set in the Hierarchy menu If you change the signal structure a new test point will be selected automatically The new test point is selected in the following order of priority FAS 140 DS3 P Bit FAS 34 FAS 8 2Mbit s CRC 4 FAS 2 DS1 CRC 6 DS1 FAS TSE The first possible test point in the new signal structure will be selected Analysis is disabled if measurement is not possible at any of the test points listed Parallel M 2100 analysis at the near end and the far end Analysis of PCM30CRC signals is performed simultaneously at the near end and the far end All the M 2100 results for the near end and for the far end are determined separately Far end analysis will be interrupted by certain alarms e g LOS LOF or AIS The times of these alarms will be subtracted from the reference value for determining the far end ratio results PERF Performance Analysis Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help G 220 12201 amp msi ceca Em EHE EE EE 2100 PDH2CRC NEAR END CHC 4 END E BIT 13 3333 2 22222 0 00000 96 66566 VEHDICT Ess2 sessa 4 VI 39 Performance Analysis
125. 00000 Fig A 21 Automatic Search function Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal structure Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 22 SIE 82 Fig A 22 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 5 3 Measurement Application Guide 1 Seta test channel in the output signal Select the Channel menu in the Signal Structure VI to do this 2 Click on Search in the Auto menu in the Signal Structure window A window showing a matrix of all the channels opens 3 Click on the Start button The measurement starts Each channel is tested and the measurement stops automatically Search Tributaries Cancel Fig A 23 Search Tributaries window The figure shows an example Search mode result The channel to be located is channel 03 A 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 APS switching time measurement 6 1 Test setup and description 1 Fig A 24 APS switching time setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 e electrical unbalanced Rx 14 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Working line Frotection line Event AS TSE Tx 13 Tx 15 Tx 18 APS s
126. 035 90 70 21 1 Test setup and description ATM switch Fig A 98 Setup for the bit error rate test For ATM networks too the bit error test is a basic measurement method that makes it possible to test network paths quickly and simply or to check configurations of network elements With the ANT 20 you measure the bit errors via a test cell channel Apart from bit error measure ments on the cell payload parallel measurements for correctable and non correctable header errors are also being performed If this error measurement is performed on cells with an AAL 1 structure the ANT 20 also simultaneously checks the cell sequence integrity so that cell losses can also be found 21 2 Switch configuration Set up an unidirectional permanent connection with a UBR Unspecified Bit Rate contract through the switch 21 3 Application selection on the ANT 20 Vis required e Signal Structure e ATM Signal Structure e Anomaly and Defect Insertion e Anomaly and Defect Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 99 Fig A 99 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs A 66 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 21 4 Measurement Example 1 Determining the bit error rate in the ATM layer Settings 1 First of all set the Signal Structure
127. 1 Printing FESUNS O 39 9 2 1 1 Print Headers dialog O 39 20 20 10 9 3 9 3 1 9 3 1 1 9 3 1 2 9 3 1 3 9 3 2 9 3 2 1 9 3 2 2 9 4 Mainframe SDH Version i 1 The Print menu Virtual instruments O 40 T O 40 The Print 00 40 The Print Headers dialog 41 The Printer Setup 00 O 41 Exporting O 41 The Save as 00 42 The Export Format 42 The Screen Dump print 43 ANT 20 ANT 20E behavior the event of an AC power failure 44 10 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 Backup data 44 ee sees awe 45 Manually triggered measurements 45 Timer controlled 46 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes LEN Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 Operating Fundamentals 1 Control elements 1 1 ANT 20 ANT 20E front panel 5 INSERTION PRINT Jill ANT 20 wj i AND E Er
128. 10 3 5 Starting programs with the Instant Access Buttons 10 20 5 13 4 1 UVEIVIEW uias oe medo bass y ahnen O 13 4 1 1 The ANT20 Application Title gt Application Manager window O 13 4 1 2 Virtual 14 4 2 Elements of the ANT20 Application Title gt window O 15 4 2 1 Minibar Application Manager reduced form 15 4 2 1 1 Displaying 1 5 15 4 2 1 2 Starting and stopping a measurement O 15 4 2 1 3 Disabling entries O 16 4 2 1 4 Enabling 16 4 2 1 5 Other important functions 16 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 2 2 Menu bar and pull down O 17 4 2 2 1 The Application O 17 4 2 2 2 The Instruments 18 4 2 2 3 The Measurement menu 0 18 4 2 2 4 Configure 19 4 2 2 5 The Print 19 4 2 2 6 The Help 19 4 2 3 sheet ae bees O 20 5 Creating saving and loading applicati
129. 1000 1 0000 6 5000 20 0000 65 0000 200 0000 600 0000 1300 000 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 kHz Fig 57 measurements Results displayed as a table left and graphics right A 39 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 13 Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter F MTJ 13 1 Test setup and description DUT boooooooooo pr ry Fig A 58 Fast MTJ measurements setup Interfaces e electrical balanced 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 Tx 47 With a Fast MTJ measurement given combinations of jitter frequencies and jitter amplitudes which lie on the limit curves stipulated by ANSI are set on the jitter generator Each measurement point is classified as or Failed This indicates whether the DUT meets the limit curve or not 13 2 Application setting Vis required e Signal Structure e 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used on the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 59 2 Click on the button to open the window for the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Fig A 59 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs A 40 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 13 3 Measurement Settings The O 1
130. 11 3 Anomaly Defect Insertion VI 12 3 1 Main window Anomaly Defect Insertion VI 12 3 2 Inserting defects VI 13 3 9 Inserting lt VI 13 4 Anomaly Defect Analyzer 14 4 1 Display mode View VI 14 4 2 Display mode View Table VI 15 4 3 Display mode View Num 1 17 4 3 1 Enlarged display VI 18 4 4 Display mode View Summary VI 19 4 5 Dialog User VI 21 4 6 Dialog GO O cess me VI 22 4 7 Seti ads TI ILE VI 22 5 Overhead VI 23 5 1 Main window Overhead VI 23 5 2 Basic procedure 1 24 5 3 Icon button Default VI 24 5 4 Dialog lt VI 25 5 5 Dialog Background VI 25 10 UL Mainframe SDH Version 5 6 Dialog TCM VI 26 Overhead VI 27 6 1 Main window Overhead Analyzer VI 27 6 2 Menu
131. 12 2M Framed TX gt RX The Signal Structure dialog window will then look like this Signal Structure Auto Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Trigger Aus Offset Help 9 28 0 000 JE _ _ 12 Fig O 22 Signal Structure dialog window after entering the signal structure 7 Confirm the settings you made by clicking on OK You can also enter the signal structures for the TX and RX sides separately if you want to use different signal structures for the generator and the receiver Using the menus or the toolbar of the Signal Structure dialog window you can make other settings such as Offset Clock Source Line code etc The Mapping and Channel boxes in the signal structure are context sensitive If you click on one of the elements a specific dialog window channel settings dialog opens The signal structure is saved along with the application Tip More information on the Signal Structure VI is found in Part 4 Section 2 or in the on line help for the window 24 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 3 Saving an application Once you have created an application it is saved using the Save Application dialog Depending on the Application Manager setting reduced or normal size the dialog is opened in various wa
132. 140 unframed 192 4 140 1401 eo Check Melle E 16 opt C4 PAY 140 34 framed LOAD 140 8 framed 140 2 framed 140 2 CRC framed C4 BULK 0 181 4 4 4 4 BULK 0 181 C4 16c BULK 0 181 unequipped LO 34 unframed 34 framed 1 O 34 8 framed STM O opt C3 34 Mbit s nn 34 2 frame 45 Mbit s gs STS 3 34 2 framed C3 ATM ave C3 BULK 0 181 eC STM 16 unbal NRZ C2 6 Mbit s 8 framed STM 16 unbal NRZ C2 BULK 8 2 framed STM 1 unbal NRZ 12 asynch 2 Mbit s C12 bytesync 2 Mbit s 2 unframed 12 BULK 0 181 e 2 framed 2 framed di C11 asynch 1 5 Mbit s STM4 STS12 C11 bytesync 1 5 Mbit s C11 bitsync 1 5 Mbit s STM1 STS3 ATM STS1 C11 BULK 0 181 4 5 uncertain ES ATM DS3 PLCP 140 Mbit s 4 ATM E1 E 34 Mbit s E3 DS1 8 Mbit s 2 053 unframed 2 Mbit s 1 bal unbal DS3 framed M13 DS3 framed C Par DS3 DS2 DS3 DS1 C Par ESF DS1 bal unbal 053 051 C Par SF 053 051 M13 ESF 053 051 M13 ESF Autoconfiguration failed DS2 unframed 0 1 unframed DS1 framed ESF DS1 framed SF uncertain O OOO O OOOO0 Q Fig S 6 Structure and results Specifications S 29 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 2 Automatic S
133. 3A LASER PRODUCT IEC 825 1 1993 OC 1 3 12 LASER ON STM 1 4 d 103 Mainframe STM 16 OC 48 Module STM 64 OC 192 Module Fig G 1 ANT 20 optical connections Getting Started 20 20 Getting Started Mainframe SDH Version Wil Affixing the laser safety warning labels A laser safety warning label in the local language indicating the laser class must be affixed to the outside of the ANT 20 ANT 20E in such a position that it is clearly visible to the user INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION CLASS 1 DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW LASER PRODUCT DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT Fig G 2 Laser class safety warning labels We recommend that the laser safety warning label is affixed to the front panel of the ANT 20 ANT 20E below socket 05 see Fig G 3 Use the following laser safety warning labels e CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT for Options BN 3035 90 43 through 90 48 e CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT for Options BN 3035 90 53 BN 3035 90 54 3035 90 59 BN 3035 91 53 BN 3035 91 54 BN 3035 91 59 BN 3035 91 40 and BN 3035 91 41 A sheet of laser safety warning labels is included with each module Note If Options in the BN 3035 90 43 through 90 48 range and BN 3035 90 53 BN 3035 90 54 BN 3035 90 59 BN 3035 91 53 BN 3035 91 54 BN 3035 91 59 BN 3035 91 40 or BN 3035 91 41 are both fitted the CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT label should be affixed Any CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT lab
134. 5 Ext Clock 2 1 25 Qutput Code RX 12 14 16 17 43 44 113 Ext Clock 1 5 MHz 25 Level Ext Data 1 5M DS1 25 Input Unbalanced 14 Code Sensitivity ITU T Laser Equalizer Wavelength 1310 nm Ref Level Scrambler Descrambler x Fig 87 Interface dialog 2 Select the clock source corresponding to the clock frequency at input 25 from the Clock Source list box on the TX side of the box Settings in the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window 1 Select the Wander command from the TX menu in the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window Click on the TX WAN icon in the toolbar Select the MTW command from the Mode menu Click on the MTW icon in the toolbar Note The MTW function can only be activated if you first set the generator to wander o on TX WAN The generator must be set back to jitter TX JIT if you want to use other automatic jitter measurement functions MTJ F MTJ JTF after making a MTW measurement Select the error source e g TSE Test Sequence Error in the Error Source list box In the Error Threshold box enter the error threshold above which the result will be assessed as Failed An error threshold cannot be entered if an alarm was selected in the Error Source box In the Settling Time box enter the delay between individual measurement points Select the
135. 72 Jitter Generator Analyzer window has already been opened 1 Select the Fast MTJ command the Mode menu or Click on the corresponding button in the tool bar Select the error source e g TSE Test Sequence Error from the Error Source list box In the Error Threshold box enter the error threshold above which a device under test is to be considered as having Failed the test An error threshold cannot be entered if an alarm is selected from the Error Source list box In the Settling Time box enter a settling time for each measurement to allow the d u t to settle Select MTJ in the Settings menu or Click on the SET icon The Settings dialog opens Settings Scan Frequency Amplitude Ul 0 5000 6 5000 65 0000 1300 000 Default Fig A 60 Settings dialog 6 7 Application Guide If required select individual frequency and amplitude combinations to be used for performing the measurement Confirm your entries by clicking The Settings dialog closes 41 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 8 Click Start to start the measurement The measurement stops automatically on completion or when you click on Stop 0 172 Jitter Generator Analpzer i Oe xl Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help Tok TTE
136. 8 optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 Tx 47 1550 nm Tx 48 1310 nm e optical 10 Gbit s 13 Tx 103 reference clock Rx 25 This measurement is intended to demonstrate that a network does not produce errors even when extreme pointer operations occur Pointer sequences that are specified by the ITU T in Recommendation G 783 are used for this User defined sequences can also be used The following sequences are pre defined Single pointer with reversed polarity Pointer sequences with one double pointer 43 44 sequence 43 pointers 1 double pointer 44 pointers Pointer sequences with missing pointers 87 3 sequence 87 pointers 3 missing pointers 86 4 sequence 86 pointers 4 missing pointers Double pointer with reversed polarity 9 2 Application settings Vis required Application Guide Signal Structure Pointer Generator Pointer Analyzer A 25 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig 39 2 To open the Pointer Generator and Pointer Analyzer windows click on the appropriate buttons in the Application Manager Fig A 39 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the 1 Measurement Example Measurement of an 86 4 sequence for the AU pointer Settings synchronizing the ANT 20 to an external clock signal 1
137. C Anomalies Defects User RS TIM alarm 13 24 00 00 10 20 30 40 50 Date 05 09 97 Time 13 24 54 Timebase sec BLOCK Fig A 49 The Anomaly Defect Analyzer window Application Guide 33 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 11 DCC ECC bit error test 11 1 Test setup and description ME s DUT as a Fig 50 DCC ECC bit error test setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 Tx 47 1550 Tx 48 1310 nm e optical 10 Gbit s Rx 113 Tx 103 The data communication channels DCC are used to control network elements via the network management system TMN Telecommunications Management Network Bytes D1 to D4 RSOH and D5 to D12 MSOH make up the DCC The embedded communication channels ECC contain the DCCs and also bytes E1 E2 and F1 To ensure that these channels operate correctly the ANT 20 inserts a bit pattern and performs a bit error test on the receiver side 11 2 Application settings Vis required Signal Structure Overhead Generator Overhead Analyzer Anomaly and Defect Insertion Anomaly and Defect Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig 51 Stopped e
138. CMCIA card modem Start or return to Windows Insert the installation disk ANT 20 PCMCIA System into drive A Choose Run from the File menu in the Program Manager window and type the following command into the dialog box A setup 4 After complete installation exit Windows remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the ANT 20 5 Run C CARDWARE doscard d from MS DOS for querying the assigned COM port of your PCMCIA card modem You need the assigned COM port usually for configuring ReachOut N Remote operation RO 3 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Installing the ReachOut software 1 Start or return to Windows 2 Insert the ReachOut for Windows amp DOS installation disk 1 into drive A 3 Choose Run from the File menu in the Program Manager window and type the following command into the dialog box A install 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide If you are installing ReachOut on DominoCOM ANT 20 answer the on screen question Would you like ReachOut Host to be started automatically when you start Windows with Yes All configuration parameters can be changed after installation by configuring ReachOut 5 After complete installation exit Windows remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the ANT 20 After this installation procedu
139. Channel 4 v a Fig VI 26 Delta Pointer Offset dialog An offset carried by the pointer for channel 1 can be set in this dialog for the pointers for channels 2 through 4 The pointer actions for channel 1 are set in the ITUT display entry box of the main window The pointer actions for all channels are activated from the Action menu A change of more than 1 in the value of the pointer offset will be realized by consecutive changes of 1 at intervals of 32 frames During this time the Pointer Generator cannot be operated In the extreme case 160 changes x 32 frames x 125 microseconds 640 milliseconds Virtual instruments Pointer Generator 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version ln 8 Pointer Analyzer 8 1 window Pointer Analyzer The Pointer Analyzer VI is used to display the pointer values addresses and to show the number of pointer actions graphically Menu bar and toolbar Pointer Analyzer i Ic x Zoom Diagram Cursor Print Help gt Current 29 Current TU 52 display Alarms Current AU and TU pointer values 200 Overview pointer actions 600 Pointer increments decrements 400 200 0 10 22 00 10 22 30 10 23 00 po ps Cursor D2 04 98 02 04 38 Fig VI 27 Elements of the Pointer Analyzer main window 8 2 Main window Pointer Analyzer for Virtual Concatenation Only with option BN 3035 90 92
140. Content plain text Default Path Label Mismatch Bit 12345678 Expected Value HP PLM 00000010 TUG structure Is T LP PLM Default H1 Byte Expected Default Expected SS bits values STM 1 signal SS 10 SDH T Defect definition Fig VI 23 Settings dialog Checking the expected values and generating defects Basic procedure Select the desired Trace Identifier byte check box Enter the corresponding expected values hexadecimal value or plain text messages Select the desired defect for a Path Label Mismatch check box Select the corresponding expected values Expected Value list box Path Label Mismatch Select the expected values for the SS Bits Expected Value list box H1 Byte Click the OK button The expected values will be checked and a message output if there is a mismatch cm Virtual instruments Overhead Analyzer VI 29 6 5 VI 30 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Dialog Byte Capture Option BN 3035 90 15 The Byte Capture dialog is part of the Extended Overhead Analysis option 3035 90 15 and is opened by clicking on the above icon button The capture function allows you to record a single byte or two bytes simultaneously in the case of K1 and K2 Recording is prepared by clicking the START button and begins when a pre set trigger condition occurs After this a change into thi
141. DN Overview Signalling Capability Set 1 Release 1 Q 2100 B ISDN Signalling ATM Adaption Layer SAAL Overview Description Q 2110 B ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP Q 2130 B ISDN Signalling ATM Adaptation Layer Service Specific Coordination Function for Support of Signalling at the User Network Interface SSCF at UNI Q 2931 B ISDN Digital Subscriber Signalling No 2 DSS 2 User Network Interface Layer 3 Specification for Basic Call Connection Control B ISDN Digital Subscriber Signalling System No 2 DSS 2 Generic Functional Protocol Core Functions Q 2961 B ISDN Digital Subscriber Signalling System No 2 DSS 2 Additional Traffic Parameters Q 2932 1 V 11 Electrical characteristics for balanced double current interchange circuits for general use with integrated circuit equipment in the field of data communications X 21 Interface between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE for synchronous operation on public networks Table SA 1 Overview of important ITU T recommendations continued Standards Abbreviations SA 3 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 2 ANSI standards SONET data communication channel DCC protocol and architectures 11 119 1994 operations administrations maintenance and provisioning amp communications 11 119 01 1995 amp communications
142. E 4 2 1 3 Disabling entries You can disable entries from the keyboard touchscreen or trackball to prevent unintentional operation Click on the Keyboard Lock command in the Configure menu Click on the icon in the ANT20 Application Title gt Minibar window Entry will be disabled 4 2 1 4 Enabling entries 1 Press the Alt Tab keys repeatedly until the Minibar is activated 2 Press the ESC key 4 2 1 5 Other important functions The Minibar still provides access to all major instrument functions If you click on an area where there are no icon buttons a pop up menu appears This contains a selection of functions from the menu bar including functions for application management and closing the program Tip lf you want the reduced Application Manager to be always visible select the Always Top option in the Configure menu see Sec 4 2 2 4 Three virtual instruments example setting Measurement control Instrument status Add amp Remove dialog Start Elapsed Set measure Keyboard stop time ment time lock Toggle button Measurement status 21 amp lENTTTnmoasletinin nnm busy Application Mew Application Open Application Save Application Save As Instrument Add amp Remove Measurement Setting Load Result Save Results Pop up menu Minibar always onT op Help Contents 9 Elemen
143. F framed pattern 4632 4608 2304 4800 N x 64 ms 3ms DS1 SF framed pattern 1 5 ms VC11 Bulk Nx64 3ms 1 ms Overhead Bytes 1 ms N x 64 RSOH E1 F1 D1 to D3 MSOH D4 to D12 E2 POH F2 F2L 2048 1984 1920 2176 2M unframed 1 ms PCM31 framed pattern 1 ms PCM30 framed pattern VC12 Bulk 1 ms 1 ms 8M unframed 500 us 4224 500 us 500 us 500 us 125 us 4168 3392 3160 4296 4264 6048 4760 8M framed pattern VC2 Bulk DS2 unframed 34M unframed 34M framed pattern VC3 Bulk 125 us 125 us 106 us 106 us 125 us DS3 unframed DS3 framed pattern 4704 140M unframed 17408 140M framed pattern 17312 VC4 Bulk VC4 4c Bulk VC4 16c Bulk 125 us 18720 74880 299520 125 us 125 us 125 us Table TB 20 G 826 OOS G 828 TSE G 829 TSE M 2100 TSE M 2101 TSE blocklength TB 18 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 4 ITU T G 828 evaluation G 828 evaluation conforms to ITU T Recommendation dated 3 2000 The G 828 standard is a further development of Recommendation G 826 for synchronous digital paths Recommendation G 828 specifies additional measurement values and measurement points e SEP Severely Errored Period declared as optional e Performance measurement on TCM bytes in preparation for ANT 20 G 828 evaluation can be performed on the following events 1 B2SUM MS REI B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE blocks
144. FE DS1 FE DS3 MFE DS3 FAS CRC CRC6 FAS CRC Table S 9 LED display of available anomalies 5 12 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 2 2 Alarm detection defects Evaluation All alarms defects which occur are evaluated simultaneously where possible and stored Storage takes place only within a started measurement interval Time resolution of defects 100 ms Display of defects via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval LOF DS3 OOF DS3 LOF LCD LOF DS1 OOF DS1 DS1 YELLOW DS3 YELLOW RDI AIS YELLOW Table 5 10 LED display of available defects DS3 AIC is used for autoconfiguring the instrument and can only be read out via remote control Specifications 5 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 3 Drop amp lnsert Through Mode Option BN 3035 90 20 3 3 1 Functions This Option provides the following functions for all PDH multiplex options fitted to the ANT 20 Drop amp Insert This function is only available in conjunction with the following options PDH MUX DEMUX chain BN 3035 90 30 to BN 3035 90 31 M13 MUX DEMUX chain BN 3035 90 32 e SIM 1 mappings BN 3035 90 01 to BN 3035 90 05 STS 1 mappings BN 3035 90 10 to BN 3035 90 13 e Optical interfaces BN
145. G 829 evaluation G 829 evaluation conforms to ITU T Recommendation dated 3 2000 The G 829 standard describes the recording and classification of error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections The Recommendation does not discuss allocations and does not specify objectives to be met An assessment verdict is therefore not possible The measured values are determined on a block basis in the sense that the individual bits of an EDC Error Detection Code each monitor separate blocks This is in contrast with the G 826 and G 828 evaluations where the entire EDC only monitors a single block in each case G 829 evaluation can be performed on the following events 1 B2SUM MS REI Bit errors TSE 3 5 1 G 829 results The following results are determined and displayed ES Errored Seconds Errored seconds a count and as an error rate Errored Seconds Errored seconds as a count and as an error rate EFS Error Free Seconds Error free seconds as a count and as an error rate Severely Errored Seconds Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Background Block Error Number and ratio of background block errors Unavailable Seconds Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate Table 23 G 829 evaluation results 3 5 2 829 Multiplex section blocks per second Block length Blocks per frame Blocks per second Error detection code STM 0 801 Bits 64 000 STM 1 801 Bits 192 0
146. I 3 0 Interoperability Test Suite for the ATM Layer af test 0035 000 Apr 1995 UNI 3 0 Interoperability Test Suites for Physical af test 0036 000 Apr 1995 Layer DS 3 STS 3c 100 Mbps MMF TAXI PICS Proforma for the DS1 Physical Layer af test 0037 000 Apr 1995 Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af test 0041 000 Jan 1996 ATM Layer End Systems UNI 3 0 PICS for AAL5 ITU spec af test 0042 000 Jan 1996 PICS Proforma for the 51 84 Mbps af test 0044 000 Jan 1996 Range PHY Layer Interface Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af test 0045 000 Jan 1996 ATM Layer of Intermediate Systems UNI 3 1 PICS for the 25 6 Mbps over Twisted Pair af test 0051 000 Mar 1996 Cable UTP 3 Physical Layer PICS for ATM Layer UNI 3 1 af test 0059 000 July 1996 Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the UNI af test 0060 000 June 1996 3 1 ATM Layer of End Systems Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af test 0067 000 Sep 1996 SSCOP Sub layer UNI 3 1 PICS for the 155 Mbps over Twisted Pair af test 0070 000 Nov 1996 Cable UTP 5 STP 5 Physical Layer Traffic Management See UNI 3 1 af uni 0010 002 Traffic Management 4 0 af tm 0056 000 Apr 1996 Traffic Management ABR Addendum af tm 0077 000 Jan 1997 User Network ATM User Network Interface Specification af uni 0010 000 June 1992 Interface UNI V2 0 ILMI MIB for UNI 3 0 af uni 0011 000 ILMI MIB for UNI 3 1 af un
147. MTW command from the Settings menu Click on the SET icon in the toolbar A 59 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E HTW Settings Scan Frequency Amplitude 0 004330 0 010000 1 670000 10 000000 Cancel Fig 88 Settings dialog 7 lf required select your own combinations of frequency and amplitude to be used for the measurement 8 Click OK to confirm your entries The MTW Settings closes 9 Click Start to start the measurement The measurement stops automatically after all measurement points have been tested It can also be stopped at any time by clicking on Stop Note The measurement times may be very long due to the frequency settings 110 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer TH Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help Ge Start Error Source TSE Error Threshold 10 Bum Settling Time 1 0 Sec TOL WANDER 0 004330 35 3 0 010000 18 0 1 670000 18 0 10 000000 3 0 Fig A 89 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window for MTW measurements Analysis e The table see Fig A 89 contains combinations pre selected by the user or the default values for wander frequencies and wander amplitudes These are set one after the other in the order they are entered in the table when the measurement is started e After the Settling Time has elapsed the output signal of the 20 is modulated for one period of the current frequency and the
148. OS G 826 Out of service analysis Analysis G 828 8 G 828 analysis Analysis G 829 3 G 829 analysis Analysis M 2100 2100 analysis Analysis M 2101 M 2101 analysis Settings Set parameters depending on the selected analysis G 821 Allocation SES Threshold DM Threshold MUX Factor G 826 Allocation SES Threshold UAS Limit on off UAS Mode individual global G 828 Allocation SES Threshold UAS Limit on off UAS Mode individual global SEP used in Verdict on off G 829 SES Threshold M 2100 Allocation BISO Multiplier UAS Limit on off UAS Mode individual global ANT 20 ANT 20E More information Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec Sec 10 2 Page VI 41 10 3 Page VI 43 10 4 Page VI 44 10 5 Page VI 45 10 6 Page VI 47 10 7 Page VI 49 10 8 Page VI 51 1 40 Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Menu Command Icon button Function More information Settings ser M 2101 Allocation BISO Multiplier continued SES Threshold UAS Limit on off UAS Mode individual global M 2101 Version 4 1997 oder 6 2000 SEP used in Verdict on off View Switch toolbar and status line on off Print Print out and export results Help On line help 10 2 Performance Analysis ANSI BELL AHS For performance analysis to ANSI BELL standards definitions from GR 253 and 11 231 are used The parameters ES
149. Out of service measurement A 7 3 2 Application 5 8 3 3 Measurement 8 Automatic Scan 1 A 10 4 1 Test setup and description A 10 4 2 Application 5 A 11 4 3 Measurement A 11 Automatic Search function A 12 5 1 Test setup and description A 12 5 2 Application 5 A 13 5 3 Measurement A 13 APS switching time measurement 14 6 1 Test setup and description A 14 6 2 Application lt 5 15 6 3 Measurement 15 Bit error rate test A 17 7 1 Test setup and description A 17 7 2 Application 5 A 17 1 3 Measurement A 18 10 11 12 13 14 SEE Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 Performance analysis to G 821 G 826 G 828 G 829 2100 2101 22 8 1 Test setup and description A 22 8 2 Application
150. P AU Pointer Justification Event 8 bits Path error 8 bits monitoring VC 3 4 HO Path UNEQ P UNEQuipped AU AIS AU PJE SP AIS SP error monitoring HP UNEQ SP UNEQuipped Table SA 7 Alarm messages SDH SONET Standards Abbreviations SA co Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Old Abbreviation Old Expression SONET Expression ITU T G 707 new G 783 ANSI 1 105 BELLCORE GR 253 HP RDI HP FERF HO Path Remote Defect Indication HO Path RDI RDIEPP Payload Defect HO Path RDI RDIEPS Server Defect HO Path RDI RDIEPC Connectivity Defect HP FEBE HO Path Remote REI P Error Indication HO Path Trace TIM P Identifier Mismatch HP SLM HO Path Payload PLM P Label Mismatch Tributary Unit VT Path VP Abbreviation SDH STS Path YELLOW SP Remote Defect Indication SP RDI Payload Defect SP RDI Server Defect SP RDI Connectivity Defect HPRDIEP HPRDIES HPRDIEC HP REI STS Path FEBE SP Remote Error Indication SP Payload Defect Indication HP TIM SP Trace Identifier Mismatch SP Path Label Mismatch HP PLM TU LOP NEN Loss of TU Pointer LOP V e VP Loss of Pointer TU NDF TU pointer New NDF V VP New Data Flag Data Flag TU AIS mag TU AIS AIS V EE VP AIS TU LOM Loss Of Multiframe LOM Loss of Multiframe H4 BIP 2 LO Path error BIP V VP error monitoring monitoring VC 11 12 B3 8 bits LO Path error monitoring 3 LO Pat
151. P IP 32 stack from Microsoft 3 2 Items included in delivery The Remote Operation Option BN 3035 95 31 comprises HeachOut User s Guide e ReachOut installation disks Host amp Viewer Modem amp Network 1 Node SCM Ethernet LAN card SCM Microsystem GmbH including Media Coupler for 10Base2 and 10BaseT Distribution disk Installation Guide For ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only CardWare User s Manual Award Software Inc CardWare Version 2 0 distribution disk Award Software Inc ANT 20 PCMCIA System installation disk configured CardWare 2 0 ANT 20 TCP IP Interface installation disk 3 3 Installation 3 3 1 Hardware installation Insert the SCM Ethernet LAN card into a free PCMCIA socket just like you insert a disk into a floppy drive You do not need to power down the ANT 20 when you insert or remove the card Connect the SCM Ethernet LAN card to your LAN using the Media Coupler cable included RO 6 Remote operation 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 3 2 Software installation under Windows 3 11 To install and configure the software on a DominoCOM ANT 20 in the same way as on an ANT 20 connect an external monitor keyboard and mouse to the built in PC AT If you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 31 together with your ANT 20 the CardWare MS TCP IP 32 and ReachOut software packages are already installed on the ANT20 CardWare in the directory CACARDWARE MS TCP IP 32 in t
152. PNNI 1 0 Addendum soft PVC MIB af pnni 0066 000 Sep 1996 PNNI ABR Addendum af pnni 0075 000 Jan 1997 Service Aspects and Frame UNI af saa 0031 000 Sep 1995 Applications Native ATM Native ATM Services Semantic Description Semantic Native ATM Services Semantic Description af saa 0048 000 Feb 1996 Audio Visual Multimedia Services Video on af saa 0049 000 Jan 1996 Demand v1 0 Audio Visual Multimedia Services Video on af saa 0049 001 Mar 1997 Demand v1 1 ATM Names Service af saa 0069 000 Nov 1996 Signaling See UNI 3 1 af uni 0010 002 UNI Signaling 4 0 af sig 0061 000 July 1996 Signaling ABR Addendum af sig 0076 000 Jan 1997 Testing Introduction to ATM Forum Test af test 0022 000 Dec 1994 Specifications PICS Proforma for the DS3 Physical Layer af test 0023 000 Sep 1994 Interface PICS Proforma for the SONET STS 3c af test 0024 000 Sep 1994 Physical Layer Interface Table SA 5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations continued Standards Abbreviations SA 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Technical Working Approved Specifications Specification Approved Group Date Testing PICS Proforma for the 100 Mbps Multimode af test 0025 000 Sep 1994 Fibre Physical Layer Interface PICS Proforma for the ATM Layer UNI 3 0 af test 0028 000 Apr 1995 Conformance Abstract Test Suite for the af test 0030 000 Sep 1995 ATM Layer for Intermediate Systems UN
153. REI B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE 3 7 1 M 2101 results The following results are determined and displayed ES Errored Errored seconds as a count as an error rate m Error Free Seconds Error free seconds as a count and as an error rate Severely Errored Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds Background Block Number and ratio of background block errors Error SEP Severely Errored Number and ratio of severely errored periods Period number of SES between 3 and 9 UAS Unavailable Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds VERDICT Accepted Uncertain Rejected Overall assessment of the path quality ALLOCATION Path allocation setting BISO ES ES S1 Threshold values calculated internally ES S2 Table TB 29 M 2101 evaluation results TB 26 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version BISO SES SES S1 SES SES S1 2 FThreshold values internally values calculated internally SES S2 BISO BBE BBE S1 Threshold values calculated internally SES S2 BISO SEP SEP S1 Threshold values calculated internally SEP S2 Table TB 29 M 2101 evaluation results 3 7 2 2101 parameter settings If M 2101 evaluation is selected the following parameters are used e Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation Dialog windo
154. Receiver section 2 1 Digital signal inputs 2 1 1 LINE signal input 14 electrical COMECON ae unbalanced coaxial SOCKEL oo ntude ae Eee ae ee er re a UNI 9 Versacon Input 410 75 Q Max permissible frequency 500 number of consecutive zeros for qi 15 owitchable input voltage ranges TUF rr dB attenuation referred to nominal level PMP Low 15 to 23 dB attenuation referred to nominal level Low B3ZS B8ZS HDB3 AMI 15 to 26 dB attenuation referred to nominal level Max peak input 5V Specifications 5 5 5 6 20 20 5 5 3 155 520 max 12 7 dB 78MHz gt 15 dB STM 1 100 kHz to 240 MHz STM 0 51 840 HDB3 max 12 dB 17 MHz gt 18dB 50 kHz to 52 MHz STS 1 B3ZS DS3 44 7362 375 1 5442 B8ZS 6 dB 0 772 MHz 0 2 6 3122 875 6 dB 3 MHz gt 18 100 kHz to 52 MHz E4 139 264 CMI max 12 dB 70 MHz gt 15dB 100 kHz to 240 MHz HDB3 max 12 dB 17 MHz gt 18dB 50 kHz to 52 MHz 8 448 HDB3 max MHz 2 0481 HDB3 max 6 dB 1 MHz 3035 02 requ
155. Reference level equalizer Switch wavelength Fig VI 3 Interface dialog with Clock Source list box 2 4 Dialog Channel The Channel dialog is used to set the measurement channel in all hierarchy levels of the tributary structure for the generator and receiver Channel TX ITU T RX ITU T STM N STM N ries pe TUG TUG 1 TU 12 TU 12 1 5 5 m 34M EM EM e Set Pixeak Pixeak CnxG4K Get nx Fig VI 4 Channel dialog Copy Tx side settings to Rx side Copy Rx side settings to Tx side Execute settings The window stays open Open the x 64k Timeslots window Display of range value for active entry box The channel numbering can be selected in the channel menu ITU T Numbering either as timeslot acc to ITU T G 707 or as tributary Virtual instruments Signal Structure VI 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 5 Dialog Autoconfiguration Check Interface 8 AUTO The Autoconfiguration dialog automatically sets the receiver of the ANT 20 A search is made at the electrical inputs input voltage ranges ITU T High or PMP Low or at the optical inputs for standard SDH SONET PDH or ATM signals The instrument version and options fitted determine the scope of the search The main objective is to deter
156. S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES BISO SEP Allocation x EEPO SEP x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP S2 Limit SEP BISO SEP 2 x sqrt BISO SEP 5 0 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 64000 x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE STM 1 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 192000 x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE STM 4 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 768000 x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE STM 16 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 3072000 x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE STM 64 BISO BBE Allocation x EEPO BBE x Test Period x 12288000 x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE S2 Limit BBE BISO BBE 2 x sqrt BISO BBE Table TB 37 BISO formulae for the multiplex section B2SUM TB 32 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Measurements on patterns TSE BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 S1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES S2 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x
157. Structure Mainframe SDH Version Block amp Replace only possible with SDH C4 and C3 mapping Generator and receiver are coupled The received signal is looped through from the receiver to the generator The ANT 20 is used on the receive side as a measurement channel monitor The AU of the measurement channel is re formed on the transmit side Example Basic procedure 1 Set Rx signal structure 2 Click the TX button 3 Click the Replace button Add drop multiplexer test ADMs require a valid optical signal even for measurements on tributaries The instrument provides an optical Signal in addition to the electrical signal Example Basic procedure Set Rx signal structure Click the Tx button Click the ADM Test button Select the optical signal in the SDH column When the signal is ready the PDH column is enabled 5 Set the Tx signal structure in the PDH column PUNI Electrical interfaces Tx 13 or 15 Rx 12 or 14 Optical interfaces Tx 18 Rx 17 for STM 16 OC 48 Tx 47 Rx 44 Operating mode selection Contiguous Concatenation or Virtual Concatenation Selection between Contiguous and Virtual modes is made under Settings Concat Mode Fills the entire synchronous signal container with the O 181 ITU T test pattern Generates an ATM cell stream in the selected mapping ATM mapping in SDH and SONET signals For further si
158. TC ODI TC REI TC RDI TC UNEQ TDEV TC Incoming Error Count Tandem Connection Monitoring TC Outgoing Defect Indication TC Outgoing Error Indication TC Remote Error Indication TC Remote Defect Indication TC unequipped Time Deviation Trace Identifier TIE Time Interval Error TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch TMN Telecommunications Management Network 4 O I Transport Overhead Trail trace G 832 02 Timeslot TSE Test Sequence Error bit errors C Tributary Unit TU m TUG m Tributary Unit level m 1 to 3 Tributary Unit Group level m 1 2 gt lt Transmitter z D 5 Q Q o oO 5 o c o D Q 5 o 3 5 c I gt gt gt SA 20 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i Abbreviation Meaning 00000000 byte VC 1 2 Variable Bit Rate C lt EE VBR nRT VBR RT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time Variable Bit Rage Real Time lt Virtual Container SDH Virtual Channel ATM Virtual Channel Alarm Indication Virtual Container level n 1 2 3 4 VC n Xc VC RDI Concatenated Virtual Container level n X concatenated VCs Virtual Channel Remote Defect Indication Virtual Channel Identifier lt Virtual Instrument Virtual Path VP AIS VP RDI Virtual Path Alarm I
159. Test setup for tolerance to wander measurements Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced Rx 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 Tx 18 optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 Tx 47 Ref Clock in 25 Generator synchronization input clock or data signal 2 Mbit s or 1 5 Mbit s 16 2 Application setting A 50 Vis required e Signal Structure e 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer e Anomaly Defect Analyzer 1 Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should at least include the following instruments see Fig 74 2 Click on the JIT button to open the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window 3 Click on the button to the right of the JIT button to open the Anomaly Defect Analyzer window Fig A 74 Minibar Application Manager after VI selection Application Guide LEII 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 16 3 Settings The O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window is already open 1 Select the Settings command from the Interface menu in the Signal Structure window The Interface dialog opens TX RX Bit Rate 155 520 Mbit s Offset 0 000 ppm Clock Source Ext Clock 2M E1 25 Qutput Ext Data 2M E1 25 Ext Clock 2M E1 25 Code 12 14 16 17 43 44 113 Ext Clock 1 5 MHz 25 Bit Rate 155 520 Mbit s
160. The selected byte is edited in this window The button has no function for E1 E2 F1 F2 and D1 to D12 and K1 to K2 if the selected byte is set to TP test pattern or EX external Note If you want to edit the TCM sequence first click on the 1 or 2 Z6 byte in the main window and then click the icon button 5 3 Icon button Default Clicking this icon button sets all elements of the SOH TOH and POH matrix to their default values 24 Virtual instruments Overhead Generator 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 4 Dialog Descriptor DLT The Descriptor dialog is used to fill certain bytes in the overhead matrix with plain text information e K1 to APS commands 51 Clock source e C2 Vb Path label The information is identical to the commands in the corresponding standard You can also select whether the commands for Ring APS G 841 or Linear APS G 783 are to be applied 12345678 Manual Switch Span 5 5 Bridge Code 0000 Request 74 4 Manual Switch Ring 5 Wait To Restore WIA Dest Node Ident 0000 0 Exerciser Span EXER 5 Exerciser EXER F K2 Reverse Request Span 5 Source Node Ident 0000 0 Reverse Request Ring Long Short 0 short Path Code Status Idle El K3 APS Channel 0000 0 LP K3APS Channel U Ka K4 byte AFS Channel 0000 x y Hemote payl
161. This data set contains all the measurement parameters and all measurement results up to that point collected from the Vis The 20 20 can use the backup data set to continue with the measurement after an AC power failure The first backup data set is available approximately 10 to 15 seconds after the start of the measurement If a backup data set has not yet been saved before a power failure occurs the measurement cannot be continued when power is restored The AC power failure time is saved as No Power alarm and is displayed when a backup data set is generated Exceptions No backup data are generated for automatic measurement sequences Autoconfiguration MTJ JTF etc A wander measurement is not an automatic measurement sequence Wander measurements will be resumed after an AC power failure The intermediate evaluation starts afresh on restoration of AC power The intermediate intervals are then no longer synchronous with the absolute time Operating Fundamentals rt ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version 10 2 Examples 10 2 1 Manually triggered measurements Manual First backup data set start available approx 15 seconds after start Stop Time No restore start No restore start Restore start 4 M Duration of AC power failure Fig O 42 Examples of ANT 20 ANT 20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure manually trig gered measurements
162. View Filter User Defects C Curent 04 09 97 18 28 29 0 18 28 30 0 04 09 97 18 28 30 0 18 28 31 0 04 09 97 18 28 31 0 18 28 32 0 04 09 97 18 28 32 0 18 28 33 0 04 09 97 18 28 33 0 18 28 34 0 04 09 97 18 28 34 0 18 28 35 0 32 STOP 04 09 97 18 28 34 5 Fig A 104 Single value display Application Guide A 69 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Anomaly Defect Analyzer Fig A 105 Summary display A 70 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 22 ATM latency test for ATM switches Only BN 3035 90 70 22 1 Test setup and description ATM switch under test 0000900002000 a A 15 Mbit s CBR stream running in fiber Fig A 106 Setup for ATM latency test ATM switch If the above configuration is used the more port modules that are included the loop the greater the delay Measurements are made on ATM switches to determine whether there is a constant increase delay as the number of looped in port modules are increased 22 2 Switch configuration 1 Setup an unidirectional connection with a constant bit rate through the switch for the reason that you can set up a physical loop at the second port 2 Check that the switch accepts the PCR of 14 98 Mbit s 35523 cells per second 3 Set the CBR contract say to a PCR of 15 Mbit s 22 3 Application selection on the ANT 20 Vis required e Signal Structure e ATM Signal Structure e AIM Traffic Analyzer Add the VI
163. Vls to your application The amp Remove Instruments dialog window will then look something like the figure below 4 Click on the button when you have added all the Vis that you require In the example the Anomaly Defect Insertion Anomaly Defect Analyzer and Signal Structure VI windows will now open The icons for these VIs are also now displayed in the 20 Application Title gt window normal or reduced size and the names of these VIs are also listed in the Instruments menu Instruments available Select the instruments that you want to use in your new measurement application Instruments used 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Signal Structure Overhead Analyzer Add gt gt Anomaly Defect Analyzer Overhead Generator Anomaly Defect Insertion PDH Generator Analyzer Performance Analysis lt lt Remove Pointer Analyzer Pointer Generator Cancel Fig O 18 Add amp Remove Instruments dialog window after adding the VIs required Physical Layer group pre selected The Add amp Remove dialog when ATM options are fitted If your ANT 20 is equipped with one or more ATM options ATM Module Broadband Analyzer Generator you can display the virtual instruments in groups for selection from the Instruments available list box Add amp Remove Instruments Select the instruments that you want to use your new measurement application gt
164. a ZT el C JE JE JE JE amp JE J 7 t E t Je Je s J amp Jt J 36 36 lt Je 36 E JE i LLL 6505660096 Fig 0 1 20 ANT 20E front panel Operating Fundamentals 1 20 20 20 connector panel 53 A Mainframe SDH Version r 35 44811305 xg 8 5 I AW1dS10 ANVIAUSS JIU 933 NI ln L on 8 m 79639 ZZ 8 9 E asnon M SONON t 1015 018 31 3 OLAY ALEL 001 097 02 VS EL VADEZ 29097705 INIT JY WIOOIUL sz NI 32012 434 81 OLE GO SINN GEO S S NINZ S I S GA ISL S I Operating Fundamentals 20 connector panel Fig O 2 2 Mainframe SDH Version 20
165. a strong box made from double layer corrugated cardboard which is at least 4 mm thick The box should be big enough to allow padding of at least 70 mm thickness to be placed all round the instrument The padding can be rigid foam plastic or corrugated cardboard The padding should cover as large an area of the instrument surface as possible and ensure that the instrument does not move within the box Any spaces can be filled with polystyrene chips or similar The use of polystyrene chips as the only padding material is insufficient The box should be sealed along the butt edges using waterproof textile adhesive tape which is at least 70 mm wide Storage under damp conditions If transport is likely to take a long time or if the instrument is to be stored for a long period under conditions where high air humidity is likely it is a good idea to protect the instrument against moisture using the original packing materials Sachets of drying agent are placed in the plastic bag containing the instrument and the bag is sealed using strong adhesive tape Drying agent which is saturated with water must not be put or allowed to remain in the plastic bag as it may increase the humidity and cause damage Drying agent which is saturated is pink in color unsaturated drying agent is blue Check list Make list of all the items in the box and place it in the box G 6 Getting Started 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 4 Operation
166. able Seconds UAS are determined for the complete path Path UAS They are determined from the Near End and Far End results using logical OR function Table TB 16 G 826 evaluation results The following is recorded in the header line of the results table e Measurement point used to determine the results e Anomaly used to perform the Near End measurement e Anomaly used to perform the Far End measurement Example G 826 PDH2CRC NEAR END CRC4 FAR END EBIT A set of results for the Near End and for the Far End is determined in each case The PATH ALLOCATION is also displayed The Unavailable Seconds UAS for the entire path Path UAS are also determined in Far End measurements The Path UAS result is determined by logically ORing the Near and Far End UAS results The message Attention Check TIM PLM Defect Evaluation please may be displayed This message indicates that you should check to see if evaluation of both these alarms has been activated These defects should normally be considered in a G 826 evaluation Evaluation is enabled or disabled in the Overhead Analyzer TB 14 Technical Background 20 20 3 3 2 G 826 parameter settings Mainframe SDH Version If G 826 ISM or G 826 OOS evaluation is selected the following parameters are used Select measurement point and hence the events used to perfo
167. al specifications electrical S 2 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 1 1 2 LINE AUXILIARY signal output 13 electrical balanced Socket 3035 01 222225254 Hoke Ak Blew dod wok ac ee d Lemo SA Socket 3035 02 Bantam Output impedance 2 048 6 120 Q E era REEE eae a oer a eee aes ee a 100 Q Max applied peak 5 V Bit rate Mbit s Line code Output voltage Output voltage Reflexion tolerance coefficient 2 0481 HDB3 0 3V gt 18 dB 7 50 2 to 3 MHz 1 544 B8ZS AMI DSX 1 compatible 1 3035 02 requires option 3035 90 33 2 3035 01 requires option 3035 90 34 Table S 2 LINE AUXILIARY output 13 signal specifications electrical 1 2 Clock generation and bit rates 1 2 1 Internal clock generation Bit rate 1 544 Mbit s to 155 52 Mbit s Frequency deviation 2 ppm 1 SElaDIE anerkennen 500 ppm Minimum setting step width 0 001 ppm 1 ppb jitter c u anette dk ernennen euer 0 010 UI
168. ame SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Remote operation With options BN 3035 95 30 and BN 3035 95 31 only 1 Introduction The remote operation options allow you to access a distant ANT 20 or DominoCOM ANT 20 from any Windows PC over a dial up link via modems or over an Ethernet LAN Here are just some of the things you can do Remote control Once connected to the distant ANT 20 you can use you mouse and keyboard to operate the ANT 20 just as if you where sitting in front of it File transfer Move or copy files quickly and reliably between ANT 20 and PC Chat between ANT 20 and PC Type messages that appear instantaneously at the other side Remote printing Redirect print jobs e g from the distant ANT 20 to your local printer All this is accomplished with the remote access software called ReachOut from Stac Electronics Inc In terms of ReachOut the controlling PC is the Viewer and the distant ANT 20 is the Host For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide Remote operation RO 1 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 Remote Operation via Modems 2 1 Overview The Remote Operation Option 3035 95 30 includes the software required to operate a distant ANT 20 or DominoCOM ANT 20 from a Windows PC over a dial up link via modems or over a direct connection via a null modem cable The direct connection may be used for testing purpos
169. annel 1000 x Protocol not defined Enhanced RDI 51 Sync Status 0000 Clock source byte HP Path Label C2 00000010 LP Path Label C2 5 Path label bytes Fig VI 22 Interpreter window for plain text display of SOH POH bytes Virtual instruments Overhead Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Dialog Settings SET The Settings dialog is used to activate the receiver for checking the Trace Identifier or the Path Label To do this specify expected values for the Trace Identifier JO J1 J2 or Path Label HP PLM LP PLM The device under test is operating correctly if the receive signal meets the expected values If the receive signal does not match the expected values the Trace Identifier Mismatch or Path Label Mismatch alarm messages can be generated These defects are indicated in the Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI You can also set the expected values for the SS bits in the H1 byte in the Settings dialog The AU LOP alarm is generated if the SS bits received do not correspond to the expected SS bits SS bits will not be evaluated if you set the expected value of the SS bits to Don t care xx Trace identifier bytes TC TIM bytes in preparation Settings Trace Identifier Expected Trace Identifier RS TIM JO hex value F HP TIM Un 7 LP TIM 12 Expected Trace Identifier values F HP TC TIM Length
170. as described 2 Open the Signal Structure In the Edit menu select the item Structure Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar This activates the ATM Structure window 4 In the 500 field press the button AALO and confirm with 5 Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 Click the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager Analysis Using the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer VI you can observe whether errors are occurring or not In the example below HUNC Header error UNCorrectable errors occur Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Filter Print Help Display One View Filter All t User Total Results Intermediate Results 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sea Fig 100 Anomaly Defect Analyzer window Application Guide A 67 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E A 68 Example 2 Insertion of a HCOR repetition rate of 1E 6 with analysis of the DUT reaction Settings Do not change the settings of the Vis Signal Structure and ATM Signal Structure The VI Anomaly and Defect Insertion must be reset Anomaly Defect Insertion LL CE X Insertion View Help fell loss CRE PE C TSE Insertion Hate continuous 1 C repetitive Burst
171. asurement by pressing function key F5 or clicking on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager Input to the Hit Threshold can be made with the normal keyboard or with the virtual keyboard window A 48 Application Guide 20 20 Analysis 110 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help FE Pe 10000 1161 Filter SET LP EL EE 1kHz rj Current Values Values 048807 0003 0482 un Positive Count Jitter peak peak Jitter peak Jitter peak Negative Count Fig A 72 Phase hit measurement Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version Current display of counted threshold transgressions A phase hit measurement will be interrupted when synchronization or the AC line supply fails The counters are stopped during the interruption Counting continues as soon as the instrument re synchronizes after the interruption The yellow warning label indicates that the measurement was interrupted A 49 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 16 Wander Generator The Wander Generator is used to make manually tolerance to wander measurements conforming to ITU T G 823 G 824 G 825 172 and ETSI EN302084 16 1 Test setup and description synchronization Source Ref DUT JL FLX Fig A 73
172. ation Manager 13 1 Application menu 17 APS commands 25 APS switching time measurement 14 Arranging windows 0 34 Advanced 0 14 Background Generator A 75 bit error test A 66 ATM Forum recommendations 6 ATM latency test A 71 layer A 64 ATM Signal Structure 63 ATM Standard O 14 Traffic Analyzer 71 ATM BERT A 66 Autoconfiguration 4 Mainframe SDH Version Automatic protection switching 14 Automatic scan function A 10 Automatic search function A 12 Automatic trouble scan function 7 B Background load A 75 Backup data 0 44 Bellcore standards SA 4 BIS P O Thresholds M 2101 6 2000 31 BIS P O Thresholds M 2101 1 4 1997 30 BIS P O Thresholds performance analysis TB 25 BISO Multiplier 24 TB 27 Bit error rate test BERT 17 Calibration measurement JTF 43 A 45 Cancel button O 36 74 Cell delay variation 74 loss ratio 81 Cell transfer delay 72 74 Channel 7 4 Check boxes 35 Cleaning the instrument M 1 Clock Source VI 7 CLOSE button O 36 Close program button O 20 CLR A 81 CLR with a variable cell rate 81 Configure menu 0 19 Connector panel O 2 3 4 O 5 Connectors O 5 Consecutive Identical Digit CID Test A 61 Control elements 1 O 5 Count anomaly result 17 D DCC 34 Defect insertion VI 12 Descriptor Overh
173. ation Test Sequences family of products from Wavetek Wandel Goltermann CATS is a test automation software based on the popular National Instruments product Lab Windows Test Executive and it may be used to make routine consecutive test jobs in R amp D Acceptance Testing Installation Troubleshooting as easy as the click of a mouse button CATS usually runs on a Windows PC and can control one or more test instruments in small Automatic Test Systems via the IEEE bus or other communication interfaces Since the ANT 20 itself is a PC based test instrument Wavetek Wandel Goltermann provide the unique ANT 20 Test Sequencer as a stand alone application that runs on the instrument s internal PC Hence no external controller PC is needed to take full advantage of this test automation tool Operation of the ANT 20 Test Sequencer Demo You may start the demo version by leaving the ANT 20 user interface and then double clicking on the ANT 20 Test Sequencer icon in the Windows Program Manager Please follow these hints to walk your way through the demo The demo is not protected by a password When you are prompted by the program to enter your user name and password simply press the Enter key The preset sequence will then be loaded automatically Start the sequence by clicking on the Test UUT button You can enter any text you like in the UUT No field The preset demo sequences DEMO SQU are a selectio
174. ations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version External magnetic field immunity to IEC 1000 4 8 F l functionally incom ond oe ea CE e E ER ook eR ence E dE ae ue 3 A m at 50 or 60 Hz 9 4 Noise emission A weighted noise pressure level at 1 approx 48 dB A 9 5 Calibration Maintenance Recommended confirmation ce ee eee ens 2 years 9 6 Dimensions Weight ANT 20 Weight including protective approx 9 6 kg Dimensions w x h x d in mm including protective approx 360 x 370 x 200 ANT 20E Weight including protective approx 15 kg Dimensions w x h x d in mm including protective approx 360 x 370 x 290 Specifications 5 45 9 7 9 7 1 9 7 2 5 46 Mainframe Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Ordering information Mainframe ANT 20 Advanced Network Tester ANT 20 SDH VersiOn 3035 41 One STM 1 mapping is included the price select the mapping option you require With monochrome display English and German language version Advanced Network Tester ANT 20 SONET version BN 3035 42 One STS 1 mapping is included in the price select the mapping option you require
175. ay window is particularly useful if you want to determine when and for how long a particular event occurred Errors are shown as a count per second and alarm durations are shown with a resolution of 100 millisecond Anomaly Defect Analyzer BEE View Settings Cursor Filter Print Help View Filter User Defects Current 146 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 16 0 10 32 17 0 147 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 17 0 10 32 16 0 148 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 16 0 10 32 19 0 149 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 19 0 10 32 20 0 150 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 20 0 10 32 21 0 151 MS HEI 05 09 97 10 32 21 0 10 32 22 0 152 STOP 05 09 97 10 32 21 2 Fig A 31 Table display Application Guide A 19 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Count result Num The total and intermediate results are displayed The measurement parameters can be set under Measurement Settings in the Application Manager The number of alarms displayed can be reduced by selection using appropriate filters Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Filter Print Help Total Results 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sa Fig A 32 Numerical display Summary Summary display of anomalies and defects The Summary view allows you to see at a glance whether anomalies or defects occurred during the measurement The filter function allows you to exclude certain anomalies and defects from the Summary evaluation If the
176. ber Interface Physical Layer 155 52 Mbps SONET STS 3c Physical Layer 155 52 Mbps Physical Layer Table SA 5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations SA 6 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Technical Working Approved Specifications Specification Approved Group Date Physical Layer ATM Physical Medium Dependent Interface af phy 0015 000 Sep 1994 Specification for 155 Mb s over Twisted Pair Cable Mid range Physical Layer Specification for af phy 0018 000 Sep 1994 Category 3 UTP 6 312 Kbps 6 312 Kbps UNI Specification 6 312 Kbps UNI Specification af phy 0029 000 June 1995 Utopia Level2 Utopia Level2 2 af phy 0039 000 June 1995 Physical Interface Specification for 25 6 Mb af phy 0040 000 Nov 1995 s over Twisted Pair A Cell based Transmission Convergence af phy 0043 000 Jan 1996 Sublayer for Clear Channel Interfaces 622 08 Mbps Physical Layer af phy 0046 000 Jan 1996 155 52 Mbps Physical Layer Specification af phy 0047 000 for Category 3 UTP See also UNI 3 1 af uni 0010 002 120 Ohm Addendum to PMD Interface af phy 0053 000 Jan 1996 Spec for 155 Mbps over TP 155 Mbps over MMF Short Wave Length af phy 0062 000 July 1996 Lasers Addendum to UNI 3 1 WIRE PMD to TC layers af phy 0063 000 July 1996 P NNI Interim Inter Switch Signaling Protocol af pnni 0026 000 Dec 1994 P NNI V1 0 af pnni 0055 000 Mar 1996
177. bles Configuration software DominoCOM ANT 20 Operating manual Remote control manual Optional accessories e External keyboard US English BN 3035 92 04 e Decoupler 20 dB BN 3903 63 e TKD 1 probe BN 882 01 Getting Started G 17 1 3 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes G 18 Getting Started Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Contents Mainframe SDH Version i Operating Fundamentals 1 Control elements 1 1 1 20 ANT 20E front 1 1 2 ANT 20 connector 2 1 3 ANT 20E connector 3 1 4 DominoCOM ANT 20 connector O 4 1 5 Description of control elements and connectors 5 1 5 1 Front panel control elements 5 1 9 2 Control elements and connectors on the connector panel O 5 1 5 3 Front panel LED 7 Basic OPEFALION an ede teste cede 8 Switching the 20 20 8 3 1 Connecting 8 Sa ON Er 8 3 2 1 After switching on 9 3 3 Switching on with function key APPL pressed 9 3 4 Further operating
178. can function The Scan function permits sequential testing of all tributary channels in an SDH or SONET signal The appropriate mapping options are needed for this SDA 5 ee ee ee erie eee ree C 12 mapping C 11 mapping C 11 TU 12 mapping C2 mapping DONE USIGNals 2 23 54 bed qme Ed I ums aem sme sas VT1 5 mapping VT2 mapping VT6 mapping The test is performed within an AU SDH version or a SPE SONET version Selection of the various AUs SPEs for signals with higher bit rates is done manually The settings for the generator and receiver must be matched for loop measurements The channel scan takes place synchronously on the transmit and receive sides If the signal structure settings differ only the receive channel settings will be altered The ANT 20 receiver checks the receive signal defects and those of the corresponding SDH or SONET structure and of the channel and enters the results of the single channels in a matrix Allowed for defects Defect SDH Defect SONET LOF OOF SDH LOF OOF SONET Table 5 16 Defects allowed for during the Scan function 5 30 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 6 3 Automatic Search function The Search function allows you to search for a tributary channel in a SDH or SONET signal The appropriate mapping options are needed for this SOM SIGNS Sr eaten goad E eR ee tea
179. can be halted at any time by clicking on Stop A 38 Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide ZU Mainframe SDH Version Analysis When measurement is made the default values for the scan frequencies and the tolerance mask are set in the MTJ Settings window according to the bit rate The default values are changed automatically when the bit rate is changed There are two windows for displaying results see Fig A 57 Table format e Measurement results are displayed in the table under UI e Measurement results where the tolerable jitter of the DUT is greater than the maximum amplitude that can be set on the jitter generator are indicated by a gt e g gt 64 Ul e Measurement results which are below the tolerance mask are marked with an in the table Graphics format e Measurement results are marked with a on the graphics e Measurement results where the tolerable jitter of the DUT is greater than the maximum amplitude that can be set on the jitter generator are marked with A on the graphics instead of the Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help zs pd 4 kafro arefe Stop Error Source nm Error Source Error Threshold 10 Error Threshold Gate Time Sec Settling Time Sec Gate Time Sec Settling Time Sec HkHz Ul 0 0020 0
180. cation Manager click on the icon button shown above to activate the instrument The Signal Structure window opens The display area of the window depicts the signal structure setting that is currently valid Signal Structure ie Auto Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Trigger Aux Offset Help Rx electrical Fig O 20 The Signal Structure window 2 Click on the above icon in the toolbar Click on the Signal Structure command in the Edit menu The Edit Signal Structure TX dialog window opens Edit Signal Structure TX Edit Mode Trru T Settings Happing Mode Asyne Framin PCM30 CRC i 053 Framin C Parity 051 Framin DS1 ESF ANSI Test Pattern PRBS15 z E Fig O 21 The Edit Signal Structure TX dialog window Operating Fundamentals 23 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Example The following example shows how to set up a STM 1 AU 4 VC 12 2M framed multiplex structure for the generator TX and receiver RX Click on the TX button in the Edit field of the Edit Signal Structure dialog window 4 Click on the Clear button The TX signal structure is cleared 5 Click on the ITU T button 6 Click on the following buttons in the Edit Signal Structure TX dialog window in the order given TX STM1 AUA VC
181. checks the receive signal defects and those of the corresponding SDH or SONET structure and of the channel and enters the results of the single channels in a matrix You can display a detailed alarm history by selecting an individual channel from within the matrix Allowed for defects Defect SDH Defect SONET LOF OOF SDH LOF OOF SONET Table 5 18 Defects allowed for in the Trouble Scan function S 32 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Defect SDH Defect SONET AIS 1 5 Mbit s AIS DS1 LOF 1 5 Mbit s LOF DS1 1 5 Mbit s OOF DS1 YELLOW 1 5 Mbit s YELLOW DS1 Table 5 8 Defects allowed for in the Trouble Scan function continued Specifications S 33 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 5 Automatic Signal Delay measurement The ANT 20 measures the signal delay between the generator and receiver using characteristic sequences in the selected PRBS The signal delay measurement is automatic and continuous i e individual measurements are repeatedly performed Practically any signal structure that can be set on the ANT 20 can be used for the measurement Exceptions ATM signal structures Overhead measurements Through Mode ADM test The measurement range and measurement time depend on the pattern bit rate and the selected pattern The maximum possible measurement value depends on the length of the PRBS The maxim
182. ck Count ECC Embedded Communication Channel EDC Error Detection Code AB Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued SA 14 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i Abbreviation Meaning O C NN Error Monitoring Byte 8 G 832 Errored Second G 826 Extended Super Frame DS1 LEN End System Identifier Errored Second Ratio G 826 Frequency 1 RSOH User Channel e g for maintenance purposes TOH User Channel e g for maintenance purposes POH Path User Channels OAM flow ATM Path OAM flow ATM Channel FA1 Framing byte 11110110 G 832 FA2 Framing byte 0010 1000 G 832 FAS Frame Alignment Signal Frame Error Far End Alarm and Control Signal Far End Block Error Fast Maximum Tolerable Jitter m m gt Path Status PLCP Path Status PLCP G1 General Purpose Communication Channel G 832 Pointer Byte 1 Bit No 1 to 4 New Data Flag 01101001 Bit No 5 and 6 ss bits Bit No 7 and 8 Pointer value MSB bits Pointer Byte 3 Negative Justification Opportunity POH Position Indicator e g for quadframe HBER High Bit Error Ratio Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued Pointer Byte 2 Pointer value LSB bits Standards Abbreviations SA 15 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Abbreviation Meaning 000 High pass Fi
183. count If only a certain range of values 1 of interest count thresholds can be set for anomalies and time thresholds for defects When these thresholds are activated only those values above the threshold value will be displayed The User Filter can only be activated when there is no measurement running Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 21 mr ral Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E E 4 6 Dialog Go to The Go to dialog provides support in analyzing long term measurements where a large number of results are displayed The date and exact time for the display are entered in the Go to dialog When you exit from the dialog by clicking the Ok button the cursor jumps to the corresponding position in the histogram View Graph or e the corresponding event is displayed in the first line of the table View Table Date M d yy z 0872171397 Time hh mm ss 18 19 43 Fig VI 15 Go to dialog for entering the time for the analysis Cancel 4 7 Settings menu The Settings menu is used to set various detection parameters and to select measurement modes The menu contains the following commands Bit Record bit errors Block Word Record block errors word errors T1X1 Detection of anomalies and defects to T1X1 ANSI BELL Detection of anomalies and defects to GR 253 Bellcore RDI enhanced On Off switch for RDI enhanced If detection of anomal
184. d target values are specified by G 821 SESR 0 195 ESR lt 8 The End to End target values for DM Degraded Minutes corresponding to older G 821 recommendations are not taken into account This threshold indicates the bit error rate above which a second is counted as an SES Severely Errored Second This threshold indicates the bit error rate above which DM Degraded Minutes are evaluated Regardless of the bitrate an ES is a second in which at least one error occurs According to annex D ES is a second in which at least n errors occured Table TB 15 0 821 parameter settings Technical Background TB 13 EN Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 3 ITU T G 826 evaluation The ANT 20 ANT 20E can perform In Service ISM and Out of Service OOS G 826 evaluation 3 3 1 G 826 results The following results are determined and displayed Errored Blocks Count of errored blocks Background Block Errored blocks not in SES as a count and as an error rate Errors Errored Seconds Errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Error Free Seconds Error free seconds as a count and as an error rate Severely Errored Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds Unavailable Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds VERDICT Accepted Rejected Overall assessment of the path quality PATH Path allocation setting ALLOCATION PATH UAS For Far End measurements the Unavail
185. d in the table under dB Measurement results in the table that are outside the tolerance mask s are marked with an There are two graphics windows The right window has the higher y axis resolution On the graph the measurement values are marked with a 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer xi 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer x TX Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help TX Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help Stat Hange Stet Hx Range Stop Settling Time 10 Stop Settling Time 10 dB 0 1 2 3 Fig A 67 JTF measurements result graphics with various resolutions Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 15 Phase Hit Measurement 15 1 Test setup and description 00000000000 Fig A 68 Phase hit measurement setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 electrical unbalanced Rx 14 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 Phase hits occur when a specific jitter threshold is exceeded Events of this kind are recorded using a counter The current counter reading indicates how often the phase hit threshold has been exceeded since the measurement was started Positive counts and negative counts can be made mutually with the ANT 20 Jitter Analyzer 15 2 Application setting Vis required e Signal Structure e O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer 1 Add the VIs required to the list
186. de Vis required e Signal Structure e ATM Signal Structure 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 92 2 For the following settings click on one of the buttons minibar to bring the desired window on top 2 SEIEN 1 ot a Fig A 92 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Example ATM signal structure with STM 1 VC 4 ATM mapping Setting the physical layer Signal Structure VI The Signal Structure window is activated The display area shows the current signal structure 1 Select Signal Structure from the Edit menu Click on the corresponding icon in the Application Manager A 63 53 64 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E The Signal Structure Editor dialog opens see Fig A 93 Edit Signal Structure E Edit SDH Mapping PDH Settings Dr Mode 2M Framing wCI2 053 Framing veu Ej 51 Framing Interface D51 E5F AN51 CONCAT i DE Cancel Info Fig A 93 Edit Signal Structure dialog Signal Structure 2 Setthe required signal structure Select the interface SDH PDH and an appropriate ATM mapping 3 Activate the ATM mapping by clicking the ATM button in the Mapping field 4 Confirm your setti
187. displayed of anomalies as count values and defects as duration values E Anomaly Defect Analyzer OR gt lt View Settings Cursor Filter Print Help 1414041 gt gt Display Anomalies All View Filter User Defects Current Display filter No Event Date Starttime Stop time Count 0 START 24 02 97 16 13 10 0 1 24 02 97 16 13 14 0 18 13 15 0 2 24 02 97 16 13 16 0 18 13 17 0 3 24 02 97 16 13 17 0 18 13 18 0 Anomalies count second 4105 24 02 97 18 13 21 6 16 13 25 0 5 24 02 97 16 13 27 0 18 13 28 0 6 TSE 24 02 97 16 13 30 0 18 13 31 0 TSE 24 02 97 18 13 31 0 18 13 32 0 8 TSE 24 02 97 18 13 32 0 18 13 33 0 9 TSE 24 02 97 18 13 33 0 18 13 34 0 10 TSE 24 02 97 18 13 34 0 18 13 35 0 11 TSE 24 02 97 18 13 39 0 18 13 40 0 12 24 02 97 16 13 43 0 16 13 44 0 13 STOP 24 02 97 16 13 49 4 I Defect duration 3 4 seconds Anomalies count second RR RA BIT BLOCK evaluation indication Fig VI 10 Elements of the View Table window Menu command Icon button Function View Graph Table Num zs Switch display modes Summary n ie Settings Select various detection and measurement modes Cursor Go to Moves cursor position in table to date and time entered Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 15 16 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Menu command Icon button Function
188. ds The PCMCIA interface provides access to a wide range of remote control interfaces EEE bus remote control BN 3035 92 10 e For using other PCMCIA cards Card and Socket Services are required These are included with the remote control options Display Built in display ANT 20 Monochrome LCD screen 9 5 16 greyscale set using potentiometer 07 RII nos ew RER 640 x 480 pixels standard Option 3035 93 10 Alternative color 9 5 512 colors ReSolUlON erer ER EEE 640 x 480 pixels standard VGA Built in display ANT 20E Color EFT a are 9 5 512 colors 640 x 480 pixels standard VGA Connector for external display 04 The built in and external displays can be operated simultaneously 2 2 2 standard VGA gioi tach re nah ee wd ek Bea ee 640 x 480 pixels Refresh 60 2 DOCK edad T OTT 15 way 3 row submin D socket 5 40 Specifications 20 20 Specifications Mainframe SDH Version Keyboard Built in Standard
189. e 6 AC power fails during a timer controlled measurement AC power is restored after the normal end of the measurement time As backup data was generated before the power failure this backup data will be loaded when power is restored The data is restored and the end results generated measurement has ended The time from the start of the AC power failure until the programmed end of the measurement is indicated as a No Power alarm The No Power alarm time up to the programmed end of the measurement is included in the Elapsed Time Hence the Elapsed Time is equal to the Gate Time 0 48 Operating Fundamentals Virtual Instruments 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version p Contents Virtual instruments 1 OVGIVIOW enews 1 1 1 Application VI 2 2 Signal Structure 6 664 suas te eee std oe tee cede Rees VI 3 2 1 Main window Signal Structure VI 3 2 2 Dialog Edit Signal 5 VI 4 2 3 Dialog Interface VI 7 2 4 Dialog VI 7 25 Dialog Autoconfiguration VI 8 2 6 Dialog Delay VI 9 2 7 Dialog APS Tester Option 3035 90 15 VI 10 2 8 Scan 5
190. e It is therefore not possible to switch to block error evaluation This does not apply to the TSE meas point for which real block errors are evaluated Therefore you cannot switch to bit error evaluation when making a G 829 evaluation on TSEs 5 24 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Display of defects using LED indicators also in the Anomaly Defect Analyzer Summary display window CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval 5 6 Evaluation to ITU T M 2100 Specifications ES EFS SES and UAS are evaluated Pass Unknown Fail assessment based on the threshold values S1 and S2 for ES and SES The threshold values are calculated internally as per M 2100 and displayed in the results window Settings for S1 and S2 aloca a 22 4 2 COE erde riet 0 1 to 100 BISO Bringing into Service Objectives multiplication factor 0 1 to 100 The M 2100 evaluation can be performed on the following events FAS bit errors FAS1 5 FAS2 58 FAS34 545 and FAS140 CRC 4 errors CRC 6 errors EBIT errors PBIT errors Bit errors TSE For signals evaluation is made at the Near End and at the Far End simultaneously Bit errors can be evaluated for unframed patterns framed patterns and bulk signals
191. e backup program G 14 Getting Started 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 7 2 20 Windows95 and ANT 20E The ANT 20 ANT 20E software together with the Windows95 operating system is pre installed on the hard disk drive of the ANT 20 ANT 20E The instrument is ready to use immediately The following directories are stored on the hard disk drive of the ANT 20 ANT 20E c ant20 ANT 20E programs and data c win95 sup setup exe Windows95 setup program ate c ant20 sup disk1 setup exe ANT 20E setup program los Misk2 V Miskn V Table G 4 Directories on the hard disk drive of the ANT 20 ANT 20E To back up the ANT 20E data copy each one of the directories c ant20 sup disk1 through cAant20 sup disk n on to a separate floppy disk Tip Itis a good idea to make a backup of all the data on the hard disk drive using a suitable backup program Help with problems If a reinstallation of the software is necassary for some reason please contact your nearest Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center The addresses are listed at the end of this operating manual When making inquiries always quote the following e ANT 20 ANT 20E serial number e ANT 20 ANT 20E Software Package version number Getting Started G 15 Mainframe Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 8 DominoCOM ANT 20 8 1 The DominoCOM ANT 20 Black Box concept is the ideal solution for use in automatic test systems e 115 e
192. e objectives BPV Bipolar Violation Burst Tolerance Bandwidth Container n 1 to 4 STM 16 n 1 to 16 5 Cycle Stuff Counter C2 Signal Label VC 3 4 POH Signal Label CAS Channel Associated Signaling CBR Constant Bit Rate CDV Cell Delay Variation CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CER Cell Error Ratio Concatenation Indication Congestion Indicator CI BW K Congestion Indicator Bandwidth Clock Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued Standards Abbreviations SA 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Abbreviation Meaning 00000002 Pointer Decrement Bit D1 to D3 RSOH 196 kbit s DCC for Regenerator Section D4 to D12 MSOH 576 kbit s DCC for Multiplex Section DBR Deterministic Bit Rate C Dropped Cells DCC Data Communication Channel Data Country code ATM Data Communication Network Delta Pointer Overflow Virtual Concatenation Electrical Interface Signal 1544 kbit s DS3 Electrical Interface Signal 44736 kbit s DUT Device Under Test 5 2 DXC Digital Cross Connect System Electrical Interface Signal 2048 kbit s RSOH Orderwire Channel voice for Regenerator Section TOH Orderwire Channel voice Electrical Interface Signal 8448 kbit s MSOH Orderwire Channel voice for Multiplex Section TOH Orderwire Channel voice 3 Electrical Interface Signal 34368 kbit s Electrical Interface Signal 139264 kbit s EBC Errored Blo
193. e defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval 5 22 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 3 Evaluation to ITU T G 826 The following are evaluated EB BBE ES EFS SES and UAS Pass Fail assessment depending on path allocation of 0 1 to 100 The thresholds for SES and UAS can be set by the user In service measurement ISM Simultaneous in service measurement of near end and far end of a selected path Near end HP B3 LP B3 BIP2 FAS bei 140 34 8 oder 2M CRC 4 DS3FAS DS3 P Parity DS3 C Parity DSIFAS D1 CRC6 Far end HP REI LP REI E Bit bei 2M DS3 FEBE Out of service measurement OOS Out of service measurement using bit errors in a test pattern for PDH and SDH Display of defects via LEDs CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval 5 4 Evaluation to ITU T G 828 ES EFS SES UAS BBE and SEP are evaluated Pass fail assessment in conjunction with path allocation of between 0 1 and 100 The thresholds for SES and UAS can be set by the user G 828 evaluation can be performed on the following events 1 B2SUM MS REI B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE Evaluation of the near end and the far end is simultaneous as soon as the si
194. e generator and receiver The VI has the following functions e Entering the signal structure e Selecting the Tx Rx interfaces e Automatic functions Auto Config Search Trouble Scan Delay APS measurement After the VI has booted up the main window Signal Structure is displayed Menu bar and toolbar Optical level value Rx signal offset Tx signal offset measured value set value Signal Structure uto Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Ingg Aux Offset Help Display area showing the signal structure Fig VI 1 Elements in the Signal Structure main window Menu Icon button Function More information Auto ATI Automatic functions e g receiver configuration Sec 2 5 Page VI 8 CONF Time Delay APS measurements Sec 2 6 Page VI 9 Sec 2 7 Page VI 10 Edit Edit signal structur Sec 2 2 Page 4 Interface Enter interface parameters Sec 2 3 Page VI 7 Laser Switch laser on off Channel 3 Select tributary channels Sec 2 4 Page VI 7 Idle Set fill pattern for idle channels Trigger Set trigger signals Select interface for Drop amp lnsert function Sec 2 3 Page 7 Offset Virtual instruments Signal Structure Set Tx signal clock frequency offset On line help VI 3 Mainframe SDH Version 2 2 VI 4 Dialog Edit Signal Structure ANT 20 ANT 20E This dialog is used to set the structures of the PDH SDH
195. e measured To correctly detect test pattern drop out sensor TSE the basic bit error rate of the path must not exceed 2E 4 Switch time limit t1 Setting the check value The measured switching time is compared with the Switch Time Limit value at the end of the measurement time If the measured value is less than or equal to this value the result is a PASSED message otherwise a FAILED message is displayed Gate time t2 Setting the measurement time The measurement begins as soon as the sensor event first occurs It ends after the set measurement time has elapsed This ensures that multiple switching is also detected Result and status display After the measurement the following are displayed e The switching time required e Astatus message PASSED Measured value lt Switch Time Limit FAILED FAILED Time Measured value gt Switch Time Limit FAILED 0 defect occurred during the measurement that blocked the sensor 0 LOS or LOF if sensor MS AIS Table VI 3 Display of test result after measurement 2 8 Scan functions Further information on the automatic scan functions such as Trouble Scan and Search are found in part 5 Application Guide of this operating manual Virtual instruments Signal Structure 11 21 Mainframe SDH Version 3 Anomaly Defect Insertion 3 1 12 window Anomaly Defect Insertion ANT 20 ANT 20E The Anomaly Defect Inserti
196. e used if they do not adversely affect the safety characteristics of the instrument Fuses Use only the prescribed fuses see Sec 3 1 Page G 8 G 2 Getting Started 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Tests after repairs and maintenance The insulation resistance and the protective ground connection of the AC line circuitry must be checked after repair or maintenance work on the instrument Check the connection and general condition by visual inspection and measure the resistance between the protective ground contact of the line plug and the instrument enclosure The resistance must be lt 0 1 Shake the cable during the measurement Resistance variations may mean that the cable is faulty in such cases the cable must not be reused Repeat the measurement using a new cable If the cause of the changes in resistance proves not to be due to the cable the instrument must be taken out of service until the fault has been determined and repaired in accordance with the safety requirements Measure the insulation resistance between the AC line terminals which have been shorted together and the protective conductor terminal of the instrument using a 500 V insulation tester Ensure that the instrument s AC line switch is in the I position The insulation resistance must be gt 2 MQ according to EN 61010 1 If the resistance is less than 2 MQ the instrument must be taken out of service and repaired Getting Started G 3
197. eachOut you can start the ReachOut Host and configure it as required To prevent a Viewer from accidentally tying up the Host it is recommended setting the Host configuration parameter Inactivity Timeout to a non zero value in Preferences Host Options menu After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC the Viewer in terms of ReachOut and configuring the ReachOut Viewer as required you can start remote access to the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide 3 3 3 Software installation under Windows95 Remote operation To install and configure the software on a DominoCOM ANT 20 in the same way as on an ANT 20 connect an external monitor keyboard and mouse to the built in PC AT If you ordered the Remote Operation Option BN 3035 95 31 together with your ANT 20 the required software packages are already installed on the ANT 20 ReachOut in the directory CAREACHOUT and the ReachOut icon is shown in the Windows95 file folder Programs The ReachOut security options are pre configured as follows The ReachOut Password List contains an entry with the User Name ANT 20 and the accompanying password ANT 20 The option Passwords Required is set to For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user s guide RO 11 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E You now have to modify the pre configured network setup to meet the specific requirements of y
198. ead Generator 25 Disabling entries 16 DM Threshold Performance analysis TB 13 Double pointer TB 2 Mainframe SDH Version ECC A 34 Edit TCM Sequence VI 26 EN 302084 A 56 Enabling entries 16 Entry boxes O 36 Error Free Seconds Performance analysis TB 6 to TB 34 Errored Seconds Performance analysis TB 6 to TB 34 ETSI EN 302084 A 50 A 58 ETSI ETS 300462 A 56 ETSI standards SA 5 F 0 9 F MTJ Fast MTJ 40 Front panel O 1 Function key F3 APPL O 9 Fuse replacing M 3 G G 811 A 53 A 56 G 812 53 A 56 G 813 53 A 56 0 821 A 22 G 821 Performance analysis VI 40 G 823 37 A 43 50 A 53 A 58 G 824 A 50 A 53 A 58 G 825 A 37 50 A 53 A 58 G 826 A 22 G 826 ISM Performance analysis VI 40 G 826 OOS Performance analysis VI 40 G 828 22 G 828 Performance analysis VI 40 TB 19 G 829 A 22 G 829 Performance analysis 40 TB 21 G 958 37 A 43 H Helo menu O 19 Histogram Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 14 HUNC A 67 1356 A 74 Ide VI 3 Installing a printer 38 Instruments menu O 18 ANT 20 ANT 20E Interface 7 4 Interpreter Overhead Analyzer 28 ITU T G 707 SDH Multiplexing Structure TB 1 ITU T G 821 Performance analysis TB 12 ITU T recommendations 1 J Jitter amplitude 40 Jitter frequency 40 A 42 JTF Jitter Transfer Function 43 K Keyboard O 36 L LED array O 7 Linear APS VI 28 L
199. easurement is controlled from the Application Manager as follows e Start and stop measurement manually see Sec 6 2 1 e Start measurement manually and stop measurement automatically see Sec 6 2 2 e Start and stop measurement automatically see Sec 6 2 3 6 2 1 Starting and stopping a measurement manually Measurements can be controlled manually by clicking on the Traffic signal icon in the Application Manager start stop toggle function v Manual start mode must be activated see Measurement Settings dialog Before starting the measurement the traffic signal icon is set to green Starting a measurement manually Measurement amp 5 ta p Settings Fig 27 Icon and menu command for starting a measurement Click on the Traffic signal icon button Select the Start command in the Measurement menu Press function key F5 MEASUREMENT START The traffic signal button changes to a red light and the Stop command in the Measurement menu is activated The Application Manager status display changes from Stopped to Running Stopping a measurement manually kd Measurement Start Settings Fig O 28 Icon and menu command for stopping a measurement Click on the Traffic signal icon button again Select the Stop command in the Measurement menu Press function key F6 MEASUREMENT STOP The measurement stops a
200. eck the Fixed Amplitude check box and enter the required amplitude in the box below it 4 If you want to use the results of a previous MTJ measurement for the scan frequencies and amplitudes click on the MTJ Adaptation button The results are then automatically matched to the permissible ranges measurement and frequency of the jitter meter If there no MTJ results available the button is grayed out 5 Select whether you want to perform a calibration measurement before every JTF measurement or to use a single calibration measurement stored internally For maximum measurement accuracy it is a good idea to make a calibration measurement before every JTF measurement 6 Click Start to start the measurement The measurement stops automatically when finished or when you click Stop A 45 46 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Analysis The measurement results are displayed in three different windows The default values for the scan frequencies and the tolerance masks in the JTF Settings window are set in the window with the table display see Fig A 66 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer fel TH Mode View Frint Help Settling Time Sec JITTER TRANSFER FUNCTION TRANSFER FUNCTION Fig A 66 measurements results displayed as tables e The default values depend on the bit rate and change automatically when the bit rate is changed Measurement results are displaye
201. ect HEC Cell delineation state diagram Fig A 117 Setup for loss of cell delineation sensor tests The purpose of this test is to demonstrate that the alarm and error sensors in an ATM switch are operating properly to ITU T or ATM Forum If there is an LCD alarm the system has lost cell stream synchronization The synchronization and the monitoring of the cell stream is performed by a state automat which is specified in ITU T Recommendation 1 432 When a simple LCD alarm is inserted the ANT 20 sends 7 consecutive cells with header errors In this case the ATM switch should output an LCD alarm for the port The insertion time can be limited to 6 cells with header errors In this case the switch should synchronize 24 2 Switch configuration 1 Set up a unidirectional permanent connection with constant bit rate through the switch 2 Check that the PCR Peak Cell Rate is 10 of the channel capacity in cells per second A 78 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 24 3 Application selection on the 20 Vis required Signal Stucture ATM Signal Structure Anomaly and Defect Insertion Anomaly and Defect Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 118 caje SERE e a 1 e TTE 01 455 of Fig A 118 Minibar Application Manager a
202. ection and measurement modes Filter Display selected results only user filter Help On line help Overall evaluation of Anomalies and defects The result of the overall evaluation is either OK or FAIL Note The result of the overall evaluation is independent of the result of performance analysis LEDs indicating events Anomalies Defects Left hand LED column History The display changes from gray to yellow when an event occurs during the measurement The display remains yellow when the event ends Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 19 Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 Right hand LED column Indicate current status when measurement is running The display changes from green to red for the duration of the event The display reverts to green when the event ends The LEDs are grayed out when no measurement is running Verdict of the performance analysis Display of the verdict of the performance analysis The following results are possible Result 0 Condition explanation Accepted Depending on the setting selected in the Hierarchy menu only NEAR END results e g TSE or NEAR END and FAR END results will be taken into account Only possible for M 2100 and M 2101 Depending on the setting selected in the Hierarchy menu only NEAR END results e g TSE or NEAR END and END results will be taken into account Reject
203. ed Depending on the setting selected in the Hierarchy menu only NEAR END results e g TSE or NEAR END and END results will be taken into account No Verdict No verdict is provided for G 829 and ANSI evaluations No display Performance analysis Off Tabelle VI 4 Results of the Verdict of the performance analysis G 821 evaluation provides NEAR END results only VI 20 Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 45 Dialog User Filter The User Filter dialog is used to select specific results to be displayed in the result windows of the To do this the User option must be selected in the corresponding result window Individual results lists User Filter Anomalies Preselect Select complete result groups Duration gt Count threshold Time threshold Event value ranges 00 00 00 0 Cancel Fig VI 14 Elements the User Filter dialog Individual results can be evaluated and displayed by clicking on the event required in the Anomalies or Defects list boxes One or more events can be marked in each list box You can also select complete groups of anomalies and defects using the buttons in the Preselect field The selected anomalies and defects are used for all four display modes of the VI The result display takes all registered result values for the events into ac
204. ed the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 30 separately install the ReachOut software as follows Querying the assigned COM port of the PCMCIA card modem only if you use a card modem 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Click the Windows95 Start button choose Settings and then choose Control Panel 3 Double click Modems select your PCMCIA modem type on the General tab and then click Properties You need the assigned COM port usually COM3 for configuring ReachOut Installing the ReachOut software Start or return to Windows 95 Insert the ReachOut for Windows amp DOS installation disk 1 into drive 3 Click the Windows95 Start button choose Run and type the following command into the dialog box A install 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide If you are installing ReachOut on DominoCOM ANT 20 answer the on screen question Would you like ReachOut Host to be started automatically when you start Windows with Yes All configuration parameters can be changed after installation by configuring ReachOut 5 After complete installation exit Windows95 remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the ANT 20 After this installation procedure on the 20 the Host in terms of ReachOut you can start the ReachOut Host and configure it as
205. el already affixed to the instrument should be removed or the new label affixed over it so that it is completely concealed PRINTER V 24 of 9 INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION y MADE IN FED REP GERMANY DO HOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW BY Wandel amp Goltermenn DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS3 A LASER PRODUCT C Fig G 3 Laser safety warning label on the front panel of the ANT 20 ANT 20E G 5 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 Packing and unpacking transport 2 1 Unpacking Do not discard the packing materials and any transport protection These items have been specially designed to be reused if they are not damaged The instrument can only be reliably protected against damage if the original packing is used when transporting it 2 2 Checking for transport damage After unpacking the instrument check it for transport damage Such damage is likely if the packaging itself has been severely damaged Do not attempt to use an instrument which is visibly damaged as this may result in further damage to the instrument and may be dangerous see Sec 1 G 1 2 3 Packing for transport and storage If the instrument is to be shipped e g to a Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center for repairs follow the instructions below to ensure that damage does not occur during transport Packing If possible use the original packing undamaged for shipping the instrument If the original packing is not available use
206. ent points that are not defined in the recommendation Measurement Bit rate EEPO values for point P e lt a casos rea _ swa hbm pes _ wee jam 1 SEP is only included in the verdict for measurement times gt 7 days 2 NA Not Applicable means that this value is not taken into account in the VERDICT Table TB 32 End to end performance objectives EEPO that are not defined the recommendation Technical Background TB 29 EN Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 7 2 3 BIS P O S1 und S2 Threshold definition and computing for M 2101 1 4 1997 The BISO value is internally computed for ES SES BBE and SEP The threshold values 51 and S2 are also determined from BISO The values calculated for BISO S1 and S2 are displayed on the results page The BISO value is computed as follows Path section B3 LPBIP 2 8 and regenerator section B1 BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 sqrt BISO ES S2 Limit ES BISO ES 2x sqrt BISO ES BISO SES Allocation x EEPO SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 1 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES S2 Limit SES BISO SES 2 x sqrt BISO SES Table TB 33 BISO formulae for the path section LPBIP 2 8 and regenerator section B1 Multiplex section B2SUM BISO ES Allocation x EEPO ES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 10 1 Limit ES BISO ES 2 x sqrt BISO
207. entry for negative values Fig O 35 The Keyboard window for entering numerical parameter values 36 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 0 Printing and exporting results You can connect a printer to the parallel interface socket 05 or to the serial interface socket 06 The results can only be printed out or exported when all measurements in progress have ended Printing out all final results from the Application Manager The available measurement results from the opened virtual instruments can be printed out collectively from the Application Manager The following virtual instruments can supply results Signal Structure Structure Optical level range 8 level ai Offset range Anomaly Defect Results that are available from the Num display Analysis Performance Analysis Performance results for the currently selected evaluation and the corresponding setting values Jitter O 172 Jitter measurement Jitter O 171 Jitter peak peak max Jitter peak max Jitter peak max Phase Hits pos count Phase Hits neg count Wander measurement MTIE final result plus the corresponding setting values for the results Table O 5 Possible results included in the printout for the Print all command All other virtual instruments provide no results for the printout Unavailable results are indicated by on the printout Virtual instrument print and export functio
208. er Offset NDF Set pointer value with NDF on off Unit Frame Units for the time parameters 1 to T5 in frames Unit Millisecond Units for the time parameters T1 to T5 in milliseconds Unit Second Units for the time parameters 1 to 5 in seconds Help On line help VI 32 Virtual instruments Pointer Generator 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 7 2 Generating pointer actions The Pointer Generator allows simultaneous generation of AU and TU pointers using independent parameters Periodic pointers and pointer bursts e Periodic single multiple pointers of identical polarity INC or DEC pointer actions e Periodic single multiple pointers of different polarity INC DEC pointer action e Periodic pointers with one double pointer INC or DEC pointer actions with Add function T4 T2 e Periodic pointers with one missing pointer INC or DEC pointer actions with Cancel function T4 n x T2 e Pointer burst with missing pointers INC or DEC pointer actions with Cancel function T4 gt gt nx T2 Standard sequences All the standard sequences to ITU T G 783 ANSI T1 105 03 can be used directly or can be edited for special applications e 87 3 sequence e 43 44 sequence with double pointer e 86 4 sequence with double pointer More information on generating special pointer actions sequences is found in part 7 Technical Background
209. er consumption 20 lt 300 VA Power consumption 20 lt 600 VA Safety class to IEC BE deans weeds 1 9 2 Climatic and mechanical ambient conditions 1 With temperature range restrictions see Tab S 25 Table S 24 Applicable IEC and ETS classes 5 42 Specifications 20 20 9 2 1 9 3 9 3 1 Specifications Mainframe SDH Version Climatic and mechanical data Operation IE 72 7K1 7M2 ETS 7 1 Transport IE 12 1K3 1M2 IE 23 2K4 2M3 ETS 1 1 ETS 2 3 5 to 45 C 40 to 70 C limited to 25 10 70 5 to 95 5 to 95 1 to 29 g m 1 to 29 g m Storage 5 to 40 C limits operating range 0 to 50 C Temperature 5 to 85 Humidity 30 1 to 25 g m Humidity gt 30 Condensation Precipitation Water Ice formation damp loading surface 9 to 200 Hz 5 m s 8 to 200 Hz 20 m s 9 to 200 Hz 10 m s 200 to 500 Hz 40 m s 200 to 500 Hz 15 m s 300 m s 100 m s 1000 m s 300 m s 22 em atm 0 Major parameters for classes see Fig 5 24 Damp Sinusoidal vibration Shock 11 ms duration Shock 6 ms duration Free drop Toppling Table S 25 EC conformance declaration CE mark Interference generation to EN 50 081 1
210. er failure lasts much longer The duration of the power failure in this case is almost until the normal end of the measurement Although the Elapsed Time Gate Time at the end of the measurement the effective measurement time may be very short Operating Fundamentals 47 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 The AC power failure lasts for the entire programmed measurement time On restoration of AC power the ANT 20 ANT 20E establishes that no backup data was generated and that the stop time has already been reached The measurement will therefore not be started The ANT 20 ANT 20E stores the calculated stop time when the timer is activated and compares this with the actual date and time when power is restored The start time No Power alarm duration and stop time may therefore be recorded 5 AC power fails during a timer controlled measurement AC power is restored before the normal end of the measurement time As backup data was generated before the power failure this backup data will be loaded when power is restored The data is restored and the measurement resumed The time from the generation of the last set of backup data until the restore start of the measurement 1 indicated as a No Power alarm and is taken into account the restored measurement values The No Power alarm time is included in the Elapsed Time At the end of the measurement the Elapsed Time is equal to the Gate Tim
211. erhead Byte 1 Binary 1 93 10010011 2 2 93 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010010 10010010 10010001 10010001 10010000 Update Deo Fig VI 19 TCM Sequence dialog with Keyboard dialog for editing the TCM sequence If you click the button in the TCM Sequence dialog the TCM sequence shown in the list box will be transmitted If the content of the list box is changed while a sequence is being transmitted the changes will not take effect until you click the Update button If you click the Edit button in the TCM Sequence dialog the Edit TCM Sequence dialog opens This dialog allows you to insert TCM anomalies and TCM defects into the TCM sequence very easily If you want to transfer the current content of the list box to the transmitter when the Edit TCM Sequence dialog is open you must click on the Update button in the Edit TCM Sequence dialog Sequence Sequence Edit Help eon Edit Sequence E Overhead Byte 1 Binary 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010011 10010010 10010010 10010001 10010001 10010000 Default Close Fig 20 TCM Sequence dialog with Edit TCM Sequence dialog for editing the TCM sequence Virtual instruments Overhead Generator 20 20 Mainframe Version 6 Overhead Ana
212. erhead information Sec 5 Page 23 Used with SDH SONET and PDH ATM frames to G 832 34 Mbit s and 140 Mbit s Overhead Analyzer Analyzes physical frame overhead Sec 6 Page VI 27 information Used with SDH SONET and PDH ATM frames to G 832 34 Mbit s and 140 Mbit s Pointer Generator Generates SDH SONET pointers Sec 7 Page VI 32 Pointer Analyzer Analyzes SDH SONET pointers Sec 8 Page VI 35 PDH Generator Set and display physical frame overhead Sec 9 Page 38 Analyzer Used with PDH frames Performance Performance analysis to G 821 G 826 Sec 10 Page VI 40 Analysis M 2100 M 2101 and Bellcore ANSI Table VI 1 Overview of 20 virtual instruments Virtual instruments Overview VI 1 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 1 Application Manager The ANT20 Application Title gt also known as the Application Manager is the central control panel for the ANT 20 This VI has overall control of e Measurement applications e Measurement results generated using the applications e Measurement sequence Detailed information is found in part 3 Operating Fundamentals VI 2 Virtual instruments Overview 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 Signal Structure 2 1 Main window Signal Structure The Signal Structure is used to match your ANT 20 to the measurement interface of the device under test and to generate appropriate signal structures for th
213. erpreted and are also displayed in plain text SET Click on this button to open the Settings window In this window you can edit the expected values for the trace identifier path label mismatch and the 1 byte Settings Trace Identifier Expected Trace Identifier M RS TIM 0 hex value F HP TIM un 16 byte F LP TIM TB byte 16 byte Default Path Label Mismatch 12345678 Expected Value HP PLM 00000010 TUG structure Is LP PLM Default H1 Byte Expected Value Default Fig A 48 The Settings window 32 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version What happens if the generator and receiver trace identifiers do not match If the generator and receiver trace identifiers do not match a TIM alarm trace identifier mismatch will be detected This will not be indicated by the LED display on the instrument front panel The presence of the alarm can be demonstrated using the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer see figure below You can select whether an alarm is to be triggered or not in the Settings window of the Overhead Analyzer VI The condition is activated by placing an identifier in front of the trace identifier e g Anomaly Defect Analyzer gt lt View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help M Defects Anomalies Defects fA User alarm display defects
214. error TSE Bit errors of the toggle setting Default ON Dialog window for input of the following parameters Allocation Entry of path allocation in percent 96 Setting range 0 196 to 10096 Step width 0 196 Default 18 596 SES Threshold Threshold for SES count Setting range 1 to 8000 Step width 1 Default value as per G 828 depends on signal structure UAS Limit Switches and threshold for taking UAS into account in the path status VERDICT Off UAS have no influence on path status On If UAS limit exceeded path status is rated as Rejected Setting range 0 to 100000 Step width 1 Default 0 UAS Mode Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for Near and Far End Individual Separate rating of UAS for Near and Far End Global Common rating of UAS for Near and Far End The total path is unavailable as soon as one side is unavailable Default Individual SEP used in Toggle for including SEP in the verdict Verdict The measurement values are determined and displayed regardless 1 In preparation 2 Allocation indicates how many percent of the end to end target specs are to be met for the path under test to be acceptable 3 This threshold indicates the number of EB Errored Blocks required before a one second period is evaluated as SES Severely Errored Second Table TB 22 G 828 parameter settings TB 20 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version KM 3 5 ITU T
215. ertion Add gt gt 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Overhead Analyzer Overhead Generator lt lt Remove PDH Generator Analyzer Performance Analysis Pointer Analyzer Pointer Generator Cancel List box 1 available List box Vls in the application Fig 17 The Add amp Remove Instruments dialog window of the Application Manager The dialog is split into the following parts e Instruments available list box This shows all the Vis that are available depending on the selection already made All the Vis except Signal Structure are listed if the Application New command was used to open the dialog Instruments used list box This shows the VIs used for the application The Signal structure VI is shown if the Application New command was used to open the dialog Action buttons for adding and removing 1 to from an application Operating Fundamentals 21 22 m Mainframe SDH Version an SOAM ISSUE To select Vis for an application 1 Click on the first VI that you want to load from the Instruments available list box e g Anomaly Defect Analyzer The name is highlighted Click on the gt gt button Double click on the VI that you want to load e g Anomaly Defect Analyzer The item in the list will be transferred from the Instruments available list box to the Instruments used list box 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add further
216. es or for operating a DominoCOM ANT 20 from a PC over short distances A null modem cable 3 meters long with both 9 way and 25 way SUB D female connectors on each end is included The remote access software used ReachOut from Stac Electronics Inc handles hundreds of different modem types including ISDN modems and cellular modems You can even define a new modem if yours isn t listed For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide The modems should be purchased in the country where they are to be operated to conform to national regulations For ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only e PCMCIA card modems require a standardized PCMCIA system software with Card and Socket Services CardWare from Award Software Inc is included as PCMCIA system software for the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the CardWare user s manual e The CardWare software contained on the ANT 20 PCMCIA System disk is already configured for use with the 20 2 2 Items included in delivery The Remote Operation Option 3035 95 30 comprises ReachOut User s Guide ReachOut installation disks Host amp Viewer Modem amp Network 1 Node e Null modem cable 3 meters long part number K 764 For ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only e CardWare User s Manual Award Software Inc e CardWare Version 2 0 distribution disk Award Software Inc ANT 20 PCMCIA System installation disk configured CardWare 2 0 2 Remote operation
217. esponds to the voltage of your local AC power supply AC line voltage ranges AC line frequency ANT 20 100 V to 127V 50 Hz or 60 Hz lt 300 VA ANT 20E 200 V to 240 V Table G 1 AC power supply ranges for ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 3 Safety class The ANT 20 is a Safety Class 1 equipment as defined in EN 61010 1 IEC Publ 1010 1 The AC line cord supplied with the instrument contains a protective ground conductor The AC line plug may only be inserted into AC line socket outlets equipped with a protective ground contact unless the AC line circuit is specially isolated The protective ground conductor must not be interrupted either inside or outside the instrument casing A connection to measurement circuits carrying dangerous voltages is not intended If the AC line protective ground connection can be used for this purpose connect the instrument to the AC line before connecting it to the measurement circuit If the measurement circuit itself is equipped with a protective ground conductor this should be connected to the instrument casing before connecting the rest of the measurement circuit Getting Started G 1 4 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 1 4 Faults and excessive stresses If it is Suspected that the instrument is no longer safe to use it should be taken out of service and secured against unintentional operation This situation is possible if the instrument is visibly damaged the instrument does not work the i
218. f 1310 us gives a time per class of 10 us 1310 us 128 10 23 us The number of test cells whose delay lies within a class is summed and displayed as a bar If you increase the class width you automatically increase the measurement interval As a result you also automatically reduce the resolution of the histogram Use Offset to obtain the smallest possible classes when the delays are large Offset allows you to shift your measurement range But you have to estimate the expected range of your results Offset selection is not automatic Analysis The results are displayed in the form of a histogram on the Traffic Analyzer Vl There is a bar for each class that contains at least one cell Traffic Analyzer View Unit Cursor Zoom Y Scale Settings Print Help 1414141 Y Scale L06 LIN PI 0 32 View Cell Transfer Delay Fig A 110 Result display in the ATM Traffic Analyzer window 73 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Cursor read off Click the icon on the toolbar The window shown below opens and displays the numerical value indicated by the cursor Cell Transfer Delay Cursor Position Class Width 0 16 ps Class Interval 416 4 32 ps Class Index 26 Class Count 96264 Fig A 111 Cell Transfer Delay Cursor Position display window the Traffic Analyzer The cell delay variation CDV can be determined in the Cell
219. fic signal icon Anomaly D efect Insertion CTI gt Insertion View Help Defect PLCP x AlS C LOF 5 C Vx RDI C RAI C VP RDI C C AIS C YC RDI Duration continuous 7 cells repetitive single Fig A 120 Anomaly and Defect Insertion window Analysis Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI The switch should output an LCD alarm send VP RDI alarm and a VC RD alarm in the opposite direction and resynchronize 1 Open the window of the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer The VP RDI and the VC RDI alarms are clearly visible in the histogram display mode see Fig A 121 2 Open the Anomaly and Defect Insertion window and change the number 7 in the Duration field to a 6 3 Restart the measurement If the switch is functioning properly there should be no LCD alarm this time The ATM switch remains synchronized Anomaly Defect Analyzer 55 View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help EEO 982020 Anomalies Defects User C Anomalies Defects User 19 13 30 30 40 50 00 10 Date 04 09 97 Time 19 14 19 Timebase sec BIT Fig 121 Anomaly Defect Analyzer window A 80 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 25 Measuring the CLR with a variable cell rate VBR traffic Only BN 3035 90 70 25 1 Test set
220. formation see part 7 Technical Background Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 3 Performance Analysis ITU T G 821 E 521 Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform 0 821 analysis in the Performance Analysis window The ITU T G 821 analysis corresponds to Recommendation G 821 Issue date 07 95 Degraded minutes are also evaluated A multiplex factor can be taken into account during the analysis corresponding to older versions of Recommendation G 821 Annex D G 821 analysis can be performed on the following events e Bit errors TSE Test Sequence Error e FAS bit errors FAS 2 FAS 8 FAS 34 FAS 140 e CRC errors e EBIT errors The following signals can be measured when G 821 analysis is performed for test sequence errors TSE Unframed pattern without bit rate limitations N x 64 kbit s Framed patterns and bulk signals Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 to D3 and 04 to 012 in the SOH POH of SDH signals Note As the G 821 analysis uses bit error evaluation you cannot switch to block error evaluation Performance Analysis Ic x Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help 8221 G G M24 Me4 ore e e oos 99 G 821 TSE COUNT RATIO 37 3370495 X 0 21505 0 00000 DM 54 51613 0 00000 ERDICT Rejected PATH ALLOCATION 100 00000 Fig VI 35 Performance Analysis window showing ITU T G 821 analysi
221. fter selecting the VIs 24 4 Measurement Application Guide Settings ATM Signal Structure VI 1 Open the ATM Signal Structure window 2 In the Edit menu select the item ATM Structure or Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar This activates the Structure window In the SDU field click on the Testcell button 4 In the Performance Measurement field click on Error Related Performance 5 Transfer the send side settings to the receive side by clicking the Ix gt Rx button 6 Confirm your entries with OK 7 Seta load of 10 in the display window CBR icon E dit SDU Circuit Emulation Settings Cell Transfer Delay _8 Error Related Performance Fig 119 Structure dialog box in the Signal Structure window Anomaly and Defect Insertion VI Open the Anomaly and Defect Insertion window Click on the icon on the toolbar Click on the Defects icon on the toolbar Inthe field select the item LCD In the Insertion field select the item single Check that there is a 7 in the Duration field 79 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Start measurement Application Manager VI Press function key F5 Click on the green traf
222. ght hand side and along the bottom of the window These are used to scroll through the text Tip lf you reduce the size of the help window so as to display the measurement program at the same time select the Small font Options menu This makes best use of the available area of the help window Operating Fundamentals O 33 Mainframe Version 20 20 8 How to use the windows 8 1 Arranging the application windows The number of virtual instruments in your 20 depends on the hardware and software fitted VIs are included into applications that are created and managed using the Application Manager When an application is loaded all the windows for the VIs included in the application will be opened The parameters for the VIs are set using these windows and other dialog windows The dialog windows open when you click on various buttons or certain menu commands in the VI windows Tip As the display area of the screen is limited all VI windows that are not needed should be reduced to icon buttons use the Minimize button An iconized VI window can be restored to its original size at any time by clicking on the corresponding icon in the Application Manager or by clicking on the corresponding icon button in the task bar at the bottom of the screen i ANT20 Untitled Application Instruments Measurement Configure Print Help onere of busy
223. gnal definitions see ATM Signal Structure VI VI 5 Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 Mode External An externally applied signal is multiplexed into the selected PDH signal from socket Aux 10 Rx A PDH tributary is demultiplexed from the PDH signal and output to socket Aux 11 Generates cell stream in the selected signal mapping in PDH signals For further signal definitions see ATM Signal Structure Info button Press this button to display SDH or SONET signal structures conforming to the corresponding standard ITU T or ANSI that you have selected previously 6 Virtual instruments Signal Structure 20 20 2 3 Dialog Interface e Mainframe SDH Version The Interface dialog is used to configure the parameters for the Tx and Rx interfaces Tip The interfaces for Drop amp Insert mode are configured in the Aux menu Interface Tx Bit Hate Offset m B m 4 Clock Source Internal Output Unbalanced 15 Code HDB3 Level HIGH Is Laser Off Wavelength 1310 nm Scrambler On Bit Hate Input Code Sensitivity Equalizer Ref Level Descrambler Ed 2 048 Mbit s Selectable clock sources Unbalanced 14 7 Ext Data 1 5M D51 25 HDB3 ITU T Dif Input signal equalizer 20 dB
224. gnal structure set allows a far end measurement Far end evaluations can only be made if REI is available Specifications 5 23 a Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Bit errors can be evaluated for e unframed patterns e framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes 1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 through D3 and D4 through 012 in the SOH POH of SDH signals As the G 828 evaluation measures block errors bit error evaluation cannot be activated Display of defects using LED indicators also the Anomaly Defect Analyzer Summary display window CURRENT LED red is on when the defect is present HISTORY LED yellow is on if the defect occurred at least once or is active within the started measurement interval 5 5 Evaluation to ITU T G 829 ES EFS SES UAS and BBE are evaluated The SES threshold can be set as required G 829 evaluation can be performed on the following events 1 250 MS REI Bit errrors TSE Evaluation of the near end and the far end is simultaneous as soon as the signal structure set allows a far end measurement Far end evaluations can only be made if REI is available Bit errors can be evaluated for e unframed patterns e framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 through D3 and D4 through D12 in the SOH POH of SDH signals The special block error evaluation using BIP 1 blocks means that the instrument is run in bit er ror evaluation mod
225. gnal through the 20 Through mode The signal is looped through the 20 and simultaneously analyzed by the receiver EJ EJ EI E3 E3 E31 EJ EJ EJ Errry rrr Fig A 8 Monitoring using the ANT 20 in Through mode Interfaces e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 47 1550 nm 48 1310 nm A 5 ur Mainframe SDH Version eee 3 Monitoring using an optical power splitter The ANT 20 is equipped with a built in optical power splitter 90 92 90 91 10 10 10 dB 90 0 45 dB 0000000000 9 Monitoring using an optical power splitter Interfaces e Optical Power Splitter Rx 90 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 e optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx 44 A 6 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 Automatic Trouble Scan function 3 1 Test setup and description 3 1 1 In service monitoring 00000000000 Fig A 10 In service monitoring setup Interfaces see Sec 2 Page A 5 In service monitoring 3 1 2 Out of service measurement Application Guide This function allows sequential testing of all C11 or C12 channels via AU 3 or AU 4 STM 1 signal The ANT 20 receiver checks whether alarms have occurred in the input signal in the SDH structure and in the c
226. gt X mo e Table TB 3 Section Layer PM Technical Background TB 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 1 3 2 Line B2SUM Line Layer PM for Near End Table TB 4 Line Layer PM Near Line Layer PM for Far End Table TB 5 Performance Monitoring Line Layer PM Far End 3 1 3 3 STS Path STS Path Layer PM for Near End B3 21 or AIS P or LOP P B3 Bit error 2X or AIS P or LOP P Table TB 6 STS Path Layer PM Near End TB 8 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version STS Path Layer PM for Far End 21 or RDI P 827 Table TB 7 STS Path Layer PM Far End 3 1 3 4 VT Path BIP V VT Path Layer PM for Near End m p BIP V gt X or AIS V or LOP V wo jm us sesso ms eme Table TB 8 VT Path Layer PM Near End VT Path Layer PM Far End REI V X or RDI V Table TB 9 VT Path Layer PM Far End Technical Background TB 9 a Mainframe SDH Version eee 3 1 3 5 BPV DSn Performance Monitoring Line Analysis BPV gt X or LOS X DS1 1544 X DS2 6312 X DS3 44 Table TB 10 DSn Line Analysis 3 1 3 6 053 Frame 053 P Parity or DS 3 C Parity yellow DS3 Path Analysis FE Parity FEBE Tem ses pou o esas Table TB 11 053 Path Analysis FE Parity FEBE 3 1 3 7 DS1
227. gured to perform the following actions when it is switched on MS DOS 6 xx starts ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only Allnecessary DOS drivers are loaded ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only Windows starts All necessary windows drivers are loaded The ANT 20 software is loaded and started 3 3 Switching on with function key APPL pressed If you want to start the ANT 20 with the default settings and ignore the last application that was saved if problems occur with a previously saved application during boot up of the ANT 20 software 1 Press function key APPL when the welcome screen 1 displayed A dialog window opens after a few seconds 2 Click on the Yes button in the dialog window When switched on for the first time the ANT 20 screen will look like this B 20 Untitled Application Instruments Measurement Configure Print Help 20 SE Application Title Signal Structure Oe Auto Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Trigger Aux Offset Help TX Signal Structure Fig 6 ANT 20 screen display when first switched on The display initially comprises two windows or virtual instruments namely 20 lt Application Title gt e Signal Structure Operating Fundamentals 9 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 4 3 5 Further operating procedure In the following sections of part 3 the basic elements of the ANT20 lt
228. h Mode Defect generation is not possible Measurements There are no restrictions on measurements see Sec 3 2 Page S 12 Specifications 5 15 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 4 E1 to E4 signals Available with ANT 20 version 3035 01 or with ANT 20 version 3035 02 and option 3035 90 33 Test signals for bit error measurements Signal structure for all bit rates e unframed test pattern e framed test pattern Test pattern Digital WOM seen tad oa eet Od ae Kees length 16 bits Pseudo random bit sequences PRBS 11 PRBS11 invers PRBS 15 PRBS 20 PRBS 23 PRBS 23 invers Frames E1 2 048 Mbit s G 704 706 PCM 30 81 with and without CRC E2 8 448 Mbit s 742 PCM 120 34 269 MDIUS QUID T amp ences 240 PCM 480 E4 139 264 Mbit s 751 PCM 1920 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i 41 Error insertion and alarm generation TX 4 1 1 Error insertion anomalies Error insertion bit errors in test pattern TSE code errors single errors only Single or Rate Tip When Rate triggering is selected a bit error rate is inserted ae 5 140
229. h UNEQ V UNEQuipped LP FERF LO Path Remote RDI V Defect Indication LO Path RDI RDIEVP Payload Defect LO Path RDI Server RDIEVS Defect LO Path RDI RDIEVC Connectivity Defect LP FEBE LO Path Remote REI V Error Indication Alarm messages SDH SONET continued LP UNEQ VT VP UNEQuipped LP RDI VT Path YELLOW VP Remote Defect Indication VP RDI Payload Defect VP RDI Server Defect VP RDI Connectivity Defect LPRDIEP LPRDIES LPRDIEC LP REI VT Path FEBE VP Remote Error Indication Q o D 2 N SA 10 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Abbreviation Old Abbreviation Old SDH Expression SONET Expression ITU T G 707 new G 783 ANSI 1 105 BELLCORE GR 253 LP RFI LO Path Remote RFI V VP Remote Failure Failure Indication Indication PDI V VP Payload Defect Indication LP TIM LO Path Trace TIM V VP Trace Identifier Identifier Mismatch Mismatch LP PLM LP SLM LO Path Payload PLM V VP Path Label Mismatch Mismatch Table SA 7 Alarm messages SDH SONET continued 2 2 ATM Path penn wmm Ooi vens Vra cramer NS ara Virwar Pan AS smutareousy _ veno Virtua Rane RDI and apa ROI _ Table SA 8 Alarm messages Path 2 3 Virtual Concatenation DPOVC Delta Pointer Overflow Virtual Concatenation DEN Table SA 9 Alarm message Virtual Concatenation Standards Abb
230. h mm ss ms The Defaults button sets the current Windows system settings These settings are useful if for example you have installed MS Excel on your ANT 20 ANT 20E Data exported using the Defaults setting can be directly imported into MS Excel When importing to another Windows PC the default configuration can be viewed and edited by opening the window Control Panel International Windows 3 11 or the window Control Panel Regional Settings Windows95 List separator Decimal separator Export Format List Separator Decimal Separator Dot Comma Defaults Duration format 6 hh mm ss ts 1 10 sec resolution hh mm ss ss ts in seconds Cancel Time format Fig O 41 Export Format dialog Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 94 The Screen Dump print function You can print out a copy of the screen display if a printer is connected to the ANT 20 ANT 20E To print out the current screen display Press the Prt Sc key on the front of the ANT 20 ANT 20E see Fig O 1 Page O 1 keyboard area IV Operating Fundamentals 0 43 T Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 10 ANT 20 ANT 20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure 10 1 Backup data set 44 Once a measurement has started the ANT 20 ANT 20E generates set of backup once every minute
231. hae C 12 mapping C 11 mapping C 11 TU 12 mapping C2 mapping SONET sra secu VT1 5 mapping VT2 mapping VT6 mapping The test is performed within an AU SDH version or a SPE SONET version Selection of the various AUs SPEs for signals with higher bit rates is done manually During the search only the receive channels are altered The ANT 20 receiver checks the receive signal defects and those of the corresponding SDH or SONET structure and of the channel and enters the results of the single channels in a matrix Allowed for defects Defect SDH Defect SONET LOF OOF SDH LOF OOF SONET Table S 17 Defects allowed for in the Search function Specifications 5 31 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 4 Automatic Trouble Scan function The Trouble Scan function permits sequential testing of all tributary channels in an SDH or SONET signal The appropriate mapping options are needed for this SDA cur ee on ee ee erie ee eee E aet C 12 mapping C 11 mapping C 11 TU 12 mapping C2 mapping DONE USIGNals 2 23 54 bed I ums aem sme sas VT1 5 mapping VT2 mapping VT6 mapping The test is performed within an AU SDH version or a SPE SONET version Selection of the various AUs SPEs for signals with higher bit rates is done manually During the Trouble Scan only the receive channels are altered The ANT 20 receiver
232. hannels The channels are then indicated in a table as being OK or not OK After the measurement the detailed alarm status for each channel can be displayed cw Fig A 11 Out of service measurement setup Interfaces e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 7 18 7 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Schematic diagram Channels Channels Trouble 2 Scan Mode 5 m Fig A 12 Alarm status recalled Trouble Scan 3 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 13 SE SEE 8 a Fig A 13 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 3 3 Measurement 1 Click on Trouble Scan in the Auto menu in the Signal Structure window A window showing a matrix of all the channels opens 2 Click on the Start button The measurement starts Each channel is tested and marked separately The measurement stops automatically Trouble Scan Ei TUG 3 1 2 TUG 2 2 3 45 1 1 27 F F J F 2 2 F F V F F 2 F 1 30 959 2 9 2191 219 3 43 D 5 29 DL ED Fig A 14 Trouble Scan window A 8 Application Guide LEII 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3
233. he directory CAWINDOWS and ReachOut in the directory CAREACHOUT and the Microsoft TCP IP 32 and ReachOut icons are shown in the Windows Program Manager The ReachOut security options are pre configured as follows The ReachOut Password List contains an entry with the User Name ANT 20 and the accompanying password 20 The option Passwords Required is set to No For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user s guide You now have to modify the pre configured network setup to meet the specific requirements of your network Modify the C WINDOWS hosts file C WINDOWS hosts file is merely an example It must be modified to adapt to your network The hosts file must contain the IP addresses of all network nodes with which you want to communicate including the IP address of the ANT 20 itself and the IP address of the gateway if any between the ANT 20 and the controlling PC The first entry in the file is the mapping for localhost and must be left unchanged see sample hosts file C WINDOWS hosts sam Ask your network administrator for the required entries for the hosts file to adapt to your network Modify the MS TCP IP 32 configuration 1 Start or return to Windows 2 Inthe Network group in the Program Manager double click the Network Setup icon 3 Choose Drivers and select Microsoft TCP IP 32 3 116 from the list then ch
234. i 0011 001 nma Table SA 5 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations continued Recommendation Title UNI 3 1 ATM User Network Interface Specification 3 1 4 0 5 2 0 Circuit Emulation Services V2 0 Baseline Table SA 6 Overview of important ATM forum recommendations obsolete SA 8 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i 2 Alarm messages 2 1 SDH SONET Abbreviation Old Abbreviation Old Meaning SDH Expression SONET Expression ITU T G 707 new G 783 ANSI T1 105 BELLCORE GR 253 TSE BER Test Sequence TSE Test Sequence Error Bit error Error Bit error LSS NO PATT Loss of Sequence 155 Loss of Sequence Synchronization Synchronization LTI NO CLOCK Loss of incoming LTI Loss of incoming Timing Intervals Timing Intervals section error monitoring Multiplex Section Line L B2 Multiplex section B2 Line error n x 24 bits error monitoring n x 8 bits monitoring Line AIS monitoring B1 8 bits mE Regenerator B1 8 bits EN Section error MS AIS S AIS Multiplex Section AIS MS RDI MS FERF RDI L LINE FERF Line Remote Defect Indication Multiplex Section Hemote Defect Indication MS REI LINE FEBE Line Remote Error Indication Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication 6 m AU LOP AU NDF SP Loss of Pointer SP New Data Flag Loss Of AU Pointer LOP P AU Pointer NDF P New Data Flag P AIS AU AIS AIS
235. ice gt n m gt Remote Alarm Indication Remote Defect Indication STS Path RDI Connectivity Defect STS Path RDI Server Defect STS Path RDI Payload Defect VT Path RDI Connectivity Defect VT Path RDI Server Defect VT Path RDI Payload Defect RDIEPC RDIEPP RDIEPS RDIEVC RDIEVP RDIEVS RDI L Remote Defect Indication Line Remote Defect Indication Path RDI V Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication Remote Failure Indication gt Regenerator Section RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead Receiver 2 Synchronization Status Byte MSOH Synchronization Status Byte TOH SA SAAL Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer SBR Statistical Bit Rate SBW Signaling Bandwidth SCR Sustainable Cell Rate Service Affecting Failure SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SECB SEL Selector SEP Severely Errored Period Severely Errored Cell Block SES Severely Errored Second SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued Standards Abbreviations SA 19 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Abbreviation Meaning _ STM Synchronous Transfer Module Synchronous Transport Module level N 0 1 4 16 64 STS Synchronous Transport Signal STS N SVC Switched Virtual Channel Synchronous Transport Signal level N 1 3 12 48 192 Tandem Connection TC APId TC Access Point Identifier Trace Identifier TC IEC TCM
236. icular new measurement tasks arise where communications involve transfers between networks using different standards or where new technology such as ATM network elements is employed The ANT 20 is already equipped with the foundation for handling these future tasks ANT 20E The Advanced Network Tester ANT 20E E Extended is the logical further develooment of the ANT 20 All the advantages of the ANT 20 concept have been retained and allow for extended combinations of functions within a single portable instrument The ANT 20E can for example measure synchronous functions at high bit rates and also jitter simultaneously To do this the 2 5 Gbit s Module and the 2 5 Gbit s Jitter Module can be combined with the 622 Mbit s Jitter Module in the ANT 20E This eliminates the complicated and time consuming need for several different test instruments during network installation or troubleshooting The ANT 20E can make measurements on all standard electrical and optical interfaces from 2 Mbit s up to STM 64 and from DS1 up to OC 192 It can resolve signal structures up to the 10 Gbit s level and analyze them down to the lowest level Access to all standardized mappings is available both for different transmission methods GDH SONET ATM and for mixed structures e g DS1 in STM 1 The ANT 20E is equipped with a powerful operating processor and 16 MB RAM The use of the Windows95 operating system provides for extra advantages Standard software
237. ies and defects to GR 253 Bellcore is active the switch activates RDI enhanced evaluation This selection is not required for T1X1 ANSI evaluation as detection is automatic Select measurements The Select measurement dialog window opens Various measurements can be selected for 053 053 mappings Beep on Anomalies On off toggle for on Anomalies Defects Defects If the toggle is on any anomalies and or defects occurring during a measurement will be signaled by a beep 1 in preparation VI 22 Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer 20 20 5 Overhead Generator 5 1 Main window Overhead Generator Mainframe SDH Version The Overhead Generator VI is used to edit the bytes in the SOH SDH SONET and POH of the selected channel The dynamic bytes B1 B2 B3 and the pointer line cannot be edited Menu bar and toolbar 51 Overhead Generator Bilal STM N OC N channel display and selection u E Increment decrement channel Byte 1 1 1 Bin 11119110 5 1 477 Edit SCH Number of the displayed POH lee SOHN By Contiguous or virtual concatenation only 1 1 B3 fo 1050195 Binary value of selected byte H1 Y H3 H3 H3 mm 00 Be B2 B2 El 2 ETE ETE Gls EL crores nan D4 DS D6 H4 00 00 00 D7 DS Dg
238. interval LED indicator LED display for anomalies and defects DominoCOM ANT 20 only Table O 2 Control elements on the connector panel continued O 6 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Front panel LED array HISTORY LOF OOF MS AIS AIS L O MS RDVRDI L O AU LOP LOP P HP UNEQ UNEQ HP PLM PLM P B3 HP RDI RDI P TU LOM TU LOP LOP V TU AIS AIS V LP UNEQ UNEQ V LP PLM PLN V LP BIP BIP V LP RDI RDIV AIS LOF LCD LSS RDI AIS Yellow FAS CRC OOO Ou Mainframe SDH Version Loss of signal Loss of frame Out of frame Multiplexer section alarm indication signal Alarm indication signal line 1 or 2 Bit interleaved parity errors Multiplexer section remote defect indication Remote defect indication line AU Loss of pointer Loss of pointer path or AU NDF AU Alarm indication signal Alarm indication signal path High order path unequipped Unequipped path High order path path label mismatch Path label mismatch path B3 Bit interleaved parity errors High order Path remote defect indication Remote defect indication path Loss of multiframe TU Loss of pointer Loss of pointer VTor TU NDF TU Alarm indication signal Alarm indication signal VT Low order path unequipped Unequipped VT Low order path path label mismatch Path label mismatch VT Low order path bit interleaved parity errors Bit interleaved parity errors VT Low
239. inuously Inserting single anomalies As for continuous insertion above but with step 4 as follows Select the single option in the Insertion field Continue with step 5 The anomaly is inserted each time the ON button is clicked When inserting anomalies in bursty ATM traffic HUNC and HCOR anomalies can also be inserted repetitively The repetition period and the burst duration in cells can be entered for this Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Insertion VI 13 Ze Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 4 Anomaly Defect Analyzer The Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI is used to display the results obtained using the Anomaly Defect Insertion VI in four different ways 41 Display mode View Graph After the has booted up the results window for displaying the anomalies and defects as a histogram View Graph appears The alternative display modes are described in subsequent sections Menu bar and toolbar E Anomaly Defect Analyzer gt lt View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help e 11144 41 19 2121 Anomalies Anomaly and defect results overview Anomalies User Display filter Ei ia Emm Individual anomaly results C Anomalies Defects User Individual defect results Cursor 10 20 30 Date 24 02 57 Time 18 16 34 Timebase sec BIT BIT BLOCK evaluation indication Event buttons Fig VI 9 Element
240. inutes BISO 51 52 0 For meas tiemes gt 7 days BISO 1 S2 The computed values for BISO S1 and S2 for ES and SES are displayed below the result page For determining the path status the measurement results are compared with the thresholds 1 and S2 as follows Meas value ES or SES gt S2 or EFS 0 Path status rejected Meas value ES or SES between S1 and S2 Path status uncertain Meas value ES and SES lt 51 Path status accepted Meas value UAS may also be taken into account cf switch UAS limit see Tab TB 27 Technical Background TB 25 EN Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 7 ITU T M 2101 evaluation M 2101 evaluation takes the issue of Recommendation M 2101 dated 6 2000 as well as the version M 2101 1 of April 1997 into account You can switch between the two versions via a list box in the Settings menu The main differences between the Recommendation M 2101 4 1997 and the Recommendation M 2101 6 2000 concern additional measurement values as well as differences in the error performance objectives BBE Background Block Error e SEP Severely Errored Period e Performance measurement TCM bytes in preparation for ANT 20 SEP evaluation is optional in the new Recommendation M 2101 6 2000 The Settings menu therefore includes a separate switch for including or excluding SEP from the assessment verdict M 2101 evaluation can be performed on the following events B1 B2SUM MS
241. ires option 3035 90 33 3035 01 requires option 3035 90 34 depends on ANT 20 versions and options Adaptive equalizer allows gt 450 ft 728A cable DSX3 level Adaptive equalizer allows gt 655 ft 22AWG cable Table S 3 LINE input 14 signal specifications electrical Tolerance to jitter Measured using PRBS 15 gt 8 Mbit s and PRBS 23 gt 8 Mbit s with ITU T and PMP receive levels attenuated by 20 dB referred to the nominal level Jitter amplitude 1 2 fo f4 Jitter frequency Fig S 1 Relationship between jitter amplitude and jitter frequency Specifications 20 20 mus fo s fos Jo _ ses fo fe fos Jo _ mow wm _ em fo fe ems ow _ sem mus fo om ow m _ 1 3035 02 requires option 3035 90 33 2 3035 01 requires option 3035 90 34 Table S 4 ANT 20 tolerance to jitter at system bit rates LOS Loss of Signal status display LED is on if the signal input is active but no signal is present 2 2 LINE AUXILIARY signal input 12 electrical Specifications ConnectOr aaa aa aaa aaa a balanced Socket 3035 0 Lemo SA Socket 3035 02 Bantam Input impedance 2 048 a ee E EE A 120 Q 1 544 xk a Roo 1000 Max permissible frequency
242. ist boxes 35 Loading an application 25 Loss of cell delineation LCD 78 M 2100 22 M 2100 Performance analysis 40 TB 23 M 2101 22 M 2101 Performance analysis TB 26 M 2101 Version TB 28 Manually triggered measurements 45 Maximize button 20 Mean cell rate 83 Measurement duration 27 Measurement menu 0 18 Measuring 0 27 Minibar 15 Minimize button O 20 Modulation period A 52 MTIE 54 A 55 MTIE TDEV Analysis 56 MTJ Maximum Tolerable Jitter 37 MTW Maximum Tolerable Wander 58 Multiplexing structures 1 MUX Factor Performance analysis TB 13 N NFD VI 33 20 20 0 172 37 43 50 A 53 A 58 Offset VI 3 OK button 0 36 On line help 0 33 Option buttons 35 Overhead Analyzer A 29 Overhead Generator 23 A 29 P Packing G 6 Path Overhead 29 Generator Analyzer VI 38 Peak cell rate 83 Peak to peak A 74 Performance analysis VI 40 22 TB 6 Performance monitoring SONET TB 7 Periodic pointer TB 2 Phase hits 47 Physical layer 14 A 63 Pointer action generation TB 2 Pointer Analyzer VI 35 25 Pointer burst 33 3 Pointer Generator VI 32 A 25 Pointer sequence VI 33 Pointer sequenzes parameter 5 Pointer stress test A 25 Print dialog O 40 Print Header O 39 O 41 Print menu Application manager 19 O 39 Print menu Virtual instrument
243. it s STM 1 OC 1 3 1310 amp 1550 nm STM 1 4 OC 1 3 12 1310 nm O 172 Jitter Analyzer up to 155 Mbit s STM 1 4 OC 1 3 12 1550 nm O 172 Jitter Analyzer 622 Mbit s STM 1 4 OC 1 3 12 1310 amp 1550 nm O 172 Jitter Wander Generator Analyzer 2488 Mbit s STM 16 OC 48 1550 nm O 172 MTIE TDEV Analysis STM 16 OC 48 1310 nm STM 16 OC 48 1310 1550 nm switchable STM 64 OC 192 1550 nm Module for expansion slot Module for expansion slot ANT 20E only PDH functions Demux Chain x 64 k 140 M Mux Demux Chain x 64 k 140 M Mux Demux Chain M13 n x 64 053 QoS Tester for SVC and PVC Module for expansion slot Miscellaneous V 24 remote control GPIB remote control LabWindows CVI driver Remote control via modem Remote control via LAN Test Sequencer for SDH SONET ATM Fig 1 2 Additional functions available for the ANT 20 Introduction Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 ANT 20 Supremely easy to use The ANT 20 Advanced Network Tester ANT 20 combines the advantages of cost effective customized solutions with supreme ease of use in a unique way The instrument provides basic configurations which are international in scope for installation acceptance maintenance and troubleshooting Options can be added at any time to extend the facilities of the basic configuration and match the ANT 20 to new requirements The standard Windows user interface is supported by the strongly application oriented operating structu
244. itch configuration as shown above 23 2 Switch configuration 1 As shown above set up two bidirectional connections with a constant bit rate via four port modules in the ATM switch 2 Check that the switch accepts the PCR of 149 76 Mbit s 353209 cells per second e g CBR contract PCR 15 Mbit s 23 3 Application selection on the ANT 20 Vis required Signal Structure ATM Signal Structure AIM Traffic Analyzer ATM Background Generator Application Guide A 75 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig 114 SE e 10145 of o1n 00m Fig A 114 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 23 4 Measurement A 76 Example Load test on an ATM switch Settings Signal Structure and ATM Signal Structure Vis Do not change the settings of these two VIs Background Generator VI The ATM Background Generator is an independent cell generator which you can use to define your own background traffic The ATM traffic comprises one or more cell sequences 1 Activate the Background Generator VI on the Application Manager 2 Click on the New icon button in the Sequence Control field The Sequence Editor NONAME window opens At this stage you can enter settings for a sequence You can influe
245. itter gain of a regenerative repeater is below a predefined value If this is not the case jitter runaway occurs after several regenerative repeaters The jitter transfer function JTF is measured by applying a signal whose jitter is constant over frequency to the DUT The jitter amplitude is selected so that the DUT can handle it at high frequencies The Jitter Analyzer measures the resulting jitter amplitude at the output of the DUT at various TX jitter frequencies The log of the ratio gives the jitter gain or attenuation Tip For maximum measurement accuracy it is a good idea to make a calibration measurement before every JTF measurement see Fig A 62 A 43 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 14 2 Application setting Vis required Signal Structure O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 63 2 Click on the button to open the window for the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Se stopped Fig A 63 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 14 3 Measurement Settings v The O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window has been opened already 1 In the Mode menu select the JTF command or Click on the corresponding button in the tool bar 2 Select the appropriate range 1 6
246. k boooooooooo pr N DUT Fig A 85 Test setup for measuring maximum tolerable wander 12 14 44 Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx e electrical unbalanced Rx optical 52 155 622 Mbit s Rx 17 e optical 2 5 Gbit s Rx e Ref Clock in 25 18 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure e 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer TX TX TX TX 13 15 18 47 Generator synchronization input clock or data signal 2 Mbit s or 1 5 Mbit s 1 Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 86 2 Click on the JIT button to open the window for the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Fig A 86 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs A 58 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 18 3 Application Guide Settings The O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window must already be open Settings in the Interface dialog of the Signal Structure window 4 Select the Settings command from the Interface menu in the Signal Structure window The Interface dialog opens TX RX Bit Rate 155 520 Mbit s Bit Rate 155 520 Mbit s Offset 0 000 Source Ext Clock 2M E1 25 Internal Ext Data 2 1 2
247. k on the Close button to close the window and exit from the application The button corresponds to the menu command Application Exit 20 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 5 Creating saving and loading applications An application is created in three steps e Select the virtual instruments for the application e Set the signal structure e Save the application 5 11 Selecting the virtual instruments for an application The virtual instruments to be used for an application are selected in the Add amp Remove Instruments dialog of the Application Manager see Fig O 17 There are two basic ways to set up an application You can create a new application by modifying an existing selection To do this call up the Add amp Remove Instruments dialog directly by clicking on the icon button shown above You can create a new application without reference to a previous selection To do this call up the Add amp Remove Instruments dialog using the Application New command This removes all the currently loaded Vis and loads the default settings Add amp Remove dialog when ATM options are fitted Add amp Remove Instruments x Select the instruments that you want to use in your new measurement application Add and Remove Instruments available Instruments used buttons Anomaly Defect Analyzer Signal Structure Anomaly Defect Ins
248. king G 6 Mainframe SDH Version VBR A 82 VBR traffic 81 Ventilation G 7 Versacon inserts 2 Virtual instruments 14 1 parameters A 72 W Wander A 53 A 55 Wander analysis MTIE TDEV A 55 Wander Generator A 50 Wander modulation period A 52 ANT 20 ANT 20E
249. l and subtracted from the SES total UAS is retracted when 10 consecutive seconds without SES occur These 10 seconds are subtracted from the UAS total No ES SES and SEFS are counted during UAS Table TB 1 ANSI BELL evaluation results The absolute and percentage values of the results are displayed These rules apply The percentages quoted for ES SES SEFS and EFS refer to the available time i e the measurement time less UAS The percentage quoted for UAS refers to the total measurement time ES including SES SEFS EFS 100 available time ES including SES SEFS EFS UAS total measurement time Far End evaluation is interrupted if certain alarms occur e g LOS LOF or AIS These alarm times are removed from the reference value for calculating the ratio at the Far end TB 6 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 1 2 ANSI BELL parameter settings If evaluation is selected the following parameters are used e Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation see Sec 3 1 3 For ANSI BELL evaluation no function Table TB 2 parameters 3 1 3 Measurement point SONET Performance Monitoring PM The menu Hierarchy can be used for selecting the following Measurement points 3 1 3 1 Section 1 Section Layer PM Sus m jmmeewms __ SEF or B1 Bit error
250. lay resolution The selected time segment is automatically transferred to the Table display when you select this View mode Other results are shown in the windows of other VIs Tip More information on the Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI is found in Part 4 Section 4 or in the on line help for the window 32 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 7 On line help On line help is available for each window The on line help function provides information about a particular task function command or parameter 7 1 Calling up on line help To call up the on line help function Press function key F1 or Select the Contents command from the Help menu or Click on in the toolbar Help Using Help Contents Show Error Window Abaut Fig 32 Commands and keys for calling up on line help 7 2 Calling up a help topic Click on the terms underlined in green in the text on which you require more information Click on the context sensitive areas of the figures when this feature is indicated 7 3 Setting the size of the help window When on line help is called up the help window fills the entire display area You can reduce the size of the window and move its position on the display as required If you make the help window very small part of the text may be obscured If this is so scrollbars appear down the ri
251. le TB 4 2 4 86 4 sequence with missing pointer TB 4 2 5 Setting a new pointer TB 4 2 6 Pointer sequences TB 5 Performance 15 TB 6 3 1 ANSI BELL TB 6 3 1 1 ANSI BELL TB 6 3 1 2 ANSI BELL parameter 5 TB 7 3 1 3 Measurement point SONET Performance Monitoring TB 7 TET TB 7 3 1 3 2 Line 250 TB 8 8 3134 VI Path BIP V 2 4255 52264 9 DPV teased eRe eee 10 3 1 3 6 053 Frame 053 or DS C Parity 10 3 1 3 7 051 Frame or 051 6 10 3 1 3 8 5 11 Mainframe SDH Version 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 4 1 3 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 2 1 3 6 2 2 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 2 1 3 7 2 2 3 7 2 3 3 7 2 4 3 7 2 5 20 20 ITU T 6 821 evaluation 12 20921 ee 12 G 821 parameter settings
252. ll be interrupted by certain alarms such as LOS LOF or AIS These alarm times are excluded from the reference value for the rate computation at the far end M 2101 evaluation on bit errors TSE M 2101 evaluation on bit errors TSE can be performed on the following signals e Unframed patterns without bit rate limitation e Framed patterns and bulk signals e Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 through and D4 through D12 in the SOH POH of SDH signals Note Since M 2101 evaluation is a block error evaluation it is not possible to switch to bit error evaluation with the exception of B2SUM BIP 1 blocks are used for this evaluation which are only accessible via the bit error measurement function For this reason you cannot switch to block error evaluation when performing M 2101 evaluation on B2SUM Further information see part 7 Technical Background Virtual instruments Performance Analysis Application Guide 20 20 Contents Mainframe SDH Version T Nx Application Guide 1 PPP 1 1 1 The Application Manager 1 1 2 Signal In Service 0 5 Automatic Trouble Scan function A 7 3 1 Test setup and description 7 3 1 1 In service 0 7 3 1 2
253. lter Jitter Pointer Increment Bit ICD International Code Designator Initial Domain Identifier IEC Incoming Error Count IDLE Idle Cells INC Increment Integrated Services Digital Network ISM In Service Measurement J JO Regenerator Section Trace RSOH Section Trace TOH J1 Path Trace POH in VC 3 4 STS Path Trace POH J2 Path Trace POH in VC 1 2 VT Path Trace POH K1 K2 Automatic Protection Switching APS signalling channel MSOH Automatic Protection Switching APS signalling channel TOH Automatic Protection Switching APS signalling channel POH L Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued SA 16 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i Abbreviation Meaning O Low pass Filter Jitter VI Loss of Performance Access Capability for Tandem Connection Loss of Tandem Connection Loss of all Incoming Timing references MS REI byte MSOH MS REI byte TOH Maintenance Adaption byte G 832 gt 5 Maximum Burst Size MDEV F Modified Allan Deviation m Multiframe Error gt Multiplexer Section MS AIS Multiplexer Section AIS MSB Most Significant Bit MSOH MTBF MTIE Multiplexer Section Overhead Mean Time Between Failures Maximum Time Interval Error Maximum Tolerable Jitter MUX Multiplexer N1 2 Network operator bytes POH for Tandem Connection Monitoring TCM NCC Non C
254. ltiple pointers with different polarity 2 1 3 Double pointer Add INC DEC Y Condition T4 n x T2 gt 4 gt 3 2 11111 Fig 5 pointers with different polarity e g T4 5 x T2 TB 2 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 2 1 4 Messing pointer Cancel INC DEC Condition TA nxT2 T4 EIS lt gt Fig TB 6 Periodic pointers with one missing pointer e g 4 5 x T2 2 2 Pointer burst with missing pointers INC or DEC with Cancel INC DEC Condition 4 gt gt nxT2 T4 ac H D 5 5 HO HH HE Ps ill 2 Fig TB 7 Pointer burst with missing pointers 2 3 Standard sequence 2 3 1 87 3 sequence T4 87 pointer actions 4 gt 12 3 x no pointer action Fig TB 8 87 3 sequence Technical Background TB 3 Mainframe SDH Version an 2 3 2 43 44 sequence with double pointer T4 A 43 pointer actions 44 pointer action lt 2 T3 3 x no pointer action Fig TB 9 48 44 sequence with double pointer 2 4 86 4 sequence with missing pointer T4 86 pointer actions 2 4 x no pointer action Fig 10 86 4 sequence with missing pointer 2 5 Setting a new pointer Setting a new pointer is executed with or without NDF Pointer ranges POMC ssp caram odd Sed nnii ot COREE
255. lyzer 6 1 Main window Overhead Analyzer The Overhead Analyzer VI is used to display the contents of the SDH SONET and overhead bytes of the received channel Menu bar and toolbar EA Overhead Analyzer OR gt lt Interpreter Settings Help se Byte 1 1 1 00000000 50 1 a STM N OC N channel display and selection Increment decrement channel LL Number of the displayed HH an dod concatenation only p 58 os oem joo on 20 Binary value of selected byte m Be c2 N2 au 02 00 F R H3 H3 m Ka 68 9 a 91 Ice 00 mm m Pss s P s eR 51 41 71 Z2 72 1 Hi Bo c fa as 100 foo foo oo Location of selected byte in SOH row column channel Fig VI 21 Elements of the Overhead Analyzer main window Menu Icon button Function Type Byte Select individual byte analysis Trace Identifier Display of bytes JO J1 J2 rn Em I Capture function for recording selected bytes Test Pattern Byte Display test pattern in individual bytes Test Pattern Group Display test pattern in byte groups e g D1 to D4 External Byte Outputs a byte to socket 21 External Group Outputs a byte group to socket 21 Eh TCH Switch on TCM evaluation Tandem Connection Monitoring Only possible if one of the bytes
256. m Table S 22 Specifications for reference clock signals SONET Version BN 3035 02 Bantam Input impedance 1100 Max permitted peak input 6 V 2 048 Mbits HDB3 3 0 V 1096 DO 000 10 ppm 2 048 MHz Clock 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp 10 ppm 1 544 Mbit s 875 3 0 V 10 10 ppm 1 544 MHz Clock 1 Vpp to 5 Vpp 10 ppm Table S 23 Specifications for reference clock signals Loss of Timing Interval status display The LED is on when TX clock generation 1 set to Derived from reference clock 25 and no clock or signal is present The LED is also on if the clock or signal has a frequency offset of more than 10 ppm trigger threshold is between 10 and 30 ppm 74 CLOCK 22 Clock output with unjittered TX clock SOCKEL eos CHEE hE Reeds ee kde hee oe ha wee BNC Bit rate 1 544 MHZ to 155 52 MHz at STM 4 OC 12 STM 16 OC 48 5 64 192 155 52 MHz OUTWIT MMP CO ANC approx 10 Q Pulse cc ees gt 400 mV into 75 AC coupled Max permitted peak applied 6V 5 38 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 8 Built in operation and control computer
257. me 13 33 13 Timebase sec Bokx Fig 53 The Anomaly Defect Insertion and Anomaly Defect Analyzer windows Stop the measurement by pressing function key F6 A 36 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 12 Maximum Tolerable Jitter MTJ 823 G 825 G 958 0 172 12 1 Test setup and description DUT boooooooooo pr ry Fig 54 measurements setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 Tx 47 The measurement is used to check the maximum tolerable jitter of the electrical and optical line and tributary inputs When a sine wave modulation signal is used with a pseudorandom sequence as the test pattern at a given frequency the amplitude of the jitter signals is increased using a half interval progression until errors occur at the output of the device under test 12 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure e 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer 1 Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 55 2 Click on the button to open the window for the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer Fig A 55 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Applica
258. ment 1 Open the Measurement Settings dialog see Fig O 25 2 Select Timer start mode 3 Enter the desired start date in the MM DD YY boxes or Click on the Current Date button if you want the measurement to start today Enter the desired start time in the hh mm ss boxes Enter the measurement time in the Gate Time box The measurement stops after this time 6 Click the button to confirm your entries The measurement will start at the pre selected time The measurement will stop as soon as the pre set gate time has elapsed Measurement Settings Ed Start Mode Manual Timer Start Time HH DD YT hh mm ss E Curent Date a Gate Time Interm Time m Fig O 30 Settings Start mode Timer Start Time and Gate Time 30 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 6 3 Displaying results e g anomalies The results are displayed by various virtual instruments see Analyzer VIs in Part 4 The Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI is used here as an example This instrument displays the intermediate and final results of measurements of anomalies or defects Click on the above icon for this VI in the Application Manager The Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI is placed on top Select display mode E Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter Zoom Help Histogram Graph User EH
259. mine the signal structure Detailed matching to the signal contents can be made manually if required Autoconfiguration Type of input level Level from protected monitor points PMP Standard input level Protected Monitor Point Protocol STH 0 electrical 5T5 1 STH 4 optical or OC 12 Zh or El framed bal 2 ar E1 framed unbal Check Payload Search protocol search criteria Result Interface 2 El unbalanced 14 Payload 2 or E1 framed Signal structure detected RX side interface parameters Payload Status Autoconfiguration successful Start Cancel Autoconfiguration status message successful Signal structure clearly recognized uncertain Signal structure not clearly recognized failed No meaningful signal structure recognized Fig VI 5 Autoconfiguration dialog Basic procedure 1 Select the type of input level ITU T or PMP 2 Click the Start button to start the search The Rx signal is checked for its system bit rate line code pattern and signal level If the search is successful the Result will display the signal structure that was detected 3 To configure the receiver to the detected signal structure click the OK button Only one channel is considered in the signal structure hierarchy in each case Status message Autoconfiguration uncertain 1 Click the Start button The search is triggered
260. modified to adapt to your network The hosts file must contain the IP addresses of all network nodes with which you want to communicate including the IP address of the ANT 20 itself and the IP address of the gateway if any between the ANT 20 and the controlling PC The first entry in the file is the mapping for localhost and must be left unchanged see sample hosts file C WINDOWSI hosts sam Ask your network administrator for the required entries for the hosts file to adapt to your network Configure the network setup 1 Start or return to Windows95 2 Click the Windows95 Start button choose Settings and then choose Control Panel In the Control Panel window double click the Network icon 3 In the Configuration tab of the Network window click Add In the Select Network Component Type window double click Protocol 5 In the Manufacturers list of the Select Network Protocol window click on Microsoft and in the Network Protocols list click on Confirm with OK 6 Back in the Configuration tab of the Network window remove all other protocol entries except TCP IP from the list and then double click on TCP IP 7 Inthe IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties window choose Specify an IP address and set the IP Address of the ANT 20 and the Subnet Mask In the Gateway tab of the TCP IP Properties window type the address of the default gateway int
261. n A 43 14 2 Application 0 A 44 14 3 44 20 20 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Phase Hit 47 15 1 Test setup and description A 47 19 2 Application 0 A 47 15 3 Measurement 48 Wander Generator A 50 16 1 Test setup and description A 50 16 2 Application 0 A 50 16 3 Measurement A 51 Wander Analysis to 2 5 6 A 53 17 1 Test setup and description A 53 17 2 Application 0 A 54 17 3 Measurement A 54 Maximum Tolerable Wander MTW A 58 18 1 Test setup and description A 58 18 2 Application 05 A 58 18 3 Measurement A 59 Consecutive Identical Digit CID Test to G 03 Appendix A 61 19 1 Test setup and description A 61 Setting the ATM signal structure
262. n 1530 33 nm and 1560 61mm 10 43 692 oi SCR de en Gen wean ek ore FRR BN 3035 90 38 OC 48c STM 16c Bit Error Tester Bulk requires Optical Module BN 3035 90 46 90 47 or 90 48 BN 3035 90 93 Optical test adapters ST Type BN 2060 00 32 5 10 HFS 13 A Diamond BN 2060 00 34 5 10 HFS 13 BN 2060 00 35 KEYED with anti twist device BN 2060 00 37 eaen cere os etree eee ers E ee ere wh rg wy nice aeons eae BN 2060 00 40 RETI BN 2060 00 50 PC FCO INT a ee 2060 00 51 oC oG PO NTI 2060 00 58 E 2000 Diamond E OR ded m e dens BN 2060 00 61 Wavetek Wandel Goltermann can supply a wide selection of optical power level meters sources attenuators and accessories Please ask your local sales office for information 5 48 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 0 172 Jitter and wander O 172 Jitter Generator up to 155 BN 3035 90 81 O 172 Jitter Meter up to 155 BN 3035 90 82 O 172 Jitter Generator 622 Mbit s requires BN 3035 90 81
263. n error rate SES Severely Errored Severely errored seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds Unavailable Unavailable seconds as a count and as an error rate Seconds VERDICT Accepted Uncertain Rejected Overall assessment of the path quality ALLOCATION EI Path allocation setting BISO ES ES S1 Threshold values calculated internally ES S2 BISO SES SES S1 Threshold values calculated internally SES S2 Table TB 26 M 2100 evaluation results Technical Background TB 23 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 6 2 2100 parameter settings If M 2100 evaluation is selected the following parameters are used Hierarchy Select measurement point and hence the events used to perform the evaluation PDH 140 Mb FAS140 bit error PDH 34 Mb 534 bit error PDH 8 Mb FASS bit error PDH 2 Mb CRC4 CRC4 word error PDH 2 Mb FAS FAS2 bit error DS3 P Bit Error DS3 FAS45 bit error DS1 CRC6 word error DS1 FAS1 5 bit error TSE bit error Dialog window for input of the following parameters Allocation Entry of path allocation in percent Setting range 0 1 to 100 Step width 0 1 Default 100 BISO Multiplier Weighting factor for 04 Setting range 0 1 to 100 Step width 0 1 Default 1 0 UAS Limit Switches and threshold for taking UAS into account in the path status VERDICT Off UAS have no influence on path status On If UAS limit exceeded path status is rated as Rejected Set
264. n key F1 see sec 7 Page 33 20 and ANT 20E differ in the operating systems that they use The ANT 20 series A through W uses Windows for Workgroups 3 11 The ANT 20 from series X and ANT 20E use Windows95 All the screen shots illustrated in this operating manual are taken from the Windows 95 environment They are practically identical with the Windows3 11 displays Where the ANT 20 differs from the ANT 20E this is indicated separately 3 Switching on the 20 20 Before switching the instrument on observe the following precautions e The instrument must not be damaged in any way that would affect safe operation e The instrument must not be switched on if condensation 1 present e The local line voltage and frequency must match the line voltage and frequency ranges of the ANT 20 ANT 20E e The protective ground conductor must be properly connected 3 1 Connecting up 1 Connect the ANT 20 ANT 20E a c line input to the local a c power supply using the line cord supplied with the instrument 2 Connect the signal output 14 and signal input 15 together with a screened coaxial cable 3 2 Switching on Switch on the ANT 20 ANT 20E by setting the POWER switch to the I position 8 Operating Fundamentals II 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 21 After switching 20 20 is factory confi
265. n of typical test cases with loop measurements between the generator and receiver ofthe ANT 20 You may change the individual parameters in a test case by double clicking on the appropriate line in the display The sequence can be edited from the SEQUENCE EDIT SEQUENCE menu You can also create your own test sequence using the demo Use the test cases provided by Wavetek Wandel Goltermann as templates This test sequence cannot be saved for subsequent use We hope you find the demo useful If you want to know more about the ANT 20 Test Sequencer and the CATS product range please contact your local Wavetek Wandel Goltermann sales engineer you have questions suggestions regarding this demo please contact Walter Besse at Email walter besse wwgsolutions com or FAX 49 7121 862 054 c o Walter Besse Introduction Getting Started Operating Fundamentals Virtual Instruments Application Guide Standards Abbreviations Technical Background Maintenance Remote Operation Specifications Index 10 11 12 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Contents Introduction 1 The 20 ANT 20E 1 1 2 20 easy to 1 4 Getting Started 1 O FP Safety G 1 Packing and unpacking
266. n the first page only Bitmap file name Select directory for bitmap Print Headers Company Logo Cancel M Header Text Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Test Report Header Test 1 5 Inventory no of instrument Customer HyperNet Customer name Dee Test object description Teatar Nasa Tester s names I7 Date Sign Date signature Print Signal Structure on First Page omment tex 1 Selection from the last The checked items are printed out ES Fig O 37 The Print Headers dialog Operating Fundamentals O 39 d Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 9 3 The Print menu Virtual instruments 9 3 1 9 3 1 1 O 40 The Print menu in each virtual instrument allows you to print out or export the results for the virtual instrument for further processing using other programs Print Print Headers Printer Setup Export Export Setup Fig 38 The Print menu Virtual instruments Printing results The results are output to the default printer 1 Select the Print command in the Print menu The Print dialog opens see Sec 9 3 1 1 2 Click on action button Headers The Print Headers dialog opens see Sec 9 3 1 2 If Check off the elements that are to be printed If Select the additional information you require from the list boxes If Enter a comment in
267. nad defect emote defect S1 Sync Status 0000 Quality Unknown C2 V5 byte Remote server defect TUG Structure Hemote connectivity defect HP Path Label C2 00000010 TUG Structure IT Locked TU Remote defect Asynchronous 34M 45H LP Path Label E275 Asynchronous Asynchronous 140K ATH Mapping Default Cancel Fig VI 17 Descriptor dialog with SOH POH bytes for plain text input 5 5 Dialog Background POH This button opens the Background POH dialog The button is only active if option BN 3035 90 92 is fitted and Virtual Concatenation signal structure is selected Background POH Ea Fixed Byte Cancel Fig VI 18 Background dialog Same as Channel 1 2 through 4 are filled with the same content as POH 1 Fixed Bytes POH 2 through 4 are filled with a fixed value Virtual instruments Overhead Generator VI 25 Mainframe Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Q 5 6 VI 26 Dialog TCM Sequence The button is only active if of the bytes 1 2 76 is marked the overhead matrix POH The TCM Sequence dialog and the Keyboard dialog open when you click on the TCM button TCM stands for Tandem Connection Monitoring You can edit the 76 byte TCM sequence for the TCM bytes 1 and 2 Z6 using the Keyboard dialog TCM Sequence Sequence Edit Help Ov
268. nce the contents of the header field of the ATM cells by doing so Note that there are reserved values for VCI VPI 3 Enter the following parameters in the Sequence field Number of cell repetitions Number of subsequent empty cells per sequence Number of sequence repetitions 4 Confirm your entries with OK You will now be asked to assign a name to the sequence e g test1 The name is displayed in the Cell Sequence list in the main window Sequence Editor Header Sequence Edit C Hex Der Cell repetition View As UNI CNNI post Cell idle 0 GFC 0 PI 0 Sequence repetition 0 Payload PT m CLF m Payload fill byte jo hex GFC Range 0 15 Cancel Fig A 115 Sequence Editor dialog box the Background Generator window Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version Generating further For this measurement you require a total of 9 sequences with different VCI VPI values In this way you create 9 different virtual channels 1 Click on the New button 2 Repeat the sequence generation procedure 1 to 4 on the previous page see Sequence Editor Defining and activating background traffic Define the background traffic by inserting the generated sequences in the Cell Sequence list into the Transmit List see
269. nd Overhead Analyzer buttons to activate both windows Ey Stopped WEIN Fig A 44 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Application Guide A 29 Mainframe SDH Version au Jan 10 3 Measurement Editing an overhead byte aF Overhead Generator Edit Type Descriptor Keyboard Help T sa BEE ros Byte 1 1 1 11110110 sonei Al 1 Al 2 PR 2 10 28 28 28 01 mim 97 Se H3 H3 xx xx xx xx xx B2 Be El xx xx xx 00 Fig 45 Overhead Generator window The SOH and POH bytes for the selected channel are displayed This tool can be used to change the overhead bytes to suit your requirements The following bytes are excluded A1 and A2 STM 16 only B1 to and H1 to H4 The first row of the matrix shows the byte name The hexadecimal value of the byte is shown in the next row Other abbreviations XX Byte cannot be overwritten SQ Shown in the H4 byte field if a sequence 1 present Test pattern EX External access to V 11 Trace identifier RX Receiver Some or all of these abbreviations are also found in the toolbar Editing the overhead bytes 1 First select a byte by clicking on it or Mark it using the cursor buttons 2 Click on the selected field a second time to open the Edit Overhead Byte
270. nd the traffic signal button changes to a green light The Application Manager status display changes from lt Running gt to lt Stopped gt Operating Fundamentals 29 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 6 2 2 Starting a measurement manually and stopping automatically Measurements can be controlled semi automatically Starting is manual the measurement is stopped automatically as soon as the measurement time interval has elapsed Controlling the measurement 1 Open the Measurement Settings dialog see Fig O 25 2 Enter the desired timing for the measurement in the Gate Time box e g 60 seconds 3 Click the OK button to confirm the settings Measurement Settings Ed Start Mode Manual C Timer Start Time HH DD hh mm ss Lurrent Date Gate Time Interm Time Fig O 29 Setting the start mode Timer 4 Click on the green light to start the measurement The measurement starts and the traffic signal icon changes to a red light The measurement stops automatically when the set gate time has elapsed 6 2 3 Starting and stopping a measurement automatically timer Measurements can also take place fully automatically by programming the start time and stop time The start time is specified as an absolute time date and time The stop time is a relative time determined by the measurement time or Gate Time Controlling the measure
271. ndication Virtual Path Remote Defect Indication Virtual Path Identifier wm waemms 00000000 Von vn Virtual Tributary Wait to Restore Spare byte RSOH Network operator byte POB for Tandem Connection Monitoring TCM Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued Standards Abbreviations SA 21 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes SA 22 Standards Abbreviations Technical Background 20 20 Contents Mainframe SDH Version i Technical Background 1 Multiplexing structures TB 1 1 1 SDH Multiplexing Structure ITU T G 707 TB 1 1 2 SONET Multiplexing Structure ANSI 1 105 1995 TB 1 Pointer action generation TB 2 2 1 Periodic TB 2 2 1 1 Identical polarity INC or TB 2 2 1 2 Different polarity INC DEC TB 2 2 1 3 Double pointer Add INC TB 2 2 1 4 Messing pointer Cancel INC DEC 3 2 2 Pointer burst with missing pointers INC or DEC with Cancel INC TB 3 2 3 Standard TB 3 2 3 1 87 3 sequence 3 2 3 2 43 44 sequence with doub
272. ngs by clicking on the button The display area shows the new signal structure Signal Structure ie es Auto Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Trigger Aux Offset Help Tx Rx 4 1 STM AU DUT electrical electrical Fig A 94 Physical layer signal structure Signal Structure Setting the ATM AAL layers ATM Signal Structure The ATM Signal Structure window is activated The display area shows the current ATM signal structure 1 Select ATM Signal Structure from the Edit menu Click on the corresponding icon in the toolbar The ATM Structure dialog opens see Fig A 95 Edit 500 Circuit Emulation settings Testcell Performance Measurement Cell Transfer Dela Error Related Performance Cancel Fig 95 Structure dialog Signal Structure Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version 2 Select the SDU to be transmitted and received in the test channel Testcell Test cells to 191 AAL 0 PRBS or DW in cell payload AAL 1 PRBS or DW as AAL 1 PDU 3 Select the Performance Measurement to be used Cell Transfer Delay Results shown in ATM Traffic Analyzer and Error Related Performance Results shown in Anomaly and Defect Analyzer 4 Confirm your settings by clicking on the OK button The ATM Structure
273. nibar toggle Fig O 8 The ANT20 lt Application Title gt window normal size 4 2 1 Minibar Application Manager reduced form The Toolbar includes the main functions of the Application Manager and corresponds to the reduced form of the Application Manager window also called Minibar You still have instant access to the central control and management functions of the ANT 20 from this Minibar You can configure it so that it is always on top never hidden by other windows 4 2 1 1 Displaying virtual instruments Next to the toggle button there is an arrow button which is used to select the virtual instruments for an application Add amp Remove The example shows an application with three virtual instruments To enter parameters or read the results in a particular simply click on the corresponding icon button in the Minibar The corresponding window will then be placed on top This gives you instant access to every window in an application even if some windows are concealed by others or have been reduced to icons see Fig 33 4 2 1 2 Starting and stopping a measurement Measurements are started and stopped using the traffic signal icon button The progress of the measurement can be monitored in the adjacent display fields These show the status of the measurement and the elapsed measurement time as well as the set measurement time Operating Fundamentals 15 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20
274. nique in the network and the User Confirm with 19 Back in the Windows Setup dialog box remove the installation disk from drive A and choose Restart Computer After this installation procedure NE2000 compatible driver is installed It is not therefore necessary to install the driver supplied together with the SCM Ethernet LAN card Select the startup mode When using the ANT 20 in remote operating mode it is not normally desirable to receive a log on request during startup When using a DominoCOM 20 it is essential that the log on request is disabled To disable the log on request Start or return to Windows In the Main group in the Program Manager double click the Control Panel icon Choose Network and then select Startup Deactivate Log On at Startup and confirm with OK Confirm with Verify the network installation 1 To test the installations of CardWare and SCM Ethernet LAN card insert the 20 TCP IP Interface installation disk into drive A and execute from MS DOS ANNETWARENODNSI and then execute A NETWARE ODI ne2000 successful the ANT 20 displays the Ethernet address of the SCM Ethernet LAN card Node Address and the assigned I O Base Port and Interrupt Request IRQ 2 Test the connection to the controlling PC Start or return to Windows In the Main group in the
275. nomaly CODE FAS LP REI Insertion Hate continuous 1E 6 F single C bursts static Fig A 29 Anomaly Defect Insertion window 1 Select Anomalies and SDH in the View menu or Click on the corresponding buttons in the toolbar 2 Select the item B2 from the Anomaly list box Click on continuous in the Insertion box and select the appropriate rate from the selection box 4 Click on the ON button in the toolbar or Press function key F7 Insertion of the anomaly is now activated Starting the measurement Application Manager VI Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 Click on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager A 18 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Error analysis The signal and the reaction ofthe DUT are monitored using the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer You can choose between four different types of result display Histogram Graph The error rate is shown in the Anomalies box by clicking on the B2 button Anomaly Defect Analyzer View Settings Cursor Filter zoom Help i Defects Anomalies C Defects User C Anomalies Defects User 5 40 31 30 30 40 l 00 10 Date 05 09 97 Time 10 32 71 Timebase sec BIT Fig A 30 Histogram display Table This displ
276. ns The following virtual instruments allow printout of results Anomaly Defect Analyzer Pointer Analyzer Performance Analysis ATM Traffic Analyzer options BN 3035 90 70 through 90 77 Jitter Generator Analyzer options BN 3035 90 60 through 90 69 ATM Test Results option BN 3035 90 80 ATM Test Control option BN 3035 90 80 Operating Fundamentals 37 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 9 1 Installing a printer If the driver for the printer that you want to use is not yet installed on the ANT 20 ANT 20E you must install the driver first You can install the driver from Windows 3 11 Windows95 if it is included in these programs The printer drivers are located in directory CAWFWS311 Windows 3 11 or CAWIN95 SUP Windows 95 We recommend that you install the driver supplied with your printer or a newer version if this is available The latest version of the driver can usually be downloaded from the printer manufacturer s Internet home page Installing printer drivers on the ANT 20 Windows 3 11 1 Open the Control Panel window from the Main program group in the Windows Program Manager 2 Click on the Printers icon in this window 3 Install the printer driver using the Add gt gt button Installing printer drivers on the ANT 20 ANT 20E Windows 95 1 Double click on the My Computer icon on the Desktop The My Computer window opens 2 Double click on the Printer directory The Printer
277. nstrument is exposed to stresses of any kind which are outside the permitted limits the instrument has been stored for a long period under unsuitable conditions or handled roughly during transport see Sec 2 Page G 6 In such cases contact your nearest Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center The addresses are listed at the end of this operating manual 1 5 Repair and maintenance instructions If the covers are removed or parts of the instrument are manipulated using tools it is possible that other parts carrying dangerous voltages may be exposed The connectors may also be live For this reason the instrument must be disconnected from all voltage sources before it is opened Simply switching it off using the AC line switch is not sufficient Capacitors in the instrument may retain a charge even long after the instrument has been disconnected from all voltage sources If subsequent calibration maintenance or repair of the opened instrument under voltage becomes necessary such work should only be performed by trained persons familiar with the risks involved Repairs Repairs must be carried out by trained persons The constructional features of the instrument must not be altered in any way which might adversely affect the safety characteristics of the instrument In particular creepage and air paths and the insulation spacing must not be reduced Wherever possible use only original spare parts for replacement Other parts may only b
278. nt out of Delta Pointer measurement values Export Setup Set the list and decimal separators and the time format for the export file CSV settings selected Semicolon period dot and hh mm ss respectively Virtual instruments Pointer Analyzer VI 37 Mainframe Version 9 Generator Analyzer 9 1 9 2 38 Main window Generator Analyzer ANT 20 ANT 20E The Generator Analyzer is used to set and analyze selected parameters of framed PDH signals Generator 2 Analyzer Menu bar Default Idle FE amp CLoopcode Help TX Input 140 Mbit s Bits 13 to 16 D NYT 111 34 Mbit s Bits 11 to 12 0 N 0 1 8 Bits 11 to 12 D 0 1 2 NFAS A Bit TX parameters Frame bits NFAS Sa Bit Position 584 7 NFAS Sa Bit Pattern 11111111 Sa bits Timeslots Offset of the tributary 00001011 11011101 516 Frame 0 516 Frame 1 516 Frames 2 to 15 11011101 Offset 34 Mbit s ppm Fig VI 31 Menu Function Default Idle Feac Loopcode PII E3 140 Mbit s Bits 13 to 16 0 NYY 34 Mbit s Bits 11 to 12 DN Mbit s Bits 11 to 12 DN 2 Mbit s Display parameters Frame bits Bits Sa4 to Sa8 Offsets 140 Mbit s ppm 34 Mbit s ppm l Tributary offsets Mbit s ppm 2 Mbit s ppm Elements of the PDH Generator Analyzer main window Set
279. o the dialog box New gateway then click Add Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network Confirm with 8 Back in the Network window choose Identification tab and then set Computer Name must be unique in the network Workgroup etc to suit your requirements Confirm with 9 Reboot the ANT 20 now RO 13 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Select the startup mode When using the ANT 20 in remote operating mode it is not normally desirable to receive a log on request during startup When using a DominoCOM 20 it is essential that the log on request is disabled To disable the log on request 1 Start or return to Windows95 2 Click the Windows95 Start button choose Settings and then choose Control Panel In the Control Panel window double click the Network icon 3 In the Configuration tab of the Network window select Windows Logon in the Primary Network Logon list and confirm with OK 4 Reboot the ANT 20 now Verify the network installation Test the connection to the controlling PC 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Click the Windows 95 Start button choose Programs and then choose MS DOS Prompt 3 Execute C ping lt ip address gt where lt ip_address gt is the IP address of the controlling PC If no connection can be established e
280. on VI is used to insert anomalies errors and defects alarms into signals of synchronous SDH SONET plesiochronous PDH and asynchronous ATM communications systems After the VI has booted up the Anomaly Defect Insertion window appears Menu bar and toolbar Anomaly entry Menu bar and toolbar Defect entry Ed Anomaly Jefect Insertion ES Insertion Help Efon n a HP REI continuous C single C bursts static Ed Anomaly Defect Insertion ME E C HP UNEQ C LP UNEQ 51 5 HP PLM LP PLM C 5 HP TIM CLP TIM C 5 5 CHP RDI LP RDI C MS RDI C TU LOM LP RFI C AU LOP TU LOP C 15 C TU AIS Insertion Dynamic defects Fig 1 8 Elements of the Anomaly Defect Insertion window Menu Command Insertion ON View Defects View Anomalies View SDH View PDH View ATM View RDI View Pointer Options Help Function Inserts anomalies or defects A D Display and entry of defects Display and entry of anomalies Anomalies or defects for SDH technology Anomalies or defects for PDH technology Anomalies or defects for ATM technology Select Remote Defect Indication options Select AlSx LOPx for Concatenation On line help Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Insertion 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 21 3 2 Inserting defects Basic procedure for inserting defects continuously and
281. onforming Cells Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual continued Standards Abbreviations SA 17 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Abbreviation Meaning _ NR Network Operator Channel G 832 Non Return to Zero NSA Non service Affecting Failure NSAP Network Service Access Point National Use Z C A O Operation Administration and Management 2 Optical Carrier N 1 3 12 48 OCMR Overflow of Cell Loss Ratio Overflow of Cell Misinsertion Rate Overflow Cell Rate Overhead Out Of Frame ili I F 62 Out of Service Measurement P1 P2 Automatic Protection Switching G 832 Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Payload Defect Indication PJE Pointer Justification Event PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PLL Phase Locked Loop PLM PLM P Payload Mismatch Payload Mismatch Path PLM V Payload Mismatch VT PMP Protected Monitoring Point POH Path Overhead Path Overhead Identifier PLCP PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence 0 Payload o OD T o 6 D a M lt D o o 5 m o D c e T 5 5 c Cb SA 18 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i Abbreviation PTR Pointer PVC Permanent Virtual Channel QOS Quality Of Serv
282. ons 21 5 1 selecting the virtual instruments for an application 21 5 2 Entering the signal 23 5 3 Saving an application 25 5 4 Loading an application 25 osos os aus 27 6 1 Setting the parameters 27 6 2 Starting and stopping the measurement 29 6 2 1 Starting stopping a measurement manually 29 6 2 2 Starting a measurement manually and stopping automatically 30 6 2 3 Starting and stopping a measurement automatically 30 6 3 Displaying results e g anomalies O 31 7 _ 1 33 7 1 Calling up on line help O 33 7 2 Calling up a 1 O 33 7 3 Setting the size of the help window 0 33 8 Howto use the 5 0 34 8 1 Arranging the application 34 8 2 Commonly used controls O 35 9 Printing and exporting results O 37 9 1 Installing O 38 9 2 The Print menu Application Manager O 39 9 2
283. oose Setup 4 Setthe IP Address of the ANT 20 the Subnet Mask and if required the address of the Default Gateway Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network Confirm with OK Back in the Network Drivers dialog box choose Close Back in the Network Setup dialog box confirm with OK Confirm the modification prompt with Answer the question Restart Windows now with Continue In the Main group in Program Manager double click the Control Panel icon 0 Choose Network and then set Computer must be unique in the network Workgroup etc to suit your requirements Confirm with OK 11 Answer the question Restart your computer now with Restart Computer ze ann Remote operation RO 7 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E you ordered the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 31 separately install the software packages as follows Installing the PCMCIA System software 1 Start or return to Windows 2 Insert the ANT 20 PCMCIA System installation disk into drive A 3 Choose Run from the File menu in the Program Manager window and type the following command into the dialog box A setup 4 After complete installation exit Windows remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the ANT 20 5 Run C CARDWARE doscard d from MS DOS
284. order path remote defect indication Remote defect indication VT Alarm indication signal payload Loss of frame payload Loss of cell delineation Loss of sequence synchronization Remote defect indication payload Alarm indication signal yellow Frame alignment signal errors payload Cyclic redundancy check error Test sequence errors bit errors Fig O 5 Meanings of the LED indicators on the ANT 20 front panel The abbreviations refer to SDH and SONET events The following events apply to SONET only AIS L RDI L LOP P AIS P UNEQ P PLM P RDI P LOP V AIS V UNEQ V PLM V BIP V RDI V AIS Yellow Operating Fundamentals 7 Mainframe Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 2 Basic operation The 20 or 20 are operated just like any other Windows application Entries are usually made using the trackball More complex entries are made using the built in keyboard and pre defined function keys An external keyboard can be connected to socket 03 if required The following sections describe the operating concept of the ANT 20 and 20 with the aid of some typical examples Most functions are self explanatory so you will become familiar with the basic operation of the instrument fairly quickly On line help is provided to allow you to use the ANT 20 to the full and to match it to your requirements For this reason these operating instructions have been kept brief On line help is accessed by pressing functio
285. originally programmed Restore Start The No Power alarm time is included in the Elapsed Time At the end of the measurement the Elapsed Time is equal to the Gate Time 4 AC power fails after the first set of backup data has been generated AC power is restored after the normal end of the measurement time As backup data was generated before the power failure this backup data will be loaded when power is restored The data is restored and the end results generated measurement has ended The time from the start of the AC power failure until the programmed end of the measurement is indicated as a No Power alarm The No Power alarm time up to the programmed end of the measurement is included in the Elapsed Time Hence the Elapsed Time is equal to the Gate Time 10 2 2 Timer controlled measurements O 46 If the measurement start time that you enter has already passed the ANT 20 ANT 20E will start measuring immediately when you press F5 MEASUREMENT START The measurement will run for the set gate time This behavior is independent of the AC power failure behavior Timer controlled measurements are handled as follows The 20 20 calculates the remaining time to the originally programmed end of the measurement from the configuration parameters The measurement resumes and runs for this calculated remaining time Operating Fundamentals rt ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Ve
286. ost compact instruments of its class The low volume casing with extra large area display screen was designed specifically with the requirements of mobile use in mind The protective cover and carrying handle also have other useful functions see the section Getting started 4 Introduction Getting Started 20 20 Contents Mainframe SDH Version Getting Started 1 Safety 5 G 1 1 1 Correct G 1 1 2 line voltage G 1 1 3 Slede eie r G 1 1 4 Faults and excessive stresses G 2 1 5 Repair and maintenance instructions G 2 1 6 la C 3 4 Packing and unpacking G 6 2 1 WIND ACHING d EE G 6 2 2 Checking for transport G 6 2 3 Packing for transport and 5 G 6 2 4 Operation after storage and transport G 7 2 5 Ventilation nun oe eee ew G 7 Power supply G 8 3 1 AC line 3 8 3 2 Lithium batteries G 8 3 3 nm G 9 3 3 1 Solving G 9 PrOleCliV amp COVer sun nme anne G 12 Carrying handle
287. our network Modify the C WINDOWS hosts file The C WINDOWS hosts file is merely an example It must be modified to adapt to your network The hosts file must contain the IP addresses of all network nodes with which you want to communicate including the IP address of the ANT 20 itself and the IP address of the gateway if any between the ANT 20 and the controlling PC The first entry in the file is the mapping for localhost and must be left unchanged see sample hosts file C WINDOWS hosts sam Ask your network administrator for the required entries for the hosts file to adapt to your network Modify the network configuration 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Click the Windows 95 Start button choose Settings and then choose Control Panel In the Control Panel window double click the Network icon 3 In the Configuration tab of the Network window double click TCP IP In the IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties window set the IP Address of the ANT 20 and the Subnet Mask In the Gateway tab of the Properties window set the address of the default gateway Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network Confirm with OK 4 Back in the Network window choose Identification tab and then set Computer Name must be unique in the network Workgroup etc to suit your requirements Confirm with OK 5 Reboot the ANT 20 If you o
288. ow example The menu has two parts e Add amp Remove This command opens the Add amp Remove Instruments dialog window which is used to add Vis to an application or remove VIs from an application see Sec 5 1 Page O 21 e List of VIs in the current application Selecting one of the items in this part of the menu places the corresponding VI window on top The Measurement menu Measurement Start Stop Settings Load Result Save result as Delete Result Calibrate Fig O 12 The Measurement menu of the ANT20 Application Title gt window The Measurement menu 1 used to start and stop the measurement lt is also used to configure the measurement sequence with the Settings dialog The menu items Load Save Delete Result are used to handle the measurement results Each set of measurement results consists of the instrument settings and all the measurement results for the last measurement interval that has elapsed Operating Fundamentals LEN ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version 4 2 2 4 Configure menu Configure Minibar always onT op Language LED Display Keyboard Lock Delete result warning Fig O 13 Configure menu of the ANT20 Application Title gt window The Configure menu sets whether the Minibar Application Manager is to be always visible or not It is also used to set the menu
289. ow contains entry fields for Company logo stored as a bitmap BMP or DIB file in a directory e Signal structure asagraph if the Signal Structure VI is loaded as text if the Signal Structure VI is not loaded e Printout header with data identifying the measurement Test instrument inventory number Customer name Test object description Tester s name Date Comment text information about the measurement The company logo is printed out at a fixed size with its original aspect ratio preserved on all pages of the printout The other items are printed out on the first page only 9 3 1 3 Printer Setup dialog The standard Windows Printer Setup dialog is used to select the following settings e Actual printer e Paper size format e Other options in the Options sub dialog The Options sub dialog The options sub dialog of the Printer Setup dialog is used to select the following basic settings e Print normally or redirect to Postscript file e Margins e Preface on off 9 3 2 Exporting results The results can be stored in a specified destination directory or on floppy disk for archiving or for further processing 1 Select the Export command in the Print menu The Save as dialog opens see Sec 9 3 2 1 2 Select the destination directory where you want the result file to be stored if you want to save to a floppy disk insert one in the drive first 3 Select
290. ow to the receive side Rx by clicking the Tx gt Rx button 8 Using the slider set a load of 10 or 14 98 MBit s in the displayed signal structure 9 Confirm your entries with OK The selected ATM signal structure is now activated 10 Click on the button on the toolbar The test channel is now connected and test cells are being sent In the off state the transmitter outputs empty cells only ATM Traffic Analyzer VI 1 Open the ATM Traffic Analyzer VI 2 In the View menu select Cell Transfer Delay Click on the CTD icon button on the toolbar The display changes to Cell Transfer Delay A 72 Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version 3 Set the measurement interval in the Cell Transfer Delay Setup dialog box 4 Activate Cell Transfer Delay in the Settings menu Click on the SET icon button Cell Transfer Delay Setup Class Width 0 16 Offset 4999 68 Measurement Interval 4999 68 5020 16 taa Fig 109 Cell Transfer Delay Setup dialog box Application Manager VI Start the measurement Press function key F5 Click the green traffic signal button in the Application Manager Explanation of the parameters measurement interval class width etc A measurement interval is always divided into 128 classes This means that say a measurement interval o
291. plication Manager Open the dialog using the command sequence Application Open normal size Application Manager Press function key F3 APPL The Open Application dialog window opens Operating Fundamentals 25 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E The Open Application dialog The Open Application dialog contains a list of available applications for a particular drive Source The scrollbars are used to move through the list horizontally and vertically To load an application 1 Click on the item in the list corresponding to the application that you want to load The item is highlighted in gray 2 Click on the OK button The selected application is loaded and the ANT 20 is immediately ready to measure Open Application x Source CJA Drive selection 03 04 37 14 34 2 2 JW amp G Unframed 2M Erortest 09 44 7115 34 54 WG Framed 34M Ernrtest 03 04 37 1 36 54 WtG Unframed 34M Errortest 03 04 37 1 38 140 WEG Framed 140M Ernrtest 03 04 37 14 39 140 140 W amp G Unframed 140M Enortest 03 04 37 14 41 2 1402 WEG MUX 2 140 Enortest 03 04 37 14 43 34 140734 WEG MUX 34 140 Emortest List of applications 09 04 97 14 44 2 34 2 WEG MUX 2 34 Errortest 09 04 97 14 46 2 140 W amp G DMX 140 2 Errortest 09 04 97 14 51 34 140 34 w amp G DMX 140 34 Erortest 4
292. pplication Manager is the starting point for each measurement The various measurement windows for a measurement are selected and the maximum measurement duration is set here The ANT 20 represents a collection of several specialized measuring instruments each of which fulfils a particular task Each instrument is represented by a corresponding window The ANT 20 test windows are therefore called Virtual Instruments VI Depending on the measurement various Vis are combined to make an application Mainframe SDH Version an Jane Setting the measurement duration The maximum measurement duration is set in the Measurement menu using the Settings dialog You can also program a timer that allows measurements to be started automatically Selecting the virtual instruments Click on the Add amp Remove button in the Application Manager Select the Add amp Remove dialog from the Instruments menu All the instruments needed for your application are selected here The menu lists all of the windows that are currently active Add amp Remove Instruments Ea Select the instruments that you want to use in your new measurement application Instruments groups 1 Physical Layer 2 ATM Standard Instruments available Instruments used Anomaly Defect Analyzer 0 Signal Structure Anomaly Defect Insertion Add gt gt 0 172 Jitter Generator Analpzer Overhead Analyze
293. protection switching fragment T1 204 1993 OAM amp P lower layer protocol for interfaces between operation systems and network elements T1 208 1993 OAM amp P upper layer protocol for interfaces between operation systems and network elements T1 210 1993 OAM amp P principles of functions architectures and protocols for interfaces 11 231 1993 Digital hierarchy Layer 1 in service digital transmission performance monitoring Table SA 2 Overview of important ANSI standards 1 3 Bellcore standards GR 253 CORE SONET Transport System Common Generic Criteria GR 499 CORE Transport Systems Generic Requirements TSGR Common Requirements Table SA 3 Overview of important Bellcore standards SA 4 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 1 4 standards ETS 300 147 R3 Synchronous digital hierarchy SDH Multiplexing structure based on ITU T Recommendation G 707 ETS 300 166 Physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces for equipment using the 2048 kbit s based plesiochronous or synchronous digital hierarchies based on Recommendation G 703 ETS 300 167 Functional characteristics of 2 048 Mbit s interfaces based on ITU T Recommendations G 704 and G 706 ETS 300 417 1 1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Part 1 1 Generic processes and performances ETS 300 417 2 1 Generic requirements of transport functionalit
294. quipped with remote control interfaces as standard e tis particularly suitable for space saving rack mounting e 115 easily stackable Remote operation of the DominoCOM ANT 20 The DominoCOM 20 is connected to a standard or notebook PC via the V 24 or GPIB interface SCPI commands are used to control the DominoCOM 20 LabWindows CVI drivers can be supplied as an optional extra They reduce the time required for program development and simplify control of the DominoCOM ANT 20 or ANT 20 alternativ V 24 Fig G 7 DominoCOM ANT 20 in Remote mode Tip Further details on this operating mode are found in the Remote Control Instructions BN 3035 98 09 Getting Started 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 8 2 Local operation of the DominoCOM 20 In addition to remote controlled operation the DominoCOM can also be operated as a stand alone measuring instrument A VGA monitor mouse and keyboard need to be connected for local operation In this configuration all the facilities of the ANT 20 Advanced Network Tester are available from the DominoCOM version Fig G 8 DominoCOM 20 in Local mode Tip Further details on this operating mode are found in the Remote Control Instructions BN 3035 98 09 8 3 DominoCOM ANT 20 accessories The following items are delivered with the DominoCOM ANT 20 V 24 remote control GPIB remote control Filter pads AC line cord 2 ca
295. r Fig A 51 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs A 34 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 11 3 Measurement Application Guide Example BERT measurement in the DCC Settings 1 First activate the Overhead Generator and Overhead Analyzer windows so that both are in the foreground 2 Select one of the D bytes in the RSOH or MSOH of the Overhead Generator field has a white background 3 Click on the TPG test pattern generator button in the toolbar of the window This fills one group D1 to D4 D5 to D12 with a test pattern 4 Set the desired test pattern in the Test pattern list box of the Edit Signal Structure window in the Signal Structure VI 5 Repeat the last three steps for the Overhead Analyzer instead of the Overhead Generator The D byte fields on both sides will now show aU Overhead Generator gt lt Edit Type Descriptor M 2 pe ee e Ee Byte 3 1 1 Bin SOHE BERT Al 1 1 a 25 T AA 358 1 8 D2 23 C2 02 H3 151 ES ASS B2 2 El K2 F2 xx xx xx 00 D DE H4 H3 H3 00 ae B2 B2 m mm 79 20 D4 D5 DE 4 DS 00 oo fo 183 95995996 foo os oo fo oo Bon o fea
296. r Overhead Generator lt lt Remove GeneratorfAnalpzer Performance Analysis Pointer Analyzer Pointer Generator 2 Background Generator 2 Signal Structure 2 Traffic Analyzer 3 Channel Explorer 3 Test Control 3 Test Results Cancel much 1 Fig A 3 Add amp Remove dialog window oelect the instruments required from the left hand list box and add them to the application using the Add button In the initial state the list of Vis used right hand list box contains the Signal otructure window The other Vls needed for a particular application are detailed in this documentation We will begin with the Signal Structure Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 1 2 Signal Structure Application Guide The signal structure used for the measurement is set using the Signal Structure VI Use the Application Manager to activate the window Gje 2027 a Fig A 4 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Click on the Signal Structure button The display area of the window shows the signal structure that is currently set Signal Structure Time Edit Interface Laser Channel Idle Trigger Aux Offset Help Tx Rx Fig 5 Signal Structure
297. r B3 or TSE will be set The meas point is retained if the mapping is not altered G 828 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any of the meas points listed e g for ATM or G 832 11 Performance Analysis Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help AH e NEAR END B235UM 0 00000 100 00000 0 00000 END 5 1 0 00000 0 00000 PATH ALLOCATION 18 50000 PATH UAS For Help press F1 551515155 55515155 551515155 551515155 0 000005 Accepted Fig VI 37 Performance Analysis window showing an ITU T G 828 analysis Parallel evaluation at the near end and far end Where permitted by the signal structure simultaneous evaluation takes place on the near end and far end This applies to the following meas points e B2SUM MS REI HP REI e P BIP 2 8 and LP REI 45 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E VI 46 All G 828 results are determined separately for the near end and far end The far end evaluation will be interrupted by certain alarms such as LOS LOF or AIS These alarm times are excluded from the reference value for the rate computation at the far end G 828 evaluation on bit errors TSE G 828 evaluation on bit errors TSE can be performed on the following signals e Unframed patterns without bit rate limitation e Framed patterns and bulk signal
298. rdered the Remote Operation Option 3035 95 31 separately install the software packages as follows Installing the driver software for the SCM Ethernet LAN card 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Insert the SCM Ethernet LAN card into a free PCMCIA socket 3 Follow the on screen instructions of the Update Device Driver Wizard to install the driver software Insert the SCM distribution disk into drive A Click Other Locations and then type the following folder name into the dialog box A WIN95 Confirm with Ok Back in the Update Device Driver Wizard window click Finish 4 After complete installation remove the SCM distribution disk from drive A and answer the question Do you want to restart your computer now with Yes RO 12 Remote operation 20 20 Remote operation Mainframe SDH Version Verify the driver installation To show the 5 Ethernet Combo card Properties window 1 Start or return to Windows 95 2 Click the Windows95 Start button choose Settings and then choose Control Panel In the Control Panel window double click the System icon 3 In the Device Manager tab of the System Properties window choose View devices by type double click Network adapters in the list and then double click SCM Ethernet Combo card Modify the C WINDOWS hosts file CWNWINDOWS hosts file is merely an example It must be
299. re MS DOS MS Excel Windows Windows 3 11 and Windows95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation The graphics user interface makes for fast setting of the instrument to sut the application All the important parameters and results for the current task are displayed simultaneously On line help ensures that you can correctly use all functions of the ANT 20 A full keyboard is fitted to make input of text for documentation purposes that much easier Rapid switching between several windows displayed simultaneously is particularly practical The ANT 20 can be precisely configured for every application The modular future oriented software architecture is clearly shown in Fig 1 3 The 20 can be re configured to match a new requirement quickly and simply by adding extra hardware and or software Remote operation from a standard PC is possible as is the exporting of measurement data for processing and evaluation The ANT 20 is ready to accept future remote operation interfaces such as LAN ISDN infra red or GSM via PCMCIA slots Applications Windows G 821 G826 M 2100 Error tester SOH monitor Pointer tester ATM traffic tester o lI 42 processor processor Instrument driver Measurement UT Testmodue i hardware Test module Fig 1 3 ANT 20 software architecture 2 1 Ideal for mobile use Despite the exceptional flexibility and wide range of functions of the ANT 20 it is one of the m
300. re on the ANT 20 the Host in terms of ReachOut you can start the ReachOut Host and configure it as required To prevent a Viewer from accidentally tying up the Host it is recommended setting the Host configuration parameter Inactivity Timeout to a non zero value in Preferences Host Options menu After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC the Viewer in terms of ReachOut and configuring the ReachOut Viewer as required you can start remote access to the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide 2 3 3 Software installation under Windows 95 To install and configure the software on a DominoCOM ANT 20 in the same way as on an ANT 20 connect an external monitor keyboard and mouse to the built in PC AT If you ordered the Remote Operation Option BN 3035 95 30 together with your ANT 20 the ReachOut software is already installed on the 20 in the directory C REACHOUT and the ReachOut program icon is shown in the Windows95 file folder Programs The ReachOut security options are pre configured as follows The ReachOut Password List contains an entry with the User ANT 20 and the accompanying password ANT 20 The option Passwords Required is set to For detailed information about configuration options refer to the ReachOut user s guide RO 4 Remote operation 20 20 Remote operation Mainframe SDH Version you order
301. rement by pressing function key F5 or clicking on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager Wander analysis Wander analysis involves measurements that take a particularly long time Measurement intervals up to 99 days be set on the 20 The measured values are displayed in the 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window as a graph of the TIE values and numerically in the MTIE and TIE fields above Click on the CSR button in the toolbar The Cursor Position window then opens This gives you an overview of the current values on the curve which is being recorded Date 20 08 97 Time 17 58 08 Resolution Second TIE Value 162_1E 9s Fig A 83 Cursor Position window Storing results 1 Select the Export command in the Print menu The Save as dialog box is opened 2 Select the target directory under the current file shall be stored and set the CSV format Click on to start exporting A 55 Mainframe SDH Version 20 20 Analysis for TDEV 3035 95 21 MTIE TDEV Analysis software option 3035 95 21 is available for precise time domain analysis of MTIE TDEV The program can be started from the 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer or separately from the ANT 20 software The program evaluates TIE values that were measured using ANT 20 The evaluations follo
302. repetitively Continuous insertion of defects The D Defect button has already been clicked The continuous option has been selected 1 Select the technology type SDH or PDH or ATM 2 Select the defect required using the Defect entry box The corresponding check box will be marked 3 Click the ON button The defect will be inserted continuously Repetitive insertion of defects The same procedure is used as for continuous insertion with the following additional step between steps 2 and 3 Select the repetitive option The Duration and Period list boxes can now be accessed Enter the duration of defect insertion in frames or seconds in the Duration box Enter the repetition period in frames or seconds in the Period box Continue with step 3 above Defects can be inserted or removed and the type of defect changed even while a measurement is running 3 3 Inserting anomalies Basic procedure for inserting anomalies continuously and singly Continuous insertion of anomalies The continuous option has been selected 1 Click the A Anomaly button The anomaly insertion entry box is activated 2 Select the technology type SDH or PDH or ATM 3 Select the anomaly required in the Anomaly entry box The corresponding check box will be marked 4 Enter the anomaly rate in the Rate list box 5 Click the ON button The anomaly will be inserted cont
303. required To prevent a Viewer from accidentally tying up the Host it is recommended setting the Host configuration parameter Inactivity Timeout to a non zero value in Preferences Host Options menu After installing ReachOut on the controlling PC the Viewer in terms of ReachOut and configuring the ReachOut Viewer as required you can start remote access to the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide RO 5 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 Remote Operation via Ethernet IEEE 802 3 3 1 Overview The Remote Operation Option 3035 95 31 includes the software required to operate a distant ANT 20 or DominoCOM ANT 20 from a Windows PC over an Ethernet LAN using the Internet protocol TCP IP The PCMCIA Ethernet card required with 10Base2 and 10BaseT connectors for the ANT 20 is also included The remote access software used is ReachOut from Stac Electronics Inc For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide For ANT 20 with Windows 3 11 only PCMCIA cards require a standardized PCMCIA system software with Card and Socket Services CardWare from Award Software Inc is included as PCMCIA system software for the ANT 20 For detailed information refer to the CardWare user s manual e The CardWare software contained on the ANT 20 PCMCIA System disk is already configured for use with the ANT 20 e TCP IP implementation for the ANT 20 is by means of MS TC
304. reviations SA 11 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning 1 11110110 Framing Byte 11110110 Framing Byte 11110110 2 00101000 Framing Byte 00101000 Framing Byte 00101000 AAL ATM Adaptation Layer Adaptation Layer 0 0 5 Automatic Protection Switching K1 2 ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode A AU AIS AU LOP AU n Administrative Unit AU Alarm Indication Signal AU Loss of Pointer Administrative Unit Level n 3 4 AUG Administrative Unit Group AvBW Average Bandwidth Table SA 10 Standard abbreviations used in this manual SA 12 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version i Abbreviation B1 Parity Word BIP 8 for Regenerator Section RSOH Parity Word BIP 8 for Section Path Error Monitoring BIP 8 Byte PLCP B2 Parity Word BIP Nx8 for Line Parity Word BIP Nx24 for Multiplex Section MSOH B3 Parity Word BIP 8 for VC 3 4 Path POH Parity Word BIP 8 for Path Overhead POH B3ZS B8ZS Bipolar with eight zero substitution BBE Background Block Error BBER Bipolar with three zero substitution Background Block Error Ratio Bit Error Ratio BIP 2 Parity Word BIP 8 for VC 1 2 Path POH Bit Interleaved Parity Bit BIP V Parity Word BIP 8 for Tributary POH UJ m Bringing into service performanc
305. river DEVICEHIGH C CARDWARE PCSS EXE DEVICEHIGH C CARDWARE PCCS EXE DEVICE C CARDWARE PCRM EXE AUTODETECT DEVICE C CARDWARE PCENABLE EXE DEVICE C CARDWARE PCDISK EXE org tcp include cardware LASTDRIVE Z Modifying C autoexec bat ECHO OFF IF NOT CONFIG tcp GOTO LABEL1 C WINDOWS net start REM Start Windows IF NOT CONFIG tcp GOTO LABEL2 WIN GOTO LABEL3 LABEL2 WIN n LABEL3 RO 10 Remote operation 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Installing the ReachOut software Start or return to Windows 2 Insert the ReachOut for Windows amp DOS installation disk 1 into drive A 3 Choose Run from the File menu in the Program Manager window and type the following command into the dialog box A install 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation Select connection type Internet using Windows Sockets For detailed information refer to the ReachOut user s guide If you are installing ReachOut on DominoCOM ANT 20 answer the on screen question Would you like ReachOut Host to be started automatically when you start Windows with Yes All configuration parameters can be changed after installation by configuring ReachOut 5 After complete installation exit Windows remove the installation disk from drive A and reboot the 20 After this installation procedure on the ANT 20 the Host in terms of R
306. rm the evaluation see Tab TB 18 For G 826 OOS not available e Hierarchy Dialog window for input of the following parameters Allocation SES Threshold UAS Limit UAS Mode Entry of path allocation in percent 96 Setting range 0 196 to 10096 Step width 0 1 Default 18 5 96 Threshold for SES count Setting range 1 to 47563 Step width 1 Default value as per G 826 depends on signal structure Switch and threshold value for taking UAS into account in the path status VERDICT Off UAS do not affect the path status On If the UAS threshold is exceeded the path status is assessed as Rejected Setting range 0 to 100000 Step width 1 Default O Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for Near and Far End Individual Separate rating of UAS for Near and Far End Global Common rating of UAS for Near and Far End The total path is unavailable as soon as one side is unavailable Default Individual 1 Allocation indicates what percentage of the End to End target values for ESR Errored Seconds Ratio SESR Severely Errored Seconds Ratio and BBER Background Block Error Ratio must be met for the measured path to be considered acceptable The End to End target values are based on a hypothetical path of length 27 500 km The target values for various system bit rates are specified in Recommendation G 826 2 This threshold indicate
307. rocess from the Sensor list box Set the maximum permitted switching time threshold value in the Switch time limit t1 box 4 Enter the required duration for the complete measurement in the Gate time t2 box This time should be more than the threshold value in order to detect multiple switching Start the measurement by clicking the START button 6 Trigger the switching process by e g interrupting the working line The measurement stops automatically when completed e Application Guide A 15 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Analysis Two results are displayed once the measurement is completed e The total duration of the event pre set in the Sensor list box e An interpretation of the measured value PASSED Measured value x Switch time limit FAILED FAILED Time Measured value gt Measured value gt Switch time limit 724 Measured value gt Switch time limit 724 limit FAILED non permitted defect occurred during the measurement that blocked the sensor e g LOS or LOF if Sensor is to MS AIS Table A 1 Display of switching time measurement results A 16 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 7 Bit error rate test BERT 7 1 Test setup and description sm Fig A 27 Bit error rate test setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15
308. rop amp Insert function are given in the descriptions for the various options Through Mode The received signal is looped through the ANT 20 and re transmitted by the generator The ANT 20 operates in Through Mode as a signal monitor without affecting the signal 140 Mbit s 140 Mbit s Fig S 4 Through Mode Generator and receiver coupled The ANT 20 provides access to the tributary channels within the MUX DEMUX chain when used in conjunction with the PDH MUX DEMUX and M13 MUX DEMUX options BN 3035 90 30 to BN 3035 90 32 This also applies if the PDH signal is transmitted in a container The looped through signal can also be jittered using the Jitter Generator options Jitter Generator up to 155 or 622 Mbit s BN 3035 90 60 to 61 This function is available for all bit rates fitted to the instrument 5 20 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Jitter 34 Mbit s 34 Mbit s Fig S 5 Through Mode Adding jitter to the looped through signal 4 3 2 Clock generator Through Mode In Through Mode clock generation is always derived from the receive signal clock No offset is possible in this operating mode see Sec 1 2 2 Page 5 4 4 3 3 Anomaly insertion Through Mode Anomaly BPV B1 B2 and MS REl 4 3 4 Defect generation Through Mode Defect generation is not possible 4 3 5 Measurements There are no restrictions
309. rsion Timer activated Timer start Stop Normal measurement Actual start a Actual start 3 4 Restore start a 1 E n 6 Duration of AC power failure Fig O 43 Examples of ANT 20 ANT 20E behavior in the event of an AC power failure timer controlled measurements 1 The AC power failure occurs between activation of the timer and the time when the timer triggers the start of the measurement The AC power failure has no effect As no backup data could be generated and the actual start of the measurement is still in the future the measurement will be set normally with timer activated as soon as the AC power is restored A No Power alarm will not be recorded or displayed 2 The AC power failure lasts beyond the time when the timer should trigger the measurement start The measurement starts asynchronously as soon as AC power is restored and runs for the remaining time to the programmed stop time The stop time is given by the timer start time setting plus the gate time setting A No Power alarm will be detected and recorded The duration of the alarm is the time difference between the timer start and the actual start As the No Power alarm is counted from the timer start time setting the Elapsed Time Gate Time at the end of the measurement As case 2 but the AC pow
310. rst period If you want a mean cell rate which is 50 of the peak cell rate the burst period must be two times the burst length Burst load Example 50 X Idle cells Burst cells Burst length size Burst period Fig A 125 Definition the burst period burst length etc Analysis 1 Open the Anomaly and Defect Analyzer window 2 In the View menu select the item Table Click the appropriate icon on the toolbar The measurement results are displayed as a table If there are cell losses you will find the precise CLR in this table Application Guide A 83 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Notes A 84 Application Guide Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Contents Standards Abbreviations 1 1 1 1 ITU T recommendations SA 1 1 2 ANSI SA 4 1 3 Bellcore SA 4 1 4 ET 5 5 SA 5 1 5 Forum recommendations SA 6 2 Alarm lt lt SA 9 2 1 SDHISONET SA 9 2 2 ATM Path SA 11 2 3 Virtual Concatenation SA 11 3
311. ry 18 Date 24 02 Count gt 5 E 7 Duration gt Check box Entry box List box Fig O 34 Dialog window showing commonly used controls Option buttons Option buttons are arranged in groups Only one button can be activated in each group The selected or activated option is indicated by a black dot Inactive option buttons are empty Action buttons Clicking on an action button executes an action directly Action buttons with toggle functions appear pressed when clicked on once and the label on the button changes e g from OFF to Clicking the button again causes it to pop up and the label reverts to its original function e g OFF Check boxes Check boxes are used to activate deactivate other options The option that you selected is indicated by a check List boxes List boxes generally contain one or more items arranged in a certain order A current item in the list is activated by clicking on it A scrollbar appears next to the list if it contains more items than can be displayed in the box at one time Operating Fundamentals 35 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Entry boxes These are boxes where you enter alphanumeric characters parameter values names Where numerical values are to be entered the range of values allowed for the parameter will be checked Invalid parameter values are ignored Important Entries are accepted only when the cur
312. s 40 Printer Setup O 41 R Ratio anomaly result VI 17 Receiver section Specifications Reference clock input 25 REF CLOCK IN 5 37 Trigger input output 26 5 37 Recovery time 0 7 Remote operation RO 1 Repair instructions G 2 Result display Anomaly Defect Analyzer VI 14 Ring APS VI 28 Mainframe SDH Version 5 Safety class 6 1 Save as dialog O 42 Saving an application 25 Section Overhead SOH 29 Section Overhead editing A 29 see part Virtual Instruments Selecting instruments 21 Sensor test A 78 SEP used in Verdict TB 20 TB 28 SES Threshold Performance analysis TB 13 TB 20 TB 22 Setting new pointer TB 4 oeverely Errored Frame Seconds Performance analysis TB 6 to TB 34 oeverely Errored Seconds Performance analysis TB 6 to TB 34 Signal input 12 5 7 oignal input 14 5 5 Signal output 13 5 3 Signal output 15 5 2 Signal Structure 23 SOH VI 23 Standard sequence TB 3 Start stop measurement 29 Storage under damp conditions G 6 T TCM Sequence VI 26 TDEV Time Deviation 56 Through mode VI 4 5 TIE 55 A 33 Timer 0 30 Timer controlled measurements 46 Titlebar 20 TOH VI 23 Trace identifier VI 29 A 31 Trace identifier mismatch 33 Traffic signal icon O 29 Trigger VI 3 U UAS Limit TB 20 TB 24 TB 27 UAS Mode TB 20 TB 24 TB 27 Unavailable Seconds Performance analysis TB 6 to TB 34 Unpac
313. s Further information see part 7 Technical Background Virtual instruments Performance Analysis VI 43 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 10 4 Performance Analysis ITU T G 826 526 EZ Clicking on the appropriate icon button shown above allows you to perform G 826 In Service ISM and Out of Service OOS analysis the Performance Analysis window The following results are determined for the various hierarchy levels EB BBE ES EFS SES UAS PATH UAS and VERDICT In the case of G 826 ISM the ANT 20 analyses both forward and backward channel Near End and Far End if this is possible at the measuring point selected Measurement is performed at framed signals of the primary system level or higher in the case of G 826 ISM The following anomalies can be evaluated B1 B2SUM MS REI HP BS HP REI LP BIP8 LP REI LP BIP2 LP REI FAS140 FAS34 58 FAS2 CRC4 EBIT G832 FAS140 G832 EM140 REI G832 FAS34 and G832 EMSA REI For ANSI mappings the following anomalies can also be measured 053 P Parity 053 C Parity FAS45 FAS1 5 and DS1 CRC6 The measuring point the G 826 ISM evaluation is performed at is set in the Hierarchy menu In the case of G 826 OOS measurement is performed at unframed test signals TSE block errors are always evaluated Note As the G 826 analysis uses block error evaluation you cannot switch to bit error evaluation PERF Performance Analysis Analy
314. s e Overhead bytes E1 E2 F1 F2 F2L D1 through D3 and D4 through D12 in the SOH POH of SDH signals Since G 828 evaluation is a block error evaluation it is not possible to switch to bit error evaluation Further information see part 7 Technical Background Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 6 Performance Analysis ITU T G 829 zu 329 Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform a G 829 analysis in the Performance Analysis window G 829 evaluation can be performed on the following events B1 B2SUM MS REI Bit errors TSE Selecting the meas point If you change the signal structure a new meas point is normally sought automatically Either B2SUM or TSE will be set The meas point is retained if the mapping is not altered G 829 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any of the meas points listed e g for ATM or G 832 Parallel evaluation at the near end and far end Where permitted by the signal structure simultaneous evaluation takes place on the near end and far end This applies to the following meas point e B2SUM and MS REI The G 829 results are determined separately for the near end and far end The far end evaluation will be interrupted by certain alarms such as LOS LOF or AIS These alarm times are excluded from the reference value for the rate computation at the far end G 829 evaluation on bit
315. s byte is recorded on a frame by frame basis with timestamp until the buffer is full or you click the STOP button When recording 2 bytes 1 and K2 the buffer capacity 15 200 entries For single bytes 265 entries can be saved Capture in the presence of defects Capture is interrupted if LOF LOS and OOF or LOP P AIS P LOP V and AIS V POH capture occur Capture is resumed when the defect clears The duration of an LOS failure is not measured accurately to the nearest frame LOS and LOF Selected byte Structure setting Interpreter dialog Byte Capture Trigger Capture K1 K 2 Linear APS Source Trigger source see table Bit d Trigger condition for Compare Results list byte APS code als ee Hase d jp he ae Fig VI 24 Capture dialog Setting the trigger condition The Source list box is used to set the event that will start byte capture Setting Start condition Immediately after clicking START Compare The content of the recorded byte must be the same as the compare value Enter X for don t care bit values Compare not Inverse compare condition Recording starts when the value no longer corresponds to the compare value AU AIS AIS P of AU AIS or AIS P AU LOP LOP P Occurrence of AU LOP or LOP P Table VI 5 Source list box Virtual instruments Overhead Analyzer 20 20
316. s of the main window showing results as a histogram default setting Menu command Icon button Function View Graph Table Num Switch display modes Summary EEE Settings Select various detection and measurement modes Cursor Go to Moves cursor position to date and time entered Cursor First Last gt Sets cursor to start end of the measuring interval Cursor Prev Next 4 P Moves cursor page by page to the left right VI 14 Virtual instruments Anomaly Defect Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Fats lt _ 1 Icon button Function Cursor 4 gt Moves cursor in intervals single step to the left right Filter Display selected results only user filter Zoom In Out gt Increase decrease resolution of time axis The option buttons of the display filter see 9 are used to select the results registered within the measurement interval and enable their access in the appropriate results windows The results for anomalies and defects can be shown separately or ina combined display Other selection criteria are provided in the User Filter dialog The scrollbar lets you display all the registered results within the display window Clicking on an event button causes the rate per time for that event to be displayed 4 22 Display mode View Table In View Table display mode a table is
317. s required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 107 Fig A 107 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Application Guide A 71 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 22 4 Measurement Settings Signal Structure VI First of all set the Signal Structure VI as described ATM Signal Structure VI 1 Open the ATM Signal Structure VI 2 Inthe Edit menu select the item ATM Structure Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar This activates the ATM Structure window Inthe SDU field select the Testcell test channel structure Tx gt Rx Activate the Cell Transfer Delay button in the Performance Measurement field 5 In the Channel menu select Channel Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar The ATM Channel dialog box opens ATH Channel Edit ches Dec Rx gt T View UNI gt View As UNI C NHI GFC 0 vafo VCI PT 0 VCI Filter Cancel Fig 108 Channel dialog box of the Signal Structure VI 6 In the Channel dialog box enter your VPI VCI parameters for the transmitter and receiver and confirm with OK 7 Transfer the send side Tx settings in the ATM Signal Structure wind
318. s the TX parameters to their default values Enter selected frame bits in the idle channel Loops for system components can be activated and deactivated active only for DS3 Framed C Parity Help On line help TX parameters Frame and Sa bits 8 34 140 Mbit s Static entry of D and frame bits e 2 Mbit s NFASA bit Static entry of the A bits NFAS Pattern Fills bits Sa4 to Sa8 with one independent 8 bit sequence each Timeslot contents e 5 16 Frame 0 For timeslot 16 in frame 0 user defined 8 bit word e TS 16 Frame 1 For timeslot 16 in frame 1 user defined 8 bit word for signals with special multiframe structure e TS 16 Frame 2 to 15 For timeslot 16 in frames 2 through 15 together user defined 8 bit word for signals with special multiframe structure Virtual instruments PDH Generator Analyzer 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 9 3 RX parameters Frame and Sa bits 8 34 140 Mbit s Display of D and frame bits e 2 Mbit s NFAS A Bit Display of the A bit NFAS Pattern Display of bits Sa4 to Sa8 Tip Select the Sa bit position for which the pattern is to be displayed from the NFAS Sa Bit Position list box Offset TX Static offset for the PDH tributary bit rate during insertion into the SDH container 100 ppm for all bit rates relative to container Step width 1 ppm The offset is an average value The actual offset at any given time may be above
319. s the number of EB Errored Blocks required before a one second period is evaluated as SES Severely Errored Second Table TB 17 G 826 parameter settings Technical Background TB 15 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 3 3 G 826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated e The measurement point where the G 826 ISM evaluation is made is selected in the Hierarchy menu In the case of G 826 OOS there is no Hierarchy menu and evaluation is always made on bit errors TSE e Near End and Far End evaluations are simultaneous as soon as the set signal structure allows the Far End measurement to be made The Far End evaluation requires the presence of REI or EBIT Table TB 18 G 826 measurement points and anomalies evaluated TB 16 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 3 4 G 826 G 828 M 2101 blocklengths 3 3 4 1 0 826 ISM G 828 M 2101 RSOH MSOH HP LP Table TB 19 G 826 ISM G 828 M 2101 RSOH MSOH HP LP blocklength Technical Background TB 17 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Measurement point Blocklength time Blocklength bit 140M G832 125 us 17408 34M G832 EM 125 us 4296 Table TB 19 G 826 ISM G 828 M 2101 RSOH MSOH HP LP blocklength continued 3 3 4 2 G 826 OOS G 828 TSE G 829 TSE M 2100 TSE M 2101 TSE Measurement point Blocklength time Blocklength bit DS1 unframed DS1 ES
320. se I O Port to the value which was assigned to the SCM Ethernet LAN card Base I O Port is usually 0x0300 Confirm with 8 Select NE2000 Compatible NDIS2 NDIS3 from the Network Drivers list and then choose Add Protocol 9 Select Unlisted or Updated Protocol from the list and confirm with 10 Type the pathname A TCP32WFW in the dialog box and confirm with OK 11 Select Microsoft TCP IP 32 3 11b from the list and confirm with OK The Microsoft TCP IP 32 for Windows for Workgroups distribution files will be copied to your hard disk 12 When the Network Drivers dialog box appears select Microsoft NetBEUI from the list then click Remove and confirm with Yes 13 Select IPX SPX Compatible Transport with NetBIOS from the list then click Remove and confirm with Yes 14 Select Microsoft TCP IP 32 3 11b from the list then choose Setup aS SS RO 8 Remote operation 20 20 Remote operation Mainframe SDH Version 15 Set the Address of the ANT 20 the Subnet Mask and if required the address of the Default Gateway Ask your network administrator for the required entries to adapt to your network Confirm with 16 Back in the Network Drivers dialog box choose Close 17 Back in the Network Setup dialog box confirm with 18 Type in the Computer Name must be u
321. set using the Generator Vls or windows Results are normally displayed using the Analyzer Vls or windows Further information is found in Part 4 Setting the parameters Setting the measurement duration Application Manager The measurement duration e g 60 seconds is set using the Measurement Settings dialog in the Application Manager 1 Open the dialog using the Measurement Settings command in the pop up menu reduced size Application Manager or Open the dialog using the command sequence Measurement Settings normal size Application Manager The Measurement Settings dialog window opens 2 Activate the Seconds option button in the Gate Time field Seconds button is marked with a dot 3 Enter the value 60 into the Gate Time input field unless this value is not already displayed 4 Click on Measurement Settings Start mode Start ccm manual Manual Timer automatic Start Time HH DD hh mm ss Start time Current Date Set to current date system clock Gate Time Interm Time m Intermediate time Vr results output C Hours Total measurement time Minutes Minutes Seconds Seconds Units Fig 25 Measurement Settings dialog window Operating Fundamentals 27 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Inserting an anomaly Anomaly Defect Insertion VI 2 Anomalies or
322. sis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help if oer eee So FAR END HP REI 22 36 5 FS ES 0 928057 96 91 07143 3 57143 SS 0 00000 US n ERDICT Rejected 92 75362 Es 5 zma em Ma co co PATH ALLOCATION 18 50000 Attention Check TIM PLM PATH UAS Defect Evaluation please Fig VI 36 Performance Analysis window showing ITU T G 826 ISM in service measurement Further information see part 7 Technical Background VI 44 Virtual instruments Performance Analysis 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 10 5 Performance Analysis ITU T G 828 Virtual instruments Performance Analysis E Clicking on the above icon button allows you to perform a G 828 analysis in the Performance Analysis window G 828 evaluation conforms to ITU T Recommendation dated 3 2000 The G 828 standard is a further development of Recommendation G 826 for synchronous digital paths Recommendation G 828 specifies additional measurement values and measurement points e SEP Severely Errored Period declared as optional e Performance measurement TCM bytes in preparation for 20 G 828 evaluation can be performed on the following events B1 B2SUM B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE Selecting the meas point If you change the signal structure a new meas point is normally sought automatically Eithe
323. sment verdict M 2101 evaluation can be performed on the following events B1 B2SUM MS REI B3 HP REI LP BIP 2 8 LP REI Bit errors TSE Selecting the meas point you change the signal structure anew meas point is normally sought automatically Either B3 or TSE will be set The meas point is retained if the mapping is not altered M 2101 evaluation will be disabled if measurements cannot be made at any ofthe meas points listed e g for ATM or G 832 PERF Performance Analysis Analysis Hierarchy Settings View Print Help ore do Ts pee s s T el 2 NEAREND BASUM FARENDEMSREI s 9 000000 0 0000009 2810000000 28 1000000 ses 00000 0 0 000005 BBE 3 00000 0 00000 Sp 0 90000 9 0 00000 UN 0 o 00000 0 0 00000 6 1 552 199 Bisoses 436661 3096552 56 pisosep 2jsers 02252 5 Fig VI 40 Performance Analysis window showing an ITU T M 2101 analysis Virtual instruments Performance Analysis VI 51 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E VI 52 Parallel M 2101 evaluation at the near end and far end Where permitted by the signal structure simultaneous evaluation takes place on the near end and far end This applies to the following meas points e B2SUM and MS REl HP HREI e P BIP 2 8 and LP REI All M 2101 results are determined separately for the near end and far end The far end evaluation wi
324. sor in the entry box stops blinking This happens when you move to another entry box by clicking on or by pressing the TAB key You can enter characters from the normal keyboard or by means of the Keyboard window you have activated the Keyboard option OK button The OK button confirms the parameter entries or changes you made and closes the dialog Cancel button The Cancel button cancels the parameter entries or changes you made and closes the dialog window CLOSE button not shown If a dialog window includes a CLOSE button instead of the two buttons OK and Cancel this means that parameters are set as soon as they are entered or altered see input boxes The CLOSE button simply closes the dialog window Keyboard If the keyboard is activated you can enter numerical values on screen The Keyboard window appears whenever a dialog window containing entry boxes is opened The alpha keys are also activated if the parameter to be entered is in hexadecimal code The OK button transfers the value in the Keyboard entry box to the entry box in the dialog window that was previously selected The Keyboard window closes as soon as you close the dialog window Keyboard 149 76 Entry box fo Fr Clear all A 2 Le H Clear last digit Increment 4 5 s Decrement 1 2 3 Exponent Confirm
325. sport case TDK 960 32 ANT 20 only BN 0960 00 08 Transport case ANT 20E only BN 3035 92 03 External keyboard US English BN 3035 92 04 Decoupler 20 dB 11 6 5 6 BN 3903 63 TKD 1 probe 48 to 8500 BN 882 01 WG Mini PCM Monitor 1 BN 4555 11 9 7 9 Retrofitting of options All options can be retrofitted by the Wavetek Wandel Goltermann worldwide service network 5 50 Specifications 20 20 Index Symbols 43 44 sequence double pointer TB 4 APPL O 9 86 4 sequence pointer TB 4 87 3 sequence pointer 3 Numerics 2 point cell delay variation 74 A AAL layer 64 Abbreviations SA 12 AC line operation G 8 AC line voltage G 1 Action buttons 35 Add amp Remove 21 O 22 ADM Test VI 5 Air filter pad replacing M 4 Alarm messages SA 9 Allocation 20 Allocation Performance analysis TB 13 TB 15 TB 24 TB 27 Anomaly insertion VI 12 Anomaly Defect Analyzer 17 Anomaly Defect Insertion 17 ANSI Performance analysis VI 40 ANSI standards 4 ANSI T1 101 56 ANSI T1 105 1995 SONET Multiplexing Structure TB 1 ANSI BELL Performance analysis TB 6 20 20 concept 1 1 Applic
326. strument during boot up e Power supply failure during boot up e Software crash To restore and save the CMOS setup data proceed as follows Switch on the instrument Wait until the BIOS version is displayed on the screen 3 Then press the ALT and F1 keys simultaneously This initiates the CMOS Setup program 4 Use the key or arrow keys to select the appropriate menus and make the settings listed on the next page 5 Save the settings and exit from the CMOS Setup program G 9 Mainframe Version 20 20 CMOS Setup settings for 486 processor Date Time Hard Disk Floppy Disk Boot Features System Peripheral VGA Setup Date 2777 enter current date Time 22 enter current time C USR1 842 8 38 NONE 841 124 gt AUTO D NONE 0 0 0 0 of First select C USR1 and then press the AUTO key All other parameters will then be set automatically Drive A Drive B 1 44 Boot Sequence V Num Lock V Quick Memory Test V Simultaneous Display V Simultaneous Display not available for every BIOS version Shadow Cache V System BIOS CPU only V Video BIOS Floppy FDC IDE LPT Enabled Enabled AUTO vV Simultaneous not available for every BIOS version All other settings can be selected to suit your requirements
327. t CID Table G 3 Applications for CID tests When you invoke one of these applications the bytes in columns 7 to 9 of SOH 1 through N are set to the value FF all ones instead of the default value The JO byte remains unchanged you require CID sequences of other lengths e g for other signal structures you can gener ate these using the ANT 20 Overhead Generator VI To load one of the applications V The Application Manager is on top 1 Click on the Open command in the Application menu The Open Application window opens 2 Click on the application in the list box that you want to use The item will be highlighted in gray 3 Click on the button The selected application will be loaded and the ANT 20 is ready to make measurements A 62 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 20 Setting the ATM signal structure 20 1 Test setup and description Fig A 91 signal structure test setup Interfaces e electrical balanced Rx 12 Tx 13 e electrical unbalanced 14 Tx 15 optical 52 155 622 Mbit s 17 18 e optical 2 5 Gbit s 44 47 1550 nm Tx 48 1310 nm To perform an ATM measurement with the ANT 20 you must first select the corresponding signal structure This section describes the step by step procedure for this with the aid of an example 20 2 Application settings Application Gui
328. t s 1 544 Mbit s t 200 usec 100 usec Table S 20 Delay measurement accuracy as a function of pattern bit rate Specifications S 35 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 7 Other inputs and outputs 71 DCC ECC 21 Interface for inserting outputting TOH POH bytes The bytes are filled dynamically in real time with a contradirectional clock and synchronization signal for n x 64 kbit s channels per frame The clock signal is smoothed The RX data signal is sampled on the falling edge of the RX clock Exchange of TX data takes place on the rising edge of the TX clock 64 kbit s 1 byte frame 128 kbit s 2 bytes frame 192 kbit s 3 bytes frame 576 kbit s 9 bytes frame sew a na u 4 Oe eR V 11 ITU T X 24 and X 27 DOCKEL MINI DELTA RIBBON 20 pole Ground Ground RX data Input RX data inv Input RX control Output RX control inv Output RX clock Input Output RX clock inv Input Output RX synch Input Output CO N O O A N RX synch inv Input Output TX data Output TX data inv Output TX control Output TX control inv Output TX clock Output TX clock inv Output TX synch Output TX synch inv Output Ground 5 V 100 mA inv inverted signal Table S 21 DCC ECC interface pin signals V 11 S 36 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 7 2 TRIGGER 26 SOCR en er ED en
329. t specs are to be met for the path under test to be acceptable see Tab TB 32 The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES see Sec 3 7 2 3 Bringing into Service Performance Objectives Only selectable for meas points for which both near end and far end are evaluated SEP is only included in the verdict for measurement times 7 days Table 30 M 2101 parameter settings continued TB 28 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 7 2 1 End to end performance objectives EEPO for M 2101 1 4 1997 The End to End Performance Objectives EEPOs are listed in table 3 of the M 2101 1 recommendation of 04 1997 EEPO values for Bit rate 5 Mbit s lt Bit rate lt 15 Mbit s 15 Mbit s lt Bit rate lt 55 Mbit s 3 75 55 Mbit s lt Bit rate lt 160 Mbit s 160 Mbit s lt Bit rate lt 3500 Mbit s 1 There is no BBE and no SEP in the M 2101 1 recommendation of 4 1997 2 NA Not Applicable means that this value is not taken into account in the VERDICT Table TB 31 End to End Performance Objectives EEPOs from the recommendation M 2101 1 4 1997 3 7 2 2 End to end performance objectives EEPO for M 2101 6 2000 The End to End Performance Objectives EEPOS are listed in the following tables of the Recommendation M 2101 06 2000 Table 2101 International paths Table 3b M 2101 International multiplex sections The following values are used for measurem
330. tands for Automatic Protection Switching This is a function of SDH networks that prevents connections from being interrupted for a long period if a working line fails If a problem occurs with the working line the system automatically switches to a back up line The time taken to switch circuits must conform to certain requirements To check that the network meets these requirements the ANT 20 measures how long a particular event e g AIS or loss of test pattern remains present after APS has been triggered The measured time is compared with a previously set threshold This provides a simple PASSED FAILED assessment of the APS switching time Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe Version 6 2 Application settings Vis required e Signal Structure Add the VIs required to the list of VIs used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 25 SIE of Fig A 25 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs 6 3 Measurement Settings 1 Click on the APS icon button in the Signal Structure VI toolbar 5 Time Measurement Sensor Switch time limit 81 20 ms Start Gate time t 100 ms 202 t 45 4 Press START START Fig A 26 APS Time Measurement window 2 Select an event for triggering the switch p
331. the type of file for the saved results 4 Click on the button to start exporting the results The file type can be altered using the Export Setup dialog see Sec 9 3 2 2 The file type selection does not affect the contents of the file Operating Fundamentals 41 9 3 2 1 9 3 2 2 42 d Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E The Save as dialog This dialog is used to define the file in which the results are to be exported Exported data can be processed with other programs e g spreadsheet programs Data are output in CSV format comma separated values Each item of data is separated from the next by a list separator The list separator can be selected in the Export Format dialog File name Destination directory Folders File name measi_csY Start exporting c userl c cs y ww Save file as type Drives csv Files amp harddrive File type Fig O 40 Standard Windows Save As dialog for exporting results The Export Format dialog This dialog is used to select a list separator character to be used when exporting data You can also select the character to be used to indicate a decimal point This allows you to match the exported results to the requirements of any spreadsheet program you may be using If the results include time information the time format can also be selected e g h
332. ting range 0 to 100000 Step width 1 Default 0 UAS Mode Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for Near and Far End Individual Separate rating of UAS for Near and Far End Global Common rating of UAS for Near and Far End The total path is unavailable as soon as one side is unavailable Default Individual 1 CRCA word error and EBIT error are computed parallel Allocation indicates how many percent of the end to end target specs are to be met for the path under test to be acceptable see Tab TB 28 The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES see Sec 3 6 2 2 Bringing into Service Performance Objectives Table TB 27 M 2100 parameter settings TB 24 Technical Background 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 6 2 1 End to end error reference performance objectives EERPO Network level Max ES Max SES of time of time soon Table 28 EERPO End to end error reference performance objectives 3 6 2 2 BIS P O 51 and S2 Threshold definition and computing The BISO value is internally computed for ES and SES It is defined as follows BISO ES SES Allocation x EERPO ES SES x Test Period x BISO Multiplier 2 From BISO the thresholds S1 and S2 are computed for ES and SES S1 Limit ES SES BISO ES SES 2 x sqrt BISO ES SES S2 Limit ES SES BISO ES SES 2 x sqrt BISO ES SES For meas times lt 15 m
333. ting wrench is required for this job Fig M 1 Versacon 9 insert for BNC socket Removing the socket 1 Loosen the lock nut by turning it anticlockwise with the fitting wrench 2 Screw the lock nut forward by hand as far as it will go If the insert cannot now be removed by unscrewing it by hand use the fitting wrench to loosen it Fitting the socket 1 Screw the lock nut onto the insert as far as it will go 2 Screw the insert as far as it will go into the basic socket on the instrument 3 Screw the lock nut down by hand clockwise and tighten it using the fitting wrench M 2 Maintenance 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 4 Replacing the fuse If the instrument does not work when it is switched on and the AC line cord is OK the fuse may have blown To replace the fuse proceed as follows see Fig M 2 gt 5 6 First disconnect the ANT 20 from the AC line and all measurement circuits Pull out the fuse holder using a small screwdriver Check the fuse for continuity If the fuse is faulty replace it with new one two spare fuses are supplied with the instrument Put the fuse holder back into the instrument Connect the instrument to the AC line and switch on If the replacement fuse also blows contact your nearest Wavetek Wandel Goltermann Service Center for advice Fig M 2 AC power connector with voltage selector and fuse Maintenance
334. tion Guide A 37 a Mainframe SDH Version 12 3 Measurement Settings v The 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window must already be open 1 Select the MTJ command in the Mode menu or Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar 2 Select the error source e g TSE Test Sequence Error in the Error Source list field currently only bit errors are available 3 Enter the error threshold in the Error Threshold field The error threshold provides a decision criterion for the search algorithm 4 In the Settling Time field enter a delay for each measurement that allows the DUT to settle before the measurement is made 5 Enter the gate time in the Gate Time box 6 In the Settings menu select the MTJ item or Click on the SET symbol The Settings dialog box is opened HTJ Settings Scan Frequency Tolerance Mask kHz ET ES 0 0200 0 5000 6 5000 65 0000 1300 000 200 0000 600 0000 18 1300 000 19 Default Default Cancel Fig 56 MTJ Settings dialog In the box you will find the measurement frequencies for the MTJ measurement and the characteristic data for the tolerance mask 7 f necessary select your own scan frequencies and modify the tolerance mask values 8 Confirm the input with The Settings dialog box is closed 9 Start the measurement with Start The measurement stops automatically but
335. tional constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate G 828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international constant bit rate synchronous digital paths G 957 Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy G 958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables 1 363 B ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer AAL Specification Table SA 1 Overview of important ITU T recommendations continued SA 2 Standards Abbreviations 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version M 2100 Performance limit for bringing into service and maintenance of international PDH paths sections and transmission systems M 2101 Performance limit for bringing into service and maintenance of international SDH paths and multiplex sections M 2110 Bringing into service international digital paths sections and transmission systems 0 150 General requirements for instrumentation for performance measurements on digital transmission equipment 0 151 Error performance measuring equipment operating at the primary rate and above 0 171 Timing jitter and wander measuring equipment for digital systems which are based on the PDH 0 172 Jitter and Wander measuring equipment for digital systems which are based on the SDH 0 181 Equipment to assess error performance on STM N SDH interfaces 0 191 Equipment to assess ATM layer cell transfer performance Q 2010 B IS
336. ts of the Minibar or reduced 20 Application Title gt window 16 Operating Fundamentals LEN ANT 20 ANT 20E Mainframe SDH Version J 4 2 2 Menu bar and pull down menus B 20 Untitled wee instruments Measurement Configure Print Help New Cirit Stopped of 01h 00m busy Open Ctrl O Save Chrl 5 Save As Pull down Delete Cip menu Export Fig 10 Menu bar with Application pull down menu opened The menu bar shows the names of the various pull down menus Menu commands followed by an ellipsis open further windows or dialogs Some commands are followed by a hotkey combination Press the keys shown to execute the command directly 4 2 2 1 The Application menu The Application menu see Fig O 10 handles the following functions for ANT 20 applications Create Load oave Delete Import Export The Exit command closes the ANT20 Application Title gt window and any other 20 windows that are open The program stops and all settings are saved Operating Fundamentals O 17 53 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 3 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E The Instruments menu Instruments Add amp Remove Signal Structure Anomal Detect Analyzer Anomaly Detect Insertion Fig O 11 Instruments menu of the 20 Application Title gt wind
337. ts once software access has been released Table O 3 Programs Files that may be started with the Instant Access Buttons Icon Program File Explanation ANT 20 Starts the ANT 20 program with the last application that was loaded Shortcut Activates the Instant Access Buttons MTIE TDEV Analysis Starts the demo version of the MTIE TDEV Analysis BN 3035 95 21 software TIE amp _ m CATS Test Sequencer Starts the demo version of the 5 Test Sequencer a BN 3035 95 90 software LATS Test Sequenc Acrobat Reader Opens the Quick Guide SDH pdf file a Quick Guide SDH 1 The full version of the program starts once software access has been released Table O 4 Programs Files that may be started with icons links Operating Fundamentals 11 53 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E Icon Program File Explanation Acrobat Reader Opens the Quick Guide SONET pdf file Shortcut Opens a folder with pdf files that can be read using the Acrobat Reader g Quick Guide SONET Shortcut Opens a folder with paf files that can be read using the Acrobat Reader Documents Wn Shortcut For service purposes only ANT 20 Info 1 The full version of the program starts once software access has been released Table O 4 Programs Files that may be started with icons links continued Notes on the use of the Instant Access Buttons
338. u select the item VBR In the Traffic menu select the item Set VBR The dialog box opens CON AC VBR x Contract parameters Entry Settings Peak Cell Rate Cell Parameters PCR Peak Rate SCR Sustainable Cell Rate MBS Maximum Burst Size c EEEE Mean Cell Rate Burst Size Burstperiod Cancel Fig A 124 dialog box in the ATM Signal Structure window 9 Set the following parameters in the Settings field the Peak Cell Rate PCR the Mean Cell Rate MCR the burst length and the burst period 10 Confirm your entries with OK The mean cell rate that has been set is reflected in the ATM Signal Structure display Starting the measurement Application Manager Press the function key F5 Click on the green traffic signal icon Overview of the parameters PCR MCR burst length etc You can use the following parameters to define the variable load on the test channel the Peak Cell Rate PCR the Mean Cell Rate MCR the burst length and the burst period The next Figure clarifies the significance of the various parameters All parameters are related A 82 Application Guide 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version First of all setthe Peak Cell Rate This cell rate equals the burst load The Mean Cell Rate is therefore directly dependent on the ratio of the burst length to the bu
339. ual instrument is displayed in a separate window The virtual instruments for the measurement application that is currently loaded are also shown as icons on the left hand side of the Application Manager Virtual instruments are used to control or display certain related functions or measurement results Detailed information about the individual virtual instruments is found in Part 4 of this manual This information is also found in the on line help for the particular VI to provide instant assistance for measurement tasks The virtual instruments fall into four main groups e Signal Structure see Part 4 Section 2 The Signal Structure VI is a universal instrument that is required for practically every application It is normally loaded at the same time as the Application Manager when the program is booted up e Physical Layer These VIs are used for measurements in the physical layer Anomaly Defect Insertion see Part 4 Section 3 Anomaly Defect Analyzer see Part 4 Section 4 Overhead Generator see Part 4 Section 5 Overhead Analyzer see Part 4 Section 6 Pointer Generator see Part 4 Section 7 Pointer Analyzer see Part 4 Section 8 PDH Generator Analyzer see Part 4 Section 9 Performance Analysis see Part 4 Section 10 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer see see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 7 e Standard These VIs are used for measurements in the ATM layer if the ATM Mod
340. ule ATM Mappings option 15 fitted ATM Signal Structure see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 8 ATM Background Generator see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 8 Traffic Analyzer see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 8 e ATM Advanced These instruments are used for measurements in the ATM and higher service layers if the Broadband Analyzer Generator option is fitted ATM Test Control see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 9 ATM Test Result see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 9 ATM Channel Explorer see Operating Manual BN 3035 96 21 Part 9 14 Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 4 2 Elements of the ANT20 Application gt window The 20 Application Title gt window is made up from the following elements e Toolbar e Menu bar with pull down menus e Title bar Some functions can be accessed from the menus and from the icons in the toolbar The individual elements are described in the sections that follow To allow you to make the best use of the screen area while you are working the ANT20 Application Title gt window be switched from its normal size see Fig O 8 to a space saving reduced size see Sec 4 2 1 Toolbar Menu bar Title bar im 20 Untitled Application Instruments Measurement Configure Print Help 00m 275 af forn oom busy _ Normal Reduced Mi
341. um value is calculated and shown in the results window This value can be influenced by selecting a shorter or a longer test pattern Signal structure Short test pattern Max measured Long test pattern Max measured value in ms value in ms mes m gt _ fes m m _ Mw e _ mess id Wurm pw _ 2 pes m 1 Measurement only possible with this test pattern 2 depending on Table S 19 measurement values as a function of signal structure and test pattern S 34 Specifications 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version Signal structure Short test pattern Max measured Long test pattern Max measured value in ms value in ms n x 64 unframed IPRBS20 511 to 511106552 OC PRBS23 4095 to 5242 25 lt lt 32 64 unframed PRBS20 682 to 9632 23 5461 to 77102 17 lt lt 24 64 k unframed PRBS15 31 to 56 PRBS23 8191 to 145632 9 lt lt 16 64 unframed PRBS15 255 to 63 20 2047 10 81912 um 64kunframed unframed PRBSI5 5 51 PRBS20 1 Measurement only possible with this test pattern 2 depending on Table S 19 measurement values as a function of signal structure and test pattern continued The accuracy and display resolution also depend on the pattern bit rate 64 kbi
342. up and description ATM switch EI E E E E E EJ EJ EJ EJ E EXXIXIXI PVCC Fig A 122 Setup for cell loss ratio measurements The Cell Loss Ratio CLR is a quality of service parameter The CLR is the ratio of the number of lost cells to the total cells sent 25 2 Switch configuration 1 Set up a unidirectional permanent connection with a variable bit rate through the switch 2 Configure the VBR contract for the connection 25 3 Application selection on the ANT 20 Vis required oignal Structure ATM Signal Structure ATM Traffic Analyzer Anomaly and Defect Analyzer Add the VIs required to the list of Vis used in the Application Manager The Application Manager should include at least the following instruments see Fig A 123 Fig A 123 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs Application Guide A 81 a Mainframe SDH Version eee 25 4 Measurement Settings 1 Open the ATM Signal Structure window 2 Inthe Edit menu select the item ATM Structure or Click on the corresponding button in the toolbar This activates the Structure window In the 00 field click the Testcell button In the Performance Measurement field click on Error Related Performance Transfer the send side settings to the receive side by clicking the Tx gt Rx button Confirm your entries with OK In the Traffic men
343. utomatic protection switching APS to demonstrate that the permitted maximum drop out times for a connection are not exceeded The dialog is only available if the Extended Overhead Analysis option 15 fitted Using a selected criterion such as AIS or bit error burst the drop out times of tributary connections are measured and compared with a pre set check value The selectable criteria are MS AIS AU AIS TU AIS and TSE ITU T e AIS L AIS P AIS V TSE ANSI The result is a simple Passed or Failed message APS Time Measurement Sensor Switch time limit 1 50 3 Check value permitted switching time Setting criterion e g Multiplexer Section AIS Gate time t2 i00 ms Time remaining to end of overall measurement 45 ms Passed Result display Press START qualitative PASSED FAILED quantitative measured switching time START Fig VI 7 APS Time Measurment dialog Sensor Selecting the setting criterion Sensor specifies which event is to be evaluated and measured as the switching event e g MS AIS measures the duration of a Multiplexer Section Alarm e e g TSE measures the time for which the test pattern PRBS dropped out Virtual instruments Signal Structure 20 20 Mainframe Version Tip Ifthe sensor criterion is already present in the signal at the start of the measurement the time cannot b
344. uttons application will be activated The desktop will now look like this 2 le f ANT 20 le BANT 20 CATS Demo CATS Demo d WAEADME ie UM UM Su m er L Instant Access Buttons i m m ane em Activate Instant Access Buttons SEES n 2 Quick Guide Start 20 T programs 20 a 20 Quick Guide Documents SONET Other program ons 15 and folders e ANT 20Info CATS Test Sequenc TIE amp MTIE_TDE Fig 7 ANT 20 desktop after activating the Instant Access Buttons Operating Fundamentals 20 20 Mainframe SDH Version 3 Click on the Instant Access Button or on the icon for the program that you want to start The program will start The following programs can be started in this way Instant Access Button Program File Explanation ANT 20 Starts the ANT 20 program with a pre defined application AMT 2 sample ANT 20 NEXT Starts the demo version of the 20 NEXT ANT 20 BN 3035 95 40 Network Expert Test software ANT 20 CATS Starts the demo version of the ANT 20 CATS software with LATS Demo BN 3035 95 90 a pre defined application Sy NOTEPAD EXE Starts the Window Notepad program text editor Notepad Opens the readme file about the Instant Access Buttons 1 The full version of the program star
345. w for input of the following parameters Allocation Entry of path allocation in percent 96 Setting range 0 196 to 10096 Step width 0 196 Default 10096 BISO Multiplier Weighting factor for BIS P O Setting range 0 1 to 100 Step width 0 1 Default 1 0 UAS Limit Switches and threshold for taking UAS into account in the path status VERDICT Off UAS have no influence on path status On If UAS limit exceeded path status is rated as Rejected Setting range 0 to 100000 Step width 1 Default 0 Switch for separate or common rating of UAS for Near and Far End Individual Separate rating of UAS for Near and Far End Global Common rating of UAS for Near and Far End The total path is unavailable as soon as one side is unavailable Default Individual Table TB 30 M 2101 parameter settings Technical Background TB 27 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E M 2101 Version This list box allows you to select between evaluation according to M 2101 1 4 1977 or M 2101 6 2000 The two Recommendations differ in the specified performance ob jective values The newer Recommendation also includes evalua tion of BBE and SEP Default 6 2000 SEP used in Toggle for including SEP in the verdict Verdict The measurement values are determined and displayed regardless of the toggle setting Default ON Allocation indicates how many percent of the end to end targe
346. w the recommendations set out in ETSI ETS 300462 EN 302084 ITU T G 811 G 812 G 813 and ANSI T1 101 and include the masks for the various signal sources Starting the MTIE TDEV Analysis program from the 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer 1 Click on the TDEV button in the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer wander side window The program starts and the TIE data from the previous measurement stored in the file WANDMSEC BIN are loaded automatically The TIE data are displayed in the graphics box of the TIE analysis window Click on the MTIE TDEV button The MTIE analysis window opens see Fig A 84 Click on the Analysis button in this window The values are calculated and displayed Starting the MTIE TDEV Analysis program from the Windows 95 Start menu i 2 Click on the appropriate item in the Windows 95 Start menu The program starts Click on the Load button The Load data file dialog opens Select the WANDMSEC BIN file from the CAANT20 RESULTS directory Select a previously exported CSV format file The TIE data are displayed in the graphics box of the TIE analysis window Click on the MTIE TDEV button The MTIE analysis window opens see Fig A 84 Click on the Analysis button in this window The values are calculated and displayed Possible evaluations A 56 The check boxes at the lower left of the MTIE
347. water to which a little detergent has been added Never use cleaning fluids which contain solvents such as methylated spirits or petroleum Such solvents may attack the lettering on the instrument Cleansers for plastic or furniture should also be avoided as these often contain polishing agents which may damage the lettering or leave shiny patches on the instrument finish Simply dampen a cloth with the warm water and detergent solution and wipe the instrument clean Make sure that drops of water do not enter the instrument Wipe off excess moisture using a clean dry cloth to ensure that no spots or drying marks are left on the housing Always use a damp cloth to clean the screen in order to prevent scratching and electrostatic charges The following tools are included with your instrument These tools are required for maintenance operations e g opening the instrument in order to replace the air filter e Hexagon key wrench Allen key for the hex socket head screws holding the housing together e Fitting wrench for the Versacon 9 system connector inserts M 1 Mainframe SDH Version ANT 20 ANT 20E 3 Exchanging Versacon inserts Some of the inputs and outputs are equipped with Versacon 9 system connectors These inputs and outputs will be fitted with the inserts which you ordered standard fitting is BNC inserts The inserts can be replaced at any time with other inserts from the Versacon 9 system see Fig M 1 The fit
348. window for the O 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer RIEN rmm Fig 80 Minibar Application Manager after selecting the VIs m wle 17 3 Measurement Settings 1 In the Mode menu select TIE Click on the Wander button in the toolbar The wander display appears in the 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer mm gt Mode View Settings Keyboard Print Help wc 01 Fea 1 00000 Wander HTIE TIE 379 9 s TIE versus Time Alarm 1E 6 1E 6 14 08 00 14 08 30 20 05 99 Fig 81 0 172 Jitter Generator Analyzer window with wander display 2 In the Settings menu select Wander Click on the SET icon in the toolbar Set the reference clock frequency in this window A 54 Application Guide 20 20 Application Guide Mainframe SDH Version Wander Settings T Jitter RX Reference Amplitude Step ul L onnector Clock Data Kbit s C BAL 34 UNBAL 35 54 Samples LP Filter 0 1 Hz Fig A 82 Wander Settings dialog In the Wander Settings dialog set the frequency or bit rate not for 2488 Mbit s of the reference signal Select the reference signal input required BAL 34 or UNBAL 35 not for 2488 Mbit s Select the sample rate required The low pass filter is set automatically Click OK to confirm Start the measu
349. x 86 pointer jumps are generated followed by 4 missing pointers 3 Set the distance between two pointer actions in the T2 entry box 4 Set the desired sequence length in the Mode box Select between a single sequence or continuous repetition 5 Click on the AUON button to activate the pointer sequence 6 Start the measurement by pressing function key F5 Click on the green traffic signal icon in the Application Manager For detailed descriptions of the available pointer sequences see part 7 Technical Background Pointer analysis The Pointer Analyzer has two windows for the two types of pointer just like the Pointer Generator The measurement record starts once function key F5 has been pressed The results are shown as a display of pointer address versus time and as an absolute value of increment decrement INC DEC versus time The graphic display makes it easy to see if the system is running synchronously or if wander is present Application Guide A 27 28 Mainframe SDH Version 52 Pointer Analyzer HERE Pointer Zoom Cursor Print Help Current 274 Curent TU U Alarms 900 Pointer 100 Pointer Inc Dec 10 1 RIDE 1 10 05 03 37 Cursor ES Date 05 09 97 13 12 27 Resolution Second Pointer Value 172 INCS 1 DECS 0 SUH 1 DIFF 1 Deviation 0 16 ppm Fig A 42 Pointer Analyzer ANT 20 ANT 20E If you click on the
350. y of equipment Part 2 1 SDH and PDH physical section layer functions ETS 300 417 3 1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Part 3 1 STM N regenerator and multiplex section layer functions ETS 300 417 4 1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Part 4 1 SDH path layer functions ETS 300 417 5 1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Part 5 1 PDH path layer functions ETS 300 417 6 1 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Part 6 1 Synchronization layer functions ETS 300 462 1 Generic requirements for synchronization networks Part 1 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks ETS 300 462 2 Generic requirement for synchronization networks Part 2 Synchronization network architecture ETS 300 462 3 Generic requirement for synchronization networks Part 3 The control of jitter and wander within synchronization networks ETS 300 462 4 Generic requirements for synchronization networks Part 4 Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable for synchronization supply to SDH and PDH equipment ETS 300 462 5 Generic requirements for synchronization networks Part 5 Timing characteristics of slave clocks suitable for operation in synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDH equipment ETS 300 462 6 Generic requirements for synchronization networks Part 6 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks Table SA 4 Overview
351. ys Open the dialog using the Application Save As command in the pop up menu reduced size Application Manager Open the dialog using the command sequence Application Save As normal size Application Manager The Save Application As dialog window opens Save Application As Destination z A et Date Time T Comment A 15 08 37 17 33 STM1 2 2 STMI 2 2 Comment for the application Fig O 23 Save Application As window To save an application 1 Click on the Comment box 2 Use the keyboard to enter a comment for the application e g Error Measurement 3 Click on The application is saved The window title shown in the title bar of the Application Manager will change from Untitled to the title you entered in the Comment box e g Error Measurement e The Application Save reduced size and Application Save normal size Application Manager menu commands modify the current application in the database e The Application Save As reduced size and Application Save As normal size Application Manager menu commands create a new application 5 4 Loading an application The ANT 20 allows you to load pre defined applications using the Open Application dialog Open the dialog using the Application Open command in the pop up menu reduced size Ap

sdh_operating manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents